Introductiontopr 00 Woolrich

INTRODUCTION TO PKAKRIT
BY
ALFRED
C.
WOOLNER.
M.A. (OXON),
PRINCIPAL OF THE ORIENTAL COLLEGE,
LAHORE.
PUBLISHED
BY THE
UNIVERSITY OF THE PAN JAB, LAHORE.
CALCUTTA
PRINTED AT THE BAPTIST MISSION PRESS.
1917.
-^/ u>
Ganthaarena niaguruno
Siri-
Arthur.
Anthony.
Macdonbll.
-acarianarindassa Baillatitthatthassa
nam a
aavvaim uvaaranaim sumaria
imassa potthaassa adimmi
sasineham
ahilihidam.
MJi98871
I*KEFA(
Degree
courses
of
in
E.
invariably
is
Sanskrit
almost
include
Drama,
practice,
which a considerable portion
in
Prakrit.
In
whatever Examiners may imagine, the student reads
the Sanskrit chayd, which most editions provide for him on the
same page.
At any rate he begins that way
reading the
Prakrit afterwards, noticing certain similarities, and some of
the differences, so that he
may
be able to recognize a passage,

its
with which he
is
already familiar in
Sanskrit form, and
perhaps in an English translation.

student
Even the more advanced

it
who
reads the Prakrit as

'
comes, at the slightest
check looks down at the
shadow.'
of
Consequently few students

of the Prakrits
have any
definite
knowledge
any one
One
cannot blame them.
Tlie editions they use are often incorrect

is
in the Prakrit portions, and there
no convenient book of
reference on which they can
find definite rules.
One object
of
this Introduction to Prakrit is to provide students

for the
with a guide
of the Saura-
more attentive and more scholarly study
seni
and Maharastri passages
in their Sanskrit Plays.

is
The main object however
to assist the student of the
History of the great Indo- Aryan

to the present day.
Language from Vedic
times
The Indian student

one
starts with an inti-
mate knowledge
of at least
modern Indo-Aryan
language.
In the Sanskrit he learns at school, he becomes familiarised with the stereotyped literary form of the ancient language.
If
he studies Sanskrit in the University, he will discover that

still
the Vedic language represents a
more ancient stage
of
vi
PREFACE.
Indo- Aryan.
For
this
there are accurate
texts,
and many
works
of reference available.'
The middle stage has been comparatively

India
itself,
neglected.
In
the mediaeval Prakrits are in a more real sense

is
dead languages, than
Sanskrit
itself.
Outside India scholars

of
have found
Scriptures,
in
Pali,
the language
the oldest
Buddliist
convenient representative of this stage.
The
tlie
student of Indo- Aryan Philology needs a clear view of
main
this
characteristics of the diflFerent Prakrits.
It is
hoped that
work may prove

of Study.
useful for this purpose.
Method
Perhaps the best plan
is
to begin with
the thorough study of one dialect, afterwards comparing others
with this as a standard.
This was the method of the Indian
grammarians who took Maharastri as their standard.
But the
only fyroae extant in Maharastri was written by Jains, and that
not in the same dialect as the songs in the dramas.

excellent aids to the study of Pali, but
There are
Pah
is
too archaic to
make a good
curricula,
central point,
and
it is
a separate subject in our

as
and generally
regarded
appropriate
only
to
students of Buddhism.
actually
first
it is
Moreover the Sanskrit student does
come
into contact with Prakrit in the plays,
and
has
most
of
Sauraseni.
For
this,
among
other reasons,
it
been thought desirable to present a general view

with special stress on Sauraseni and Maharastri.
of the subject,
The student making
use of this book
is
advised to read the
general sections, and to study the chapters on Phonetics and
Grammar
'
with special reference to the two main
Dramatic
Particularly
.A.
recommended
Vedic
(>iinnninr
for
Students
by
Prof.
A. Macdonell, Clarendon Press.
19)1).
PREFACE.
Prakrits.
Vll
The more important examples
are printed in bold

1
type, and
may be memorised.
The Extracts
to 14 should
then
be thoroughly mastered, and the
knowledge acquired
applied to any play the student
may be
reading.'
The next step

comparison
will
be more philological, consisting in the
of the several stages
and dialects as
far as they are
described in Chapters IV to
to the end.*
X, and
illustrated in Extracts 15
The specimens
of
PaH and
of old Prakrit are
intended as
inducements to further study.
Modern forms have been occasionally quoted to show the

historical continuity of
words from ancient times.
The student
of
should be able to connect up a
much
larger
number
forms
from
his
mother tongue.
is
The Index
intended partly for convenience of reference,

test
and partly to provide an instrument by which one may
one's ability to explain forms, and to recognize them out of

their context.
Transliteration.
several reasons.
The Roman
script
has
been used
for
Over a dozen years
of teaching experience has
convinced the writer that the slovenly spelling, so prevalent in

both
Roman and Devanagari
scripts, is partly
due to the
script,
fact
that Hindi
and Sanskrit are written
in the
same
but
with slightly different sound-values.

nagrl
A word
VH
as
written in Devae.g.
may
be pronounced as in Sanskrit or as in Hindi,
HJWTf, as hhagavan or as bhagvdn,
dharma or dharam,
'
If
he
will
read a play for the sake of these two Prakrits only,
let
him
choose KarpCiramanjari (Konow's Edition).

2
The most
interesting play for variety of dialect
is
the Mrcchakatikam.
Vlli
PREFACE.
as
if
Î5
mmaveda or samved and
so on.
Confusion
is
in-
creased
tion
the student has to distinguish a Prakrit pronunciaspelling

is is
when the
identical witli that of a
modern word.
more atomic
Another reason
that the
Roman
script being
than Devanagarl has advantages for stating phonetic laws in
Enghsh.
Moreover any Indian student who aims at keeping abreast

with modern scholarship should
liar
make
himself thoroughly fami-
with the use of this script.
To make
it
use of
many books
of
reference, and Oriental Journals,
is
almost as
important to
him, as Devanagarl to the Western scholar.
These reasons seemed to outweigh the disadvantages

increased labour in proof-reading, and
tlie initial feeling of
of
un-
familiarity with Sanskrit in this guise that
may
be experienced
by the beginner.
On
doubtful points, such as derivations where "Doctors
disagree," the authority of Pischel has generally been followed.
Controversy has generally been avoided, and where any

ence has been
it is
refer-
made
to rival theories or matters of dispute,

fields of
only to suggest to the student
enquiry that
still
await his enterprise.
Apart from
facilitating the
it is
study
of the Indian
Drama, and
of Indian Philology,
hoped that
this little
book may lead

interest in the
lies
some
great
of our students
field of
and graduates to take an
Indian thought and literature that
outside the
it
Sanskrit
circle.
Without some knowledge

an adequate idea
of this,
is
impos-
sible to obtain
of the life of mediaeval India.
(lulmarg.
191
A. C.
WOOLNER.
TABLE OF THANSI.ITKRA TION.

Vowels.
-^
TABLE OF TRANSLITERATION.
2.
Similarly other nasals are often represented by anusvara.
^^ pamca
for
pafic
^^
^ damda
SJ^,
sainkha
for
for
jambu
for
sankha danda jambu
but see
3.
35
9.
For the weak y see

Hindi
Note.
4.
^
^
is
this causes
letter
r, cerebral oS by 1. In practice no confusion with the vowels The 1. f and d was probably pronounced as a cerebral r long before
represented by
the diacritical dot for

5.
was devised.
is
In general
it
should be understood that transliteration
merely the substitution of one set of symbols for another, and

does not
tell
us anything
more about the pronunciation.
It is
quite possible that
ca was pronounced something like tsa in
Maharlstri as in modern Marathi, and that in Magadha
^T
was pronounced as Bengali renders it to-day. Even if so, we may feel sui'e that a Midlander would use his own sounds iu pronouncing either Prakrit.
CONTENTS.
Pages
Preface Table of Transliteration Corrections
. .
.
. .
v-viii
ix-x
.
xv
PART
Chapter
I:
I.
Subject Defined.
Three periods of Indo-Aryan speech Three stages of the middle period Various uses of the word Prakrt
1-4
Chapter II Prakrits Enumeration of the more important Uterary

:
Prakrits
4r-7
Chapter III Remains
General Character of Prakrit.
synthetic Grammar simplified Phoassimilation Parallel of Ronetic changes
mance languages
7-10
Chapter IV
Phonetics.
.
Single Consonants.
A. Initial I to C. Final 29
8. B Medial
.
9 to
.
28.
.
10-16
Chapter V
Compound Consonants.
Assimilation
Nasal and 33 Two mutes 34 Mute 35 Mute and Sibilant 38 Semivowel and Mute 38 and 41 Two Nasals 46 Nasal and Sibilant 47 Nasal and Semivowel 48 Sibilant and Semivowel 49 Two Semivowels
50 Svarabhakti
:
57
..
..
..
17-23
Chapter VI
of
Vowels.
Substitutes for
r 60 Change for ai, au 61 Quantity 62 Lengthening 63 Shortening 67 Vowel for Vowel 69 Omission of Vowels 74 Samprasarana 75 Epenthesis 76
".
23-28
Chapter VII: Sandhi.

A. Consonants
77 B.
Vowels
80
..
29-30
XU
CONTENTS.
Chapter VIII: Declension.
Pages
stems Feminine R stems
SOI
stems
88 U
91
declension
stems Variants
90
96 AN
stems
|j
98 IN
92 stems
.Sl-41
100
-AT
nouns
stems 102 S stems 106 Numerals 112
104 Pro-
Chapter IX: Conjugation.

Indicative
114
Imperative
5>
116
Optative
117 Future 118 Passive 119 Causatives 120 Participles and Infinitive 121 Gerund 122 Irregular Verb.s 123 Past
Participles 125 Irregular Indicatives 126 Irregular Futures 134 Irregular Passives 135 Infinitives 136 Gerundives 137
42-57
Chapter X: Classification of Prakrits. Magadhi Dialects of Magadhi Ardha-Magadhi
Geographical classification Pali-Apablirain4a Paiâci

.
..
..
..
57-69
Chapter XI
Jain
Prakrit Literaturk. Ardha-Magadhi ahgas J Siin Maharastri-Kavya Setubandha Gaudavaho Hala Dramatic Prakrits Prakrit Grammars
:
Literature
70-80
PART
Extract No.
1.
TT.
Sauraseni Ratnavali^-(Dialogue) Translation
81-82
2.
Sauraseni Ratnavali (The Picture) Translation
83-86
86-89
3.
Sauraseni. Sakuntala Translation

Sauraseni.
(Vidiisaka)
4.
Sakuntahx
Translation
(Before
the
King)
,
89-92
5.
S'auraseni.
ine
,
Karpura-manjari and Tunnel)
(Hero..
.
92-96
96-97
6.
7.
S'auraseni.
S'auraseni.
Same Play (Puns)

Mrcchakatikam
.
(Scene
.
with the chiid^

,
97100
HX> 102
8.
Sauraseni. Same Play mires the door)
(Jester ad..
..
9.
Maharastri.
of
Verses
trom
Sattasai
..
H Ala
102 107
CONTENTS.
Xill
Pages
Extract No.
10.
Maharastri. kuntaia
Maharastri.
Five Songs from Sa. .
107-109
,,
,,1112.
Three Mrcchakatikam
Verses
..
from
..
109-110
,,
,,
Maharastri.
Camphor
,,
Six Verses from the Cluster ., ..
110-112
112-113
,,13.
Maharastri.
RatnavaU
One
.
Song
.
.
and Three Verses

,,
,,14.
Maharastri. Setubandha Building Rama's head the Causeway

Sita's
Translation
lament
Return to Ayodhya
..
..
. .
.
113-122 122-127
,,
,,
15.
Jain Maharastri. Ma ndio the Robber Translation
,,
,,
16.
Domuha Jain Maharastri. Doubleface Translation

Jain Maharastri
tion
King
. .
127-133 134-139
,,
,,
17.
Kakkuka
.
Inscrip. .
Translation
,.
,,18.
19.
Jain Maharastri. Kalakacarya Story of the Shahi Translation

Ardha-Magadlii.
lation
.
139-144
144-149
,,
,,
Udayana Tmws
.
.
.
,,
,,
20.
Ardha-Magadhi. Uvasagadasao Saddalaputta the Potter Translation

. . . .
149-156
156-165
,,
,,
21.
Ardha-Magadhi. Kalpasutra King^s Toilet Translation

Magadhi. S'akuntala. and the PoHce
The
..
. .
,,
,,
22.
Fisherman
.
165-168
168-169
169-171
,,
,,
23.
Magadhi. Mrcchakatikam. varaka on the roof

.
Stha. .
,,
,,
24.
Magadhi.
Same Same
..
play.
The King's
..
..
brother-in-law
,,
,,
25.
Magadhi.
ses
play.
S'akari ver..
..
171-172
,,
,,26.
Magadhi (Dhakki). Same Mathura and Gambler

Magadhi.
Lalita Vigraharaja.
play.
.
172-174
174-176
,,
,,27.
Two
. .
Turushka Prisoners and a Spy
CONTENTS.
Pages
Extract No.
28.
Avanti and Daksinatya. Mrcchakatikarn. Viraka and Candanaka
176-179 179-180
29.
Pravacanasara
30. 31.
32.
Bhasa
Pali.
180-184
Jataka (308) Jataka (339) Mahavaipsa

Prakrit.
184^186
186-188
188-190
In-
Pali.
Pali.
33.
34.
Old
Hathigumplia
Inscription
scription
35.
191
193 194
Old Magadhi.
.
Index of Examples
195-214
215
Students' Bibliography
(OKIIIXTIONS.
Page 11,
,,
,,
7, for
dhvanksa read dhvanksa.

dulaha read dulaha.
29, 79, for
38, last line for tain read tai.

65, note 3, for
,,
Biography read Bibliography.
,,
75, note, line 3, for Mrcchakatikam read Mrcchakatikam,

,,
,,12, for
CandakauMkam read Candakauîkam.

" Bow" and
,,
,,
79, line 24, for Prdkrtd- read Prakrta-.
Insert a comma after 85, penultimate line. delete stop after " vanquishing."
87, line 9, for nivinno read iiivinno.
,,
So
in note 2.
,,
93, line 7, for vitthavena read vittharena.
Footnote 6 refers to
line 8 vinnaviadi.
Note
,,
13, for
Cakkavatti read Cakkavatti.
99, line 1, for
mattaa read mattia.

bhakkanti read bhakkhanti.
sa-dahina read sadahina.
,,
,,
101, line 5. -pataa-, better reading -padaa-.

102, line 9,
f(yr
Note
J,
,,
9, for
110, verse (a), for nisasa read nisasa.
112, verse (a), for sasahara read sasa-hara.

113, verse
(6),
,,
,,
,,
115, footnote.
Hyphen between Omit " ? rather
-supadi-tthia-.
to chastise the
monkeys."
116, verse 63, note, for saindattha read sanidattha.
,,
120, verse 82, note, for vinajjai read vi-najjai.

,,
83, for
nivvudham Naha read nivvudhatii Naha.
,, ,,
,,
121, verse 14, for latthim read latthirn.
124, note 13, cerebral n thrice.
136, verse 17, for pagada read pagada.

,,
19, /or bia read bla
,,
141, note 6, for nirvuha read nirvaha.

161, note 5, for
,,
paccurpanna read paccuppanna.
INTRODUCTION TO PEAKRIT.
PART
I.
CHAPTER
The history
of the
I.
SUBJECT DEFINED.
North Indian or Indo-Arjân languages
divided
into
may
(i)
be conveniently
three
periods
ancient,
mediaeval^
and modern.
of the ancient or
(a)
The speech
sented in literature
Old Indian period is repreby the language of the Rig Veda, (&) by
that of later Vedic books.
To
this period
(c)
belonged also those

the poetic diction of
spoken dialects on which were based

the Epics, and
{d)
the more highly polished (Samskrta) literary
language of Panini, Patanjali, and thereafter of Kalidasa and

the others
(ii)
down
to the present day.
in literature
The mediaeval or Middle Indian period is represented by Pali and the Prakrits, It comprises all the
from the time (whenever
it
dialects
was) that certain phonetic

also,
changes, with some variations in
grammar
had produced
a language obviously different from Old Indian,

time
(?
down
to the
about 1100
a.d.)
when
further phonetic changes and the
complete break up of the old grammar had produced a new

type of language similar to that of the modern vernaculars.
Our knowledge
times.
of this period has to be pieced together
from a
literary
variety of records, referring to different localities and different
These records comprise inscriptions as well as
works.
of
Of the inscriptions the most famous are the Edicts
Asoka. The literature comprises the Pjxli Canon of the "Southern" or Hinayana Buddhists, the Prakrit Canon of
2
the Jains,
INTRODUCTION TO PRAKRIT.
the Prjikrit of Lyrics, Epics and Plays and the
Prakrit grammars.
(iii)
The beginning
of tlie third or
It Hes
modern period has not

latest sort of
in
been fixed with precision.

V Prakrit, or
between the
apabhramsa
described by
Hemacandra
the
twelfth century, and the earhest poetry of the Old Vernaculars.
The oldest poem in Western Hindi is the Prithi Raj Rasau by Chand Bardai of Lahore (about 1200 a.d.).
The middle period can be again divided into three stages Old Prakrit (or Pali); (2) Middle Prakrit; (3) Late (1)
Prakrit or Apabhramsa.
(1)
The Old Prakrit stage includes

B.C.
(a)
Inscriptions from the

to
middle of the Ord century

A.D.
(6)
down
the 2nd century
The
dialect varies with time
Pali of the
and place. Hinayana Canon and other Buddhist works,
as the
Mahavamsa and the Jatakas.

more aichaic form
of language
In the Jatakas, or Birth Stories of the Buddha, the verses

(gathas) preserve a
prose.
(c)
than the
(d)
The language The Prakrits
of the oldest Jain Siitras.
of early plays,
such as those
of
A^vaghosa
of
which fragments have been found

(2)
in Central Asia.
(a)
(b)
The Middle Prakrit stage includes

lyrics of the
Maharastri. the
the other Drama-
language of the liquid

tic Prakrits,
Deccan,
Saurasoni, Magadhi, etc., as found in the pla3's of

(r)
Kalidasa and his successors, and in the grammarians;

dialects
of
the
the
is
later Jain
books
(d)
Paisaci, in
which the
is
Brhatkatha
said to
have been composed, but which
known
only from the statements of grammarians.

(3)
Apabhram&as were not much used
for literary purposes.
They represent the stage reached by ordinary colloquial speech when the Prakrit type of speech as found in the plays was already archaic, and had been refined and stereotyped by the grammarians. By the time that Hemacandra recorded a
particular
archaic.
Apabhramâ
of the
West,
this
was probably already
This book
or
is
concerned in general with the second, mediaeval,

of the Indian language,
middle period
the
and
in particular
with
Middle Prakrit stage,
especially
the
Dramatic
Prakrits.
Various uses of the word " Prakrit."
the more precise
Prakrta derived from meaning

its
prakrti has
of
two
lines of
meaning
(a)
something belonging to or derived

of
from a prakrti, the original form

vikiti
anything as opposed to a
:
modification,
is
as
in
Samkhya Philosophy
prakrta
(6)
means what
derived from Prakrti, the original element;

'
the looser meanings of

It is
natural, ordinary, vulgar, provincial.'
probable that
(S'auraseni
'prakrta^
more general sense that 'pdiida' Maharastri 'paiia^) was first

it
was
in this
applied to ordinary
common
speecii as distinct
from the highly
polished, perfected Saniskritam.
Grammarians and Rhetoricians

explanation
correct.
is
of later
days however explain

i.e.
prdkrtam as derived from the prakrti,

perfectly intelligible even
samskrtam.
This
if it
be not historically
as the basis
Practically
we take Sanskrit forms

therefrom.
and
derive Prakrit forms
Nevertheless modern philo:
logy insists on an important reservation
Sanskrit forms are
quoted as the basis in as far as they represent the Old Indian

forms, but sometimes
to explain a Prakrit
frhe
particular Old Indian form required
only in a late
If in
word is not found in Sanskrit at all, or work and obviously borrowed from Prakrit.
all
"Sanskrit" we include the Vedic language and

If
dialects of the Old Indian period, then it is true to say that

all
the Prakrits are derived from Sanskrit.

is
on the other
untrue to say
hand " Sanskrit "

that any Prakrit
seni, the
used more strictly of the Panini-Patanjali

it
is
language or "Classical Sanskrit," then

is
derived from Sanskrit, except that S'aurais
Midland Prakrit,
derived from the Old Indian dialect
4
of
the
MadhyadeSa on which
Classical Sanskrit
was mainly
based.
In Europe the word Prakrit has been used

or to the Prakrit passages in plays.
(6)
(a)
to refer to
particular languages classed as Prakrit in India, e.g. Maharastrl,
Of the Middle Period of the Indian languages

earlier stage
(Pali
and the early inscriptions forming an

times distinguished from Prakrit
(c)
').
were some-
Of the natural spoken language as distinct from the

In this last sense
literary learned language.
some writers*
Out of
various
as
it
distinguish Primary, Secondary and Tertiary Prakrits as the
natural spoken dialects of the three great periods.

these successive types of
literary idioms
spoken speech grew the
which became stereotyped or

in use alongside of the
fossilised
were, and remained
living
and ever-
changing dialects.
CHAPTER
PRAKRITS.
The
following are the
:
II.
p^
more important
literary Prakrits (Pali
being excluded)
M.
S*.
Maharastri
S'auraseni
)
f
>
Dramatic Prakrits.
Mg.
AMg.
J. J.
Mag"adhi Ardha-Magadhi
Jain-Maharastri
Jain- S'auraseni
^
\
)
M.
S'.
Jain Canon.
(Apa.
1
ApabhramSa.)
and Sanskrit uses
'
Dr. O. Franke in his Pali
Pali
'
for the
Middle
Period including Inscriptions.

s
Vide Article on Prakrit by Dr. Sir George Qrierson in Encyclopaedia
Britaumica,
XlXth
Edition.
M.
Maharastri was regarded

special
rules,
as the Prakrt par excellence.
Prakrit gratamars gave the rules for this

there were
For others first. and then "the rest is like some Maharastri." Danclin remarks (K.D. 1.35) Mahardstrdsraydm
:
bhdsdm prakrstam prdkrtavn viduh.

In the drama ladies
Maharastri.
the limits of
who speak Sauraseni, sing their songs in The Maharastri lyrics were famous far beyond Maharastram. The same language is used for the
This language of the
carries further
Prakrit Epics such as the Gaiidavaho.
Deccan poets
of omitting
than other Prakrits the principle
single
consonants
between vowels
{vide
it is
10).
This
is
natural in a literary song-dialect, for in a song
the
melody and sentiment that matter most, the precise words or

forms of words are
less
important.
is
It is
not to be supposed
It
however that Maharastri

is
a mere invention of the poets.
based on the old spoken language of the country of the
Godaveri, and contains

arities of
many
features that survive as peculi-
modern Marathi.
S'.
its
name from Surasena

is
S'auraseni was the Prakrit of the Madhyadeâ taking the country round Mathura (' Muttra').
the ordinary prakrit of a Sanskrit drama.
It is
This
spoken
by
ladies and the Vidiishaka; in the Camphor-cluster (Karpiira-
manjarl) even by the king.

classical
This Prakrit
is
the nearest to
Sanskrit.
It
arose in the
same
on
countrj'-,
and
is
descended from the
spoken
language,
It
which
classical
Sanskrit was mainly based.
thus forms an intermediate

is,
stage between Sanskrit and Hindi (that
the Western Hindi
on which Literary Hindi has been based).
Owing however
it
to
this close kinship with the sacred tongue, Sauraseni
was overfailed
shadowed
continually influenced by
progress.
Sanskrit,
to
make much independent

Mg.
Mag-adhi is the Prakrit of the East. Its geographical centre was in the ancient Magadha not far from the land of modern Magahl, a dialect of Bihari. In the plays Magadhi is
Dialects of
spoken by low people.
Magadhi
also occur, e g.,
Dhakki
in the
Mrcchakatikam.
its
ously from the others in
This Prakrit differs conspicuphonetics, "^ is replaced by U, and
^ by ^,
The nominative singular of -a stems end in -e. "^ remains and even replaces ^, (For further particulars vide Chap. X). Where other Prakrits say haliho, Magadhi has ha&te others so rdd = so raja, Magadhi se laa.
;
Jain Prakrits.
AMg. The Magadhi, a

it
oldest
Jain Sutras were composed in
Ardha
prakrit based
on the dialect
In
its
spoken between
phonetic character
preserves
Surasena and Magadha (about Oude).

traces of the old
resembles Magadhi in some respects.
It
more
grammar than
S'auraseni,
and shows a greater
H^
independence from Sanskrit.

J.
M.
The non-canonical books
of
the SVetambaras were
written in a form of Maharastri that has been termed Jain
Maharastri.
J.
S'.
The language
of the
Digambara Canon
in
some
res-
pects resembles S'auraseni and has been termed Jain S'auraseni.
Apabhramsa
for
has been used in
India
(a)
for
anything
(6)
diverging from Sanskrit as the standard of correct speech,
spoken languages as distinct from literary "Prakrits,"

;
including non- Aryan as well as Aryan languages
(c)
a literary
Apabhramsa described in detail by the grammarians is the Ndgara Apabhramsa which appears to have belonged to Gujarat. To this is said to be related the Vrdcada Apabhramsa of Sindh. Dhakki and some other dialectic forms of the main Prakrits are sometimes styled apabhramins. If wc had records of the
of
form
any such vernacular.
The only
literary
apabhramsas spoken
in the areas
connected with each of the
main Prakrits an important
link in tiie history of the Indian
languages would be supplied.
Even
as
it is,
the tendencies of
rules
Apabhramsa
in phonetics
and grammar, as shown by the
INTRODUOTIOxV TO PRAKRIT.
and specimens given by Hemacandra, help to bridge the gap between typical Prakrit and the modern languages.
The use
Chapter
of various Prakrits in the
Drama
is
discussed in
XI on
Prakrit Literature.
Further details as to sub-
dialects, Paisaci dialects, tlie dialects used in Inscriptions,
and
their relationships, are given in

of Prakrits.
Chapter
on the classification
CHAPTER
Prakrit (including Pali) was ancient
still
III.
GENERAL CHARACTER OF PRAKRIT.

a synthetic language.
simplified.
grammar had been somewhat
of case forms
and verbal forms tends to dwindle.
The The number The Rigveda
possessed a greater variety of
forms than the later Vedas.
Panini's Sanskrit has discarded a
number
of
forms used in the
Brahmanas.
lyrics
Pali
and old Ardhamagadhi retain a good deal

Apabhraraâ
finally indicates the
that has disappeared from the Maharastri and S'auraseni of the
and plays.
approach-
ing dissolution of the last remnants of
the old etymology.
The time was approaching when a noun might have only two
or three distinct endings and the verb was reduced to little more than one tense and two participles. The ambiguity thus produced was avoided by new devices, and out of the ruins of
,
the old language grew up the analytic languages of

India.
modern
the
Though simplified, yet the remaining Prakrit grammar is of same type as Sanskrit grammar. There is a strong
to
tendency
that
reduce
all
declensions
all
to
one type, that of
a-stems, and to conjugate

of
verbs according to one scheme,
the old A. Conjugation.
The Dative
disappears.
Nominative and Accusative Plurals tend to coincide.

Imperfect,
Perfect and numerous Aorists
The
had gone by the
Tlie
time of the Middle Prakrit stage.
Dual number was

hardly
found
unnecessary.
The
Atmanepada
survived
after the
ing.
Old Prakrit stage and never in

it
its original
mean-
But
was not yet necessary to

verbs.
Tlie essentials
resort to postpositions
for
or auxihary
necessary
ordinary
to
tlie
conversation and even verse-writing remained
down
ApabhramSa
stage.
For more important work, for more exact
thinking the tendency was to resort to Sanskrit.
As
Pali,
Ardhamagadhi and the other Jain Prakrits

the
8uccessivel3' lost
advantage of being the language
of the this
day, or of the
locality,
they were unable to withstand
tendency and
were eventually replaced by Sanskrit.
Apart from
lated
this simplification the
main changes
arising in
Prakrit are phonetic.

:
Conjunct consonants are mostly assimiItalian
rakta
;
frutto)
sette).
sajpta
became raita (as Latin fructu-s became became satla (as Latin septem became
of the
Italian
:
Some
sounds of the old language disappear
.?",
ai,
%T
au,
^ ya
(except in Mg. and a
shadowy
'^
^ to
and
bridge hiatus),
U &a (except in
Mg. where "^
is
missing),
sa
Visarga; whereas the only sounds contained in Prakrit and not recorded for Sanskrit are the short
vowels e and
6.
Final
Not more than two consonants can follow a short vowel, nor more than one follow a long vowel.
consonants are avoided.
[For details see Chapters
IV
to VI.]
in the case of a particu-
The cumulative effect lar word may be such

" Vappairaa "
does
of
such changes
as to completely alter its appearance.
not
immediately'
suggest Vakpatiraja,
the other hand some
majority
" oinna "
is
not very like avatlrna.
On
words are identical with Sanskrit and the

readily suggest a Sanskrit equivalent to
colloquial
could
anyone with a living

This
is
knowledge
of the classical language.
true
not only of S'auraaeni but also of the others.
From
this
circumstance
it
may
be understood
that
the
different Prakrits were mutually intelligible
among
the edu-
cated.
speaker of Sanskrit, whose mother tongue was the

of the Prakrits,
spoken form of any one

S'auraseni
would readily underof
stand any of the literary Prakrits.
Moreover a speaker
would
easily
learn
to
recognise
many
Sanskrit
words, and even grasp the meaning of a Sanskrit sentence
without being able to speak Sanskrit.

difference
In the older stage the

further back
was
still
less
marked.
Still
we should
find only the difference
between
'
correct' and 'incorrect' pro-
nunciation, grammatical speech and ungrammatical, standard
speech and dialectical
the
differences
between the speech
of
educated and uneducated people speaking substantially the
same language. At this stage though differences existed the new speech had not attained a separate existence, it was not yet distinct enough to be recognized as a separate language capable of having a fixed grammar and a literature of its own.
Even
in the
Rigveda we
,' find " prdkritisms
'
that
is
phonetic
variations
Prakrits.
along just those lines that were followed by the
For instance Sithird = " loose
"'
instead of S'rithird
as might be expected from the root
^rath.
From
this
and
similar instances
it is
not necessary to deduce a wide difference
between the language of the hymns and contemporary speech. Rather the inclusion of such " prakritisms " in the sacred
texts indicates that the priests were not yet conscious of the
difference.^
An
interesting parallel
to
the history
of
the Indo-Aryan
languages is shown by that of the
Romance languages in Europe.

of Italy
Of several old
of the
Italic dialects,
that of the Latin tribe prevailed,
and Latin became the dominant language
and then
Roman
Empire,
Christian Church of
1
became the language of the largest the middle ages, and thence the language
It
It has to be
scious.
Men
slip into
remembered that phonetic changes are generally unconnew pronunciations without knowing that they
have done so. They will therefore retain archaic spelhngs centuries after the sounds have changed. This is very conspicvious in Tibetan and in
English.
10
of
INTRODUCTION TO I'KAKRIT.
Science
and Philosophy
their
until
the
modern languages
of
Europe asserted
in India, Latin
independent existence.
Like Sanskrit
was long the medium

of different nations.
of conversation
between
educated
men
Again, as the language of

in the
religion Latin
was always to be heard
mouths
of priests,
and common people caught stray phrases of it. The mediaeval quack or schoolmaster, however ignorant, must needs air his
Latin.'
Here again phonetic changes and the working
of ana-
logy have gradually simplified the old

sitions
grammar
until prepo-
and auxiliary verbs had to be used to avoid ambiguity.

speculation has been devoted as to the causes of such
in
Some
changes as
India
may
be styled prakritic.
Economy
of
effort, progressive
refinement especially in courts and
cities,
softening influence of a semi-tropical climate, influence of the
speech habits of non-Aryan peoples speech

in
who adopted
work both
in
the
Aryan
all
these
may have been
at
India and
Europe.
CHAPTER
IV.
PHONETICS.
Single Consonants.
1.
A. Initial.
The general
(^T,
{ 7).
rule
is
tliat a sing'le
consonant
at
thfi
s,
beginning- of a
word remains unaltered, except
n, y,
ands
^, U, W).
y
I
is
cerebralised
tA^ ^y becomes j (except in Mg.).

I
'
-n
iiv.
.iadha=?/a<Art (Mg. yadha),

(Mil. yai, yadi).
jai'
= ?/nrfi,
S'aur. also
has jadi
'\
Y
i
2.
}0î=yogi.
and
become
S (8).
The
is
initial
consonant of the second member of a compound

if
usually treated as
it
was
in
the middle of a word.

its initial letter.
A
'
verbal root however often retains
See Love's Labour Lost, Act V.
Holofornes the Schoolmaster.
putta = pM/ra, but dryaputra becomes ajjaiitta.
11
paasei
3.
= prakdsayati.
aadam
or
agadam = drjaiam.
vi
Enclities are similarly treated,

{a)pi.
Si
kim una = kim punar.

S'aur.
= ca.
te
In tdvat and
(2nd pers. pron.)
and Mg. change

tdvat.
te.
to d as in the
middle of a word,
ma dava = ma
te.
na de = na
4.
te.
piduno de = pitus
tado de = tatas
In several dialects
derivatives.
S".
bh becomes h
in the root
bhu and
its
M. ho'i^hhavati
(Saur. bhodi).
havissadi (Mg. havissadi)
= 6âms?/aii.
member
a com-
S'.
Mg. hodavva = 6/iawtovya.

at the beginning of
is
(5).
Ph
S'.
the second
of
pound
often retained as at the beginning of a word.
cittaphalaa = cj7ra23âZa)fca, bahuphala saphala.

"\
(6).
Aspiration.
kh ph
for k.
khujja = kubja.
S'.
khel=
krid.
M. panasa = pawasa "bread-fruit tree," an aspirated sibilant becomes ch. AMg. chava = M. AMg. Pali chapa = â6a or kdha "young animal."
for p.
phanasa.
cha = sa^, chattha = f7Sfâ.

(7).
Change
of
Place of Articulation.
Palatal for Dental.
Examples,
M. citthai.
S. citthadi.
Mg.
cht\\B,^\
= tist}iaii.
M. dhankha = dhvanksa
Cerebral for Dental.
"crow."
n
(8).
for n.
nuna = nunam, naana = nayana.

s, S,
The
three sibilants
S (TT
W '^)
are reduced to one, the
dental s (except in Magadhi where

,
we have the
pala-
tal i).
9. B. Medial.
Medial or intervocal
(^, T,
'^,
k,
(T,
g-,
c, j,
t,
d,
are
generally dropped.
^,
^).
M. loa = Zoâ, saala = saA;aZa, anura a =awMmg'a, juala = yugala, naara = wagram, p aiir a = pracMra, bhoana =
bhojana, rasaala = rasatoto,
hiai^Si
= hrdaya.
12
^).
Medial p, b, v, are sometimes dropped. (^, W, jM. rVLQ, = rupa, ym\\a, = vihucUw,, d\a,ha, = diva sa. Medial y is always dropped ('?).
,
vioB.
= viyoga,
'p\B,
= priya.
Note.
In place of the omitted consonant was pronounced

weakly articulated ya {laghw-prayatnatara-ya-kara).
This was weaker than the
of Sanskrit or
Magadhi, and
was not expressed
in writing, except in
MSS. written
by the Jains,
e.g., hiysby Q.
= hrdaya.
between
10
This principle of omitting single consonants
vowels was carried to great lengths in the literary form

of Maharastri used in
Lyrics.
It
naturally leads to
kavi, or kapi\
ambiguity.
string of
Kai may
represent
{
Icati,
A
the
vowels like uaa
= udaka)
The
has lost
all
character of the original word.
fact that such
changes were possible at
all
shows that the Indian
consonants were, as now, weaker in articulation than

the English consonants.
however were more
conservative.
The actual workaday dialects In ApabhramSa,

d, b,
Hemacandra
ndyakah,
tells us, k, t,
gf,
dropped, but became

a.ga,do
p between vowels were not naagu = respectively.
= dgatah,
sabhalau =saphalakani.
Some
of the literary Prakrits also
have the same change.

t,
In the older stage, as in Pah, k,

11.
p remain unchanged.
Examples.
S'aurj &,didh.i
pdritosika,
= atifhi
'ka.dhedvi
= kathayatu,
paridosia =
,
hhodi = bhavati, ksidhido = kathitah

,
Kira-
da. = Kirdta, Sinedi = dnayati ta.do = tatah, ]s.\dci = krta, Sarassadi = /Sam^ ga.da, = gata, sakkada = sams^'r/a,
vati (M. SarassaT).
Magadhi:
pii]ido^'m
= pdritosika,
ÂSkdum
= svdgatam h&ge
,
(" I ") *ahakah, a derivative of aham.
Ardha-Miigadhi and Jain Maharastri
Asogai
= Aioka,
loga
= loka agasa = dkdka.

,
Pah
loka, gacchati, rupa.
12.
13
of tlie charac-
In this treatment of medial t

teristic distinctions
we have one
tlie
between
Sauraseni and Maha:
rastri of the plays.
Compare the following
Sauraseni.
14
I
15. Sometimes instead of being dropped (9) or reduced to
h
S".
( 13)
a consonant between vowels
is
doubled.
ujju = r;M,
1.
M.'nakkha = nakha, M.
S'.
ekka = eA;a.
e.g.
:
N Note
Other consonants are similarly doubled,

te\la.
j ovvana = ?/a wuana,
= iaila, pemma, = preman.

the
Note
2.
The
e, 6.
vowel
before
"Ijr
double
consonant
is
always
vowels
short.
(
Here
68).
is
and
"^T
represent the short
Note
3.
An
aspirate
doubled by prefixing the corres:
ponding non-aspirated sound
kkh, ggh, and so on.
Some MSS.
literally
double the aspirates, writing khkh,

This
is
chch, and so on.
merely an orthographical
difference, the pronunciation

16. Cerebral
3"
was the same.
surds t th between vowels become sonant d

^).
dh
(2',
become ^,
^y
"^^
pada = 2?afa, padaa = y>afaA;a, kudila = ^M/i7a, kudumba =kuiumba, vada = vaâ, padhana = 2Ja?/ia??.a. Some dialects had the further change of d to 1. ( 22).
M. kakkola = ârA;ofa. Mg. âala = âA;a/a (Saur Mg. yulaka = ;M<aâ (S'aur *jiiclaa).
: :
saada).
(17).
if
not omitted becomes V.
{^^
becomes
^).
ruva = r?ipa, diva = d?pa (cf. Diwali), uvari = wpari, uvaarana = wpaifcarana, uvajjhaa = M;)a(i/it/a?/a (cf. Ojha), avi = api, avarat = apara (Hindi aur), tava = <a/>a.
(18).
becomes V.
(W becomes
^).
kavala = kabala, savara = Sahara.

(19).
Aspiration.
Prakrit sometimes has kh instead of Sanskrit
( 6).
This in the middle of a word
generallj'^ be-
comes
h.
M. nihasa = ?iiA;asa, M. S'. phaliha = spAafiA-a. ta through tha becomes dha. AMg. vadha = m/a, ta becomes tha, then ha. M. bharaha = 6/iam/a, vasahi = Rarer; p through ph becomes bh. A.Mg. vasati kacchabha = AroccAapa.
n,
m,
and the sibilants are
sometimes aspirated.
Aspiration
is
15
sometimes shifted.
S'
M. dihi
duhitd,
from *dithi = dhrfi.

S'.
M. dhiia
Mg. dhuda =
lost.
Mg.hahini = bhagini, M. ghettum = grahitum

Aspiration
is
through *ghrptum)
sometimes
S'.
sankala = ^rnMa/a but sankhala and sinkhala are also

/
found.
(20).
Change
of place of articulation.
Cerebral for Dental.
padi = y>raii', M. padia-
S'.
Mg.
ip?i6.id3i
prathama.
This cerebralising
is
= patita, padhama much commoner in
Ardhamagadhi AMg. osadha =aMsaiAa (M. S'. osaha). In most dialects n regularly becomes n
naana.
(21). Sibilants.
('^ for T) ntina,
The
s
three sibilants of Sanskrit are represented
by the dental
(except in Magadhi which has only the
palatals), asesa
= aêsa,
etc.
Mg. keê^n = keêsu

(22).
(S'aur. etc.
( 16)
kesesu).
55).
often becomes
1.
(^ becomes
In North India books and MSS. use
^ for ^.
S'.
M. garula
-v/
(S'.
garuda; Mg. galuda), M.
îla.
= kridd,
khel = v/
krid.
\
(23).
T and d
S'.
sometimes become
or
\,
(rf,
^ become ^ or
o5).
alasi = atosi, M.
^. Yi]i\x[\a.
bijll).
*vidyutikd " hghtning "
(whence
Hindi
M. Salavahana = Satavahana.
M.
(24).
S'.
doh'dla,
= dohada.
and pronominal compounds tumharisa,
becomes r
in adjectival
with -dri -drSa -drksa.

erisa.=idrsa
sarisa.
(25).
(S'.
also Idisa) kerisa, aiinarisa
In dialects
m sometimes became v.
S'aur.
(T becomes
^).
So
vammaha onavia = at" anato

M.
mammadha = mawma^â.
M.
(from *avanamita).
16
This change
is
more frequent
in
Apabhramâ which
at
the same time nasaUses the preceding vowel and the
semivowel, and then often omits either the semivowel
Thus Apa. kavala = âma?a, Jauna = Yamuna, na vahl = waman^j. This nasalisation also appears in M., e.g. Caunda = Saur. Camunda.
or the nasal element.
This change accounts for forma like
' '
Kanwar
'
'
from
and
Kumara, and gav (<l|cj) with tions in the modern dialects.

most Prakrits (g)gama-).
(26).
its
manj' minute variaPali
(Skt. grama-.
I,
Cf Beames,
1,
254.
In Magadhi r always become
in
other dialects the
change
is
exceptional.
(?"
become ^).
in
dalidda ^rfantZra, muhala = m?iMara. The change is more frequent in Ardlia Magadhi than
M.
S'.
M. or
(27).
S'.
Sometimes
vowels.
sibilants
become
h,
especially
after
long
M. anudiaham(Saur a nudiasara) =anMdiOTsam.
Loc
Sing: tahim
is
= tassiin
in
[tasmin).
The change
important
(28).
commoner
Apabhramâ and has an
effect
on the inflectional system.

of
Sometimes instead
inS'.
Sanskrit
we
find
ita.
an aspirate H.
aspi-
dh
etc. in Prakrit,
eg
Mg. idha M.
Here Sauraseni preserves the more

in Sanskrit often represents
rate.
original sound.
an original sonant
Cf. hanti
and aghnan, jaghana.

liiutfes
\)
29. C.
Final.
All final
are dropped
Nasals become anusvara.

sarga
is
ah becomes
o,
otherwise vi-
dropped.
Sometimes the
finals
final
vowel
is
then
nasalised.
For
treatment
of
in
compounds
see
Sandhi
(Ch. VII).
INTRODUCTION TO PRAKEIT.
17
CHAPTER
$
V.
COMPOUND CONSONANTS.
30.
At the beginning of a word only a single consonant

can remain.
Exceptiom
1.
nh,
e.g.,
nhana = 5wawa,
(a) ami,
'
2.
rah as in mhi=^
(enclitic).
mho mha-smai^
member
of
/
3.
At the beginning a compound.
of tlie second
^:il.
In the middle of a
word no group may exceed two

(or for aspirate
consonants, and these must be only

(1)
Doubled,
e.g.
kk
kkh),
e.g. lik,
(2)
(3)
^
Mute
after nasal of the same class,

(or Ih).
(
nd, or
Aspirated Nasal
' [
'^
are
either
32.
Consequently
most
compound consonants
assimilated or separated by a svarabhakti vowel.
33. Assimilation.
The
general rule
is
that between equals
the second prevails, between unequals the stronger

prevails
The consonants can be arranged

(i)
(ii)
as follows in a scale of
decreasing strength for this purpose,
Mutes.
Nasals.
1,
(The
five
vargas
less the nasals),
(iii)
s, V,
y,
r, in
order.
h stands by
34.
itself ( 52-54).
Two
mutes. According to the rule given above, k + becomes tt, g + dh becomes ddh, d + g becomes gg and
so on.
Examples, iutta,
dha,
= yukta, vappairaa = w^pa^^'mâ, dud= diigdha, chaccarana = sal + ccraîa ( 6), khagga = khadga, haAa,kka,ra. = baldtkara, uppala = *<pa/a,
18
INTRODUCTION TO I'RAKRIT.
ug'gama = udgama, sabbhava = sadbhava, sutta =

khu}}3i
35.
supta,
= kubja
(6), saddsi
= 6abda,
laiddha.
= labdha.
nasal before a mute of the same class remains, before
a mute of another class it becomes anus vara. Sankhala = ^.mHa?a, konca = A-mwwca, kantha, manthara, jambu, but dimmiihsi = dinmiik-ha, pamtipankti, vim^ha. - vindhya (44).
36.
nasal following a mute
is
assimilated
s&Vdtti
aggi = a(jrm/^ = yugma.

-s^
viggha, = vighno,
= sapatni. jugga
Exceptions,
(a) jna becomes mia. anavedi = a/zlo/jayaii. anahinna = anabhijna. j anna - yajna
1. At compound
Note
Note
the beginning nf the second jna can become jja,

liiia
member
of a
e.g.
manojj a = wffnopa.
2.
Magadhi has
according to Hemachandra
^
(c)
(4-293).
(6)
ainian in M. nearly always, in Apa. always becomes
appa
(cf.
Hindi
i\p).
The other
dialects vary
between
appa and atta. dma becomes mma,
pomma = jxidma (alsopaiima, 57).
37.
L with a mute is assimilated. vakkala = t;a/A;a?a iphB.ggunB, = phalguna, appa = a/pfl, = te^'pa. [Exception ^/jalp becomes jamp, but kappa also japp]. pavamga = pâua<7a.
,
38.
Mute and
surd.
Sibilant.
The mute
is
of course
can only be a
assimila-
When
the sibilant comes

aspirated,
first, it is
ted,
and the mute
e.g.
sta becomes tht.
When however
first
the sibilant stands at the end of the
member
(/w.9.
of
compound, the following mule need

if
not be aspirated, especially

prefix like
the
first
member
is
sca
paccha = po^caf but

carita.
becomes ccha, accharia = at<carya, niccala = m^c<7/a, duccarida =
f/?/.<-
lln
Magadhi
ica remains: niscala.]
INTRODUCTION TO PRAKRIl".
li>
Ska and skha become kkh. 8'. pokkhara = p^<5âra, sukkha = JMsAra. In this case however the aspiration
is
often omitted.
S'.
M. caiikka,
duskara,
ca,dnkka,
= catusko
ditthi
M.
etc.
S.
dukkara =
nikkam
=
for
tth.
niskram
Sta and stha become

Exception vedha
= drsH, sutthu = susthu.

vethati).
vesia (cf.
PaU
Spa and spha become pph.
puppha = 25Ms?;a, nipphala

.
= nisphala. _ ^ Sta and stha become tth. thana = s/ana,

.
a.tthi
= (isti,
h&tthi =hasla
(cf.
Panjabi hatth), &va.tth2i
kaatthaa = M?/as<Aate.
Sometimes this tth
is
= a vastha, duttara = ^ts/ara. Compound.

^/
cerebralised.
M.
S'.
aitthi
tth.
= asthi.
Saur.
The
^/sthd especially varies
between tth and
thida or ihida =^ sthtta (M. thia or thia).
M.
fe".
thana
= sthdna
Spa and y
39.
(M, also thana).
8',
thidi or i\iidi =^ sthiti (M.
thii or thii).
"ph&liha.
spha become pph. phamsa = sparer/ = sp}iatika. A. Mg. phusa'i^sprSaii.
(49).
When
a.r a,
the sibilant follows the mute they become cch,
SbCchi
= aksi,
riccha,
= matsara,
r ksa, M. va,ccha, = vatsa
= ksudkd, macch(aAso = vrksa) acchara =

chuhii
,
apsard,
juguccha -jugupsd.
8'aur.
\
40.
Ksa however more generally becomes kkh.

khattia
ksatriya,
khitta
,
ksipta,
akkhi =
sifet/o.
aksi,
nikkhividum = khina = daksina

Sometimes
M. ucchu,
the
S'.
wtX'sep^mn
(*
'
sikkhida =
dak-
Deccan
").
dialects
\kk\i\x
vary between cch and

M. kucchi,
8'.
kkh.
8'.
= iksu,
kukkhi = ^M^s^,
M. pecchai,
Sometimes
S'.
S.
pekkhadi - preksate, M. sariccha,
sarikkha = *sddrksya.
"ksdit
becomes ^jh.
paj jharavedi
= *praksardpayati
M.
8'.
jhlna = kfiva (also
khina).
20
[Note.
Pischel distinguishes
:
(a)
original
ksa (Avestan
xsa)
becomes
kkh,
(c)
(6)
ksa from Ssa (Avestan a)

S'sa
becomes ccha,
ksa from zza becomes jjha.
and
zza would seem rather difficult to pronounce.
Presum-
ably 4sa represents in origin a front palate stop plus

the corresponding fricative, and zza the sonant equivalent, while the original ksa
fricative.
is
a back palate stop plus a
Tlie
in '^
can hardly have been originally

cerebral
identical
'
with
the
Indian
history of the different pronunciations of
the
relation
in
Iranian languages of
The and ^, and x ^^'^ ^> need

sibilant.
further investigation].
41. In compounds
t + 6
VLsa.vai
or
t + s-
become
s
with lengthening of previous vowel simply
ss or pajjussua
M. usasa =
= paryutsuka,
ucchvasa.
j
= utsava,
S'.
ussasa.
42.
with a mute
S.
is
assimilated.
S'.
M. kadliia
kadhida = A;ua/7M7a,
pakka /x?A-t;a,
ujjala
- ujjvala, satta = sattva, dia = dvija, uvvigga = udvigmi.

^43,
Y with
a mute is assimilated. Canakka = CaaA;?/a, sokkha. = saukhya, jogga. = yogya, nattaa = ndiyaka, abbhantara = abhyantara.
denial
is first
44.
palatalised.
S&cca,
%
N
45.
= satya, nevaccha = nepathya, accanta = at.yanto, raccha = â<%, ajja = a%a, uvajjhaa = Mparf^yaya, samjha = saw(Z//!/a, majj ha = mad//a.
'
<
with a mute
is
assimilated.
takkemi = torâyam?, cakka = caA;ra, magga= //wrr/a, gama = grama, samucchida = samucchriia, uibbandha
nirbandhxi, citta = Ci7;r/, patta = pa//ra, attha = ar//irt bhadda = 6/iac?rrt, samudda = i<tawmrZw, addha orrf/Mi.
/
Exception
atra
becomes attha,
it
tatra
becomes tattha.
it
[When
6r8t.
precedes a dental
sometimes cerebralises
vattadi = vartate].
46.
21
:
Two
Tm
Nasals,
is
"^'u
and
^n
before
assimilated to following
"^ n).
^m become anusvara "Rm and ^m to following
Tm
(i.e.,
dimmuha. = dinmukha. M. chammuha = sa/mwMa. ummuha. = unmukha, niiina = wmna, Pajjuima = Pradyumna.
Nasal with sibilant.
anusvara.
If
47.
the nasal precedes

it
it
becomes
When
is
the sibilant precedes
becomes h
panha = /jra^wa. Kamhira = Kasmira. 8na becomes nha. VLuhB, = tisria Kanha = Kr8nci. Sma becomes mha. gimha = g'mma. Sna becomes nha. nhana = 5nawa.
f^ma becomes mha.
,
and the order Ska becomes nha.
reversed.
Sma
becomes mha.
amhe = asme.
vimhB,B>
= vismaya.
Exceptions
(1)
ra^mi always becomes rassi.
(2)
(3)
InitiaHma becomes m. masana = ^ma^wa.

Sneha, snigdha, either neha niddha or sineha,
siniddha
(4)
Loc. Singular Pronominal ending
S".
mmi; smin becomes either edassim= efasmm M. eassim or eammi.

msi
lo(i;amsi
smin becomes ssim or mmi.

(AMg.
= loke).
The semivowel
mleccha,
,
48.
Nasal with semivowel.
is
assimilated.
annesana = awvesana punna = puny a anna = a nya somma - saumya
gumma = gulma, meccha =

,
,
dhamma = f//iarma, kanna = ârna.

Note,
49.
my
after a long vowel
become m. kamae - kamyayd.

is
Sibilant
and semivowel.
3i.Ya,sS3im
The semivowel
M. misa
assimilated.
S'.
sahania = ^^%Aam?/a, pasa = par^va, M. asa

.-^^
a33a
a^va,
= avasyam,
,
S'.
missa = wtâ,
,
'
^^
manussa = 7nanusya S'. parissaadi = parisvajate rahassa rahasya, vaassa = ;ayas?/a, ta,ssab = tasya, sahassa =
22
sa/iasra,
sahattha =
s?/"a//a5to,
8'.
Sarassadi :=Sarasvati.
saadani
= svdyalam.
this ss
is
Note
1.
Sometimes
reduced to
with
(a)
lengoi
thening of the previous vowel (M.

(6)
niisa,
dsa above)
is
nasalisation of the previous vowel, which
more
frequent from Ara and general with ria.

-phamsB.
Anisu = a^M,
h.
spansa damsana = rfar.a?ia

,
(64).
s
Note
2.
furtlier dialectic
change
is
becomes
So
Magadhi
this
kamaha,
Apabhrainâ
effect
kamaho.
Later on
had an important
semivowels.
on
inflections.
^ 50.
Two
The stronger
mvi\\3b
prevails in the order
h V, r, y. g"allakka = f/aZyarâ,
kavva =
sarva.
kavya,
muly a duWdiha ^(hirlabha, parivvajaa = parivrajaLa, savva =

,
Exception.
In ry y becomes j, hence it becomes jj, ajja =drya, kajja = âr?/o. Sometimes r becomes /, hence
11,
pallattha
= 2>a>"?/asto.
jja^
Note,
yya becomes
except in Magadhi.
p,
51. Visarga before k, kh,

6.\\\ikhQ,
ph
is
treated like a sibilant,

;
= duhkha, antakkarana = an<aMam//a

a
sibilant.
S'.
so
is
visarga before
cadussamudda-cafwAM.
the
8'.
sunivdra, du8saha
= rfwAsaAa
or
(also
dusaha).
is
52.
When h
precedes a nasal
1,
group
inverted.
= madhyahna, M. genhai, S'. goiihadi = grhndli, ciiiha = cihna (M. also cindha) barahana = brnhmana, palhattha = *prahlasta (from ^/hlas = /iras).
avaranha =
apardhva, majjhanha
,
53.
In hy
jj h.
the
semivowel becomes
,
and then
the
group becomes
Sajj ha = sahya anugej j ha = anugrahyd.

//.
54. IIv becomes either bbh (through vh) or

nhvala,jihai
vibbhala
rh see
= jihvd (AMg. jibbha).
(For
fir,
57.)
23
I
^
55. Cerebralisation.
Dental
groups
,
sometimes
,
become
ganthi
cerebral.
,
ma,\tia
= mrttikd
vuddhn = vrddJia
(jranthi.
56.
The same
e.g.,
principles apply to groups of three consonants,
matsya becomes macclia, arqhya aggha, astra attha,

on.
and so
5
57.
Svarabhakti.
bhakti vowel.
When one
of two consonants is
a nasal or a
semivowel, the two
may be separated by an inserted svaraThe two consonants are then treated

for
according to the rules
simple consonants.
The
vowel
times
is
generally
i,
or u with a labial, but some-
a.
S".
M. raana, Magha,
harsa,
radana, Mg. ladana -=ra/wa, M.

varisa = 'yarsa,
S'.
salaha =
amarisa = amarsa,
kilanta
harisa =
= klanta, kilinna = fcZmwa, milana =

tvara{sva),
mlana,
tuvara =
duvara
duara
dvara,
suvo = Svah,
ariha = ar/ict,
paiima = paf/ma
(Pali
pa-
duma)
S'.
sumaradi = smora/i.
f 58. // one of the consonants is y, this is then omitted.
acaria =
acarya.
(The' actual difference of pronunciation here is
slight) xQv\x\\a.
= vaidurya,
Sometimes
(M.
also
appears,
acchera
= hyas. accharia = aicar?/a accharia 07 S'. padhiadi = Pali pathiyate 76).

corisi
= caurya
S'.
h'lo
= pa thy ate.
CHAPTER
VOWELS.
VI.
59. Tlie sonants r
and
("^ and '5) counted as vowels in
Sanskrit
Grammar
disappear in Prakrit, as in Pali.
In
the old Indian language "^ was not pronounced ri (iT) It was not a consonant plus a as it is nowadays. vowel, but a " sonant " fricative used as a vowel. Its
24
pronunciation
may have
own
been similar to the sonant

e.g.
r in
some Slavonic languages,

Serbs in their
this
Srbi, the
name
of the
language.
Languages not possessing

it
sound naturally represent

or introduce a vowel
r.
either with the neutral
vowel
sound before or after the

both
before
(a)
consonant
(Sometimes
intelligible
and
after).
r ia
Hence
it
is
more
why
the guna of
ar
(not re),
[b]
Vrtrahan appears in Avestan as Ver6th(c)
raghna, rju as erezu,
Pali
(d)
has
iritvija
for
ftvij,
e
irubbeda for rgveda, and

(or a sign for
Still
it)
Prakrits not possessing

a,
i,
replace
by
or
u as well as by
('sonant'
is
ri.
less
does
Iri
express the old pronunciation of

like
^.
or
This was
syllabic
I)
more
the
final
sound
in English " battle " where there

t
no vowel
between the
and the
I.
Its
li,
guna
is al.
It is repre-
sented in Prakrits by Hi,
or a.
Kilitta = ArZpto.
i 60.
^
Substitutes for
ri. (for initial r)
r.
[Magadhi
li.]
riddhi
a^.
= rddhi,
S.
riccha
= rksa,
-
ri<i
rsi.
M. kaa
kada = A:r/a, vasaha = vrsa6Aa.

krpana, gxddha,
^^^.
(commonest) kiwina.
drsti,
siaila. = srgdh
,
= grdhra
ditthi
hia.a,
= hrdaya.
u follows).
U. (after labials or
when another
M. nihua
!S'.
nihuda,
= nibhrta, M.
pucchai
S'.
pucchadi
prcchati, raunala = mra/a,
vuttanta= vrttanta.
Note
S'.
The vowel often varies even in the same dialect. 1. dadha or didh a. = drdha. M. iiiatta or nivutta=:7?/-
vrtta.
Note
suffix -ka,
generally have u for r before the Nouns in and when they begin compounds, b" jfimfidua = ;ama/;râ, bhadusaa = 6/<r(7//-va/rt. But i also oc2.
/
curs:
S'.
bhattidaraa
i,
= bliartrdaraka.
word.
S'.
Note
3.
a,
u, also occur at the beginninsr of a

rccliaii,
r
isi
M. acchaT=
Note
4.
= r5j",
ujju=;/w.
Lona
becomes
or u.
61. The Diphthongs
ai,
25
Before double
au
are replaced by
e, o.
consonants
S'.
and
u are short ( 15, 68).
edihasia, =aitihasika,
taila, \e]}a,
Eravana = Airavana,
tella
= vaidya.
8'.
M.
komui,
komxxdl
= kaumudl
jovvana = /a%mwa,
somma = saumya.
/ôte.
^
i,
Sometimes in M.'and other dialects ai become and au becomes ail, eg. ya,'ira. = vairin, mauU =
This
is
7nauli.
not correct for S'auraseni or

.4
MagadhL
by
62.
Change
of Quantity.
long vowel can he followed
only one consonant, and therefore every vowel before a double consonant is short This law obviously covers
many
cases where a long vowel in Sanskrit appears as
a short vowel in Prakrit.

to shorten the consonant
There was also a tendency and lengthen the vowel in

in
such
cases.
This
is
commoner
or
Maharastri (and
especially in
it
Ardha Magadhi and
Jain- Maharastri) than
is
in
S'auraseni
Magadhi.
This principle has

(cf
played a great part in the modern Indian languages

Pr, aggi Panjabi agg, but Hindi ag).
63.
Lengthening of short vowel. This occurs most frequently before

cially a sibilant),
r +
consonant (espe;ya,
and before sibilant +

a.
m,
va, or
sibilant. S'.kadm]^ = kartum,kMsi.vv = kartavya. AMg. (S'auraseni phasa, = spar ia, AMg, ma.nu8a. = 7nanusya manussa} M. asa = a^ya (S'. assa). M. S'. iisava = Mfsam, diisaha = duhsaha.
64. Instead of being lengthened in such cases the vowel is often
nasalised.
dB.msai.na. -^darsana,
(S'.
p hams a = sparâ
(S'.
(49)
M. a,msa = a^ru
65.
assu),
AMg. amsi -asmi
mhi).
of being
Vice versa a vowel

nasalised before
is
sometimes lengthened instead

or h.
pisai
S'.
r, s,
dadha = c?am.sfra, M.
M.
3iha.
pisedi
S'.
= *pinisaii-pinasti,
= simha
(also
simgha
siinha).
26
66. There are a
number
:
of other cases in the
where the vowel
is
lengthened
sometimes
middle of a compound,
before certain inflections, or
by analogy with other

analogy with
taric-
words, e
g.
M.
Ahriccha,
= sadrksa by
cha, jariccha.
67.
Shortening" of vowels.
As stated above every vowel
followed by a double consonant must be short, so must
every vowel with anusvara and a consonant.
A vowel
is
is
sometimes shortened when the previous vowel

:
accented
alia
= aZâ
or
when the
following vowel
is
accented: M. mamjara =war;ara, but also mamjara
(S'majjiira).
Note.
Maharastrl follows rather the Vedic, and S'aura-
seni the classical Sanskrit accent.
The
difference often
accounts for divergences between Marathi and Hindi.

68.
long vowel before a single consonant

the consonant being doubled,
if
is
often shortened,
the word
was
originally
accented on the la>t syllable.
evvam = emw, j6vvana = ?/aMuawd,
tella
= /ai7, pemma
= premdn.
Note
I.
Final vowels are shortened before enclitics with

e.g.
double consonants,
Note
2.
8'aurasenl jeva
M. thia mhi = sthitds)iii jewa = eva becomes jjeva jjewa

iiewa, = dryasyaiva
:
after a short
vowel
e
e.g. ajjassa
or
after a shortened
6: bhuniie
jjevva = 6//m//amet'fl,
ido
jevva
Sri
= ita
eva.
Siri.
Note
Note
3.
4.
:
becomes
In M. the
final
a of adverbs
is
very often short-
ened
69.
iixhd = yatJia.
Vowel
for vowel.
i
Examples.
(Coaimonei
also pakka).
a hecoiiicK
in syllables preceding tlie accent.

S'.
in M. than
or Mg.)
S'.
pikka = /)aA-ua
(S'.
M. niajjhinia but
M. kuTma but
S'.
majjhania ^madhyama,
kii(.\iima,
= katania.
INTRODUCTION 10 I'RAKKIT,
[Note.
27
Hindi has pakka, Marathi pika.]

(i)
a becomes u
with labials: pnloedi

S'.).
= pralokayati
(com-
moner
(ii)
in
M. AMg. than in
stems in a especially -jua

i
S'd.VY annm
= sarvapia.
a becomes
(sometimes) after the accent; M. jampimo =

:
jdlpamaJi
before
.
the
accent:
i
AMg.
vihatthimitta =
e.
vitastimatra
In this case
generally becomes
metta-
= midtra-.
70.
becomes u
if
an u follows: M. ucc\\xi= iksu, AMg. usu
=
i
isu.
c
becomes
g"ejjha
before
double
consonant: etthsi
= ittha
= grr%a
e
(from* gijjha, from* grhya for

it
graliya).
becomes
in idr&a etc., or
remains
S'.
erisa, generally
idisa, so kerisa, kidisa.
{Note,
71.
erisa is really
first
from Vedic aya +

syllable
dr&,'\
u becomes a in the
n.
when the second contains
ga,r\i^
i.
u becomes
= guruka, mSiVila, = mukula. purisa = pitrMsa (Mg. puliâ).

S'.
u becomes 6 before a double consonant.

puskara, p6ttliaa = ^MSâA;a
(cf.
pokkara =
Hindi pothi), moggara
= mudgara, M. gdccha = gMCcAa. u becomes 6 or o before double consonant, or where a compound consonant has been simplified. M. m6lla = raulya, thora from *thorra = 5f^Mra, so tambola = fam-
u
72.
e
bula [tambula
*tambulla *tambolla tambola].

in
,
becomes
(i)
unaccented syllables: 'M.'xnk
end,
viana = vedana diara = devard.

(ii)
before double consonants

(dialect) after a long (also edena).
S'.
Mittea = Maitreya.
S'.
(iii)
vowel
Mg. edina = eêna
/3.
o becomes u
for
(i)
before
(
double consonants
M. annunna
annonna
Q\)anyonya.
nouns
in
(ii)
In Apabhraiiisa where o comes from ah, as in the
Nom.
Sing, of
e.g. \ou
= lokah,
siliu
28
= simhah.
[This survives in Siudhi, v.g. candu
/
V
74.
or
candru = " moon."]
Omission of Vowels. Examples. AMg posaha = upavasathd, S'. vatthida =

v&nna.
ava<ithita,
= aranya{" Rann "

becomes
its
of
Kach).
vowels
vi.
api after anusvara becomes
pi, after
\y
itiîter anusvara
S'.
ti,
after vowels tti.
Mg. idanim danim.

-piusaia,
S'.
in
weaker sense "then"
becomes
M.
M.
= pitrsvasrkd from *piusasia. ip6ppha]i = pugaphali k.h\x=^khalu.

8'.
majjhanna = madhydmdina,
hltd)
Mg. dhida = duhiid {*dv-
Note.
Only unaccented vowels are omitted.
Such omis-
sion therefore sometimes throws light on the accentua-
ttion of a word.
.
Samprasarana. The reduction of ya to i and of va to n is more frequent than in Sanskrit. Aya and ava become e and o. S'. tiriccha. = *tiryaksa from tiryak, tuTida. = tvariia, "k&dhedn = kathayatu odSiTa. = avatdra
,
nomai,\iai.
= navamdlikd
from
M.
lona
= /at;a7/a
S'.
bhodi
bhavati.
76. Epenthesis.
pera,i\ta,
-aria
-(trya
sometimes becomes
(but
-erOf
^paryanta,
in
S'.),
M.
M.
acchera = aicarr/a
kera. = kdrya.
S'.
also
accharia as
tumhakera,
amhakera.
[Nole.
From
a derivative keraka was derived the Old
Hindi and Old Gujarati kero keri used to form a genitive.
Beames disputed the derivation

ii.
of
keraka from
RSjas-
kdrya, vide B.
286.
Generally H. ka,
ki, etc.,
thani -ro
keraka.]
-ri,
etc.,
and
Bengali -er are derived from
INTRODUCTION TO PRAKRfT.
29
CHAPTER
SANDHI.
A.
VII.
Consonants.
final
77,
As Prakrit does not allow

appear.
consonants
29)
most
of the complications of Sanskrit external
sandhi dis-
Sometimes however the

is
final
consonant, usuall}' dropped,
as
it
were revived before a vowel

Sitthi
AMg
pi
S'.
jad
= yad
asti.
:
Mg. yad
\^c3i,ê
= yad
icchase,
or before
an
enclitic
AMg. chacceva = sad eva chap

remains.
R in dur and nir regularly = (^Mmgra/a, nirantara. duragada

api.
= sad
m sometimes survives
i}
as in M. ekkam-ekkani
e.g.
= ekaikamfi.
Thus
78.
This form
is
then declined,
ekkam-ekke.
e.g.
comes to be used as a sandhi consonant,
aiiga-mesa-
angammi = a%e'nê,
m-aggI = eso'g'm^.
AMg. gona-m-ai = gravac?a?/o,
More
rarely y
d\\\-x
and
are used as sandhi consonants.

astu.
first
\ V
'
AM.g.
%
Skt\:\\\i = dhig
79.
In compounds the
final
consonant of the
to
member
is
usually assimilated
the
initial
consonant of the
second
member
but sometimes the two are treated as
separate words.
M. sarisamkula = sanVsamA;M?a, duIaha = c?MrZa6â (usually

dullaha), dnsaho.
= duhsaha
B.
(usually
duasahaor
diisaha).
/
is
Vowels.
:
80. Prakrit
tolerant of hiatus
but in compounds the
final
vowel
initial
S'.
of the first
member
is
usually combined with the
vowel of the second, as in Sanskrit.
kilesanala
= ^/eâ/ia?a,
jammantare = /anmaritore
isi
(a
before two consonants) raesi = raa +
= rdjarsi.
30
Sometimes however they are not combined. S". puaariha = pujdrha, vasantussava-uvaana = vasantotsavopayana.
81.
If
the second
member
of a
compound begins with

i,
or u
before a double consonant, or with

of the first
u the
final a or
M.
member is dropped. = gajendraS'. n^trinda. = nare)iclra manda-marud'u vvellida = manda-marutodvellita, mah'usava = wahofsagsbinda.
vasantusava. Sometimes when the second member begins Exception.

va,
with long
u followed by a single consonant, the so regularly S', mantharoru combined with a prefix 8'. pekkhadi, M. pecchai, Mg. pcskadi = Hiatus between ! or u and a dissimilar vowel preksate.
t,
vowels
are
remains
82.
Hiatus caused by dropping iniervocal consonants renmins.

Exceptions,
(i)
Similar vowels are sometimes contracted
paikka for
(ii)
îxii\kka,
= paddlika
t, i
'
foot-soldier.'
a,
d followed by
or u, u, thera for thaira
sthavira.
M.
pomma
8'.
paiima = parfma, mora. = mayiira
(also
maiira), M. moha,
(iii)
= may uk ha
M.
(also
mauha).
In compounds.
a,ndhATisi,
= andJMkdrita. D
cammaraa = carma&araA"a. AMg. lohara = /o/mkdra. denla = devakula, Mg. ]au]ix = rdjaknla.
83.
Between loords in a sentence hiatus remains.

Exceptions,
initial
S'.
(i)
Na
('*not")
is
often
combined
witli
an
vowel,
natthi
= ndsti, naham = wa
-i-
+ aham
nadidnr a = 7idtidura, ncccha,di = na

In 8aur. Mg. nu + etad
Initial
icchafi.
(ii)
make one word nedam.

sometimes dropped,
ac?
(iii)
a after
e,
is
in
Sanskrit.
31
CHAPTER
84.
VII r.
DECLENSION.
Prakrit declensions differ from those of Sanskrit mainly
through
(a)
the working of the phonetic rules given
above and some others affecting particular inflections, (6) the simplification effected hy transferring words
from one declension to another,
or
is
i.v.
by analogy.
There
are a few cases where tlie Prakrits preserve old endings
methods not found in Sanskrit. There is little that new. On the whole Prakrit Grammar represents the
ratlier tlian
gradual wearing away of the old system

the building up of a
85.
new
one.
The Dual has been

merged
M.)
lost.
The Dative
is
almost entirely
in the Genitive
(Dat. sing of a-stems occurs in

:
tal declension,
The general phonetic rules rule out the consoDanthough some traces of it remain.
of
The great majority

1.
nouns are declined as

a.
i
Masculine or Neuter stems in Masculine or Neuter stems in
2.
or u.
3.
Feminine stems \na,
i.l,
u,u.
86.
Declension of
Masc
putta = pM^m
stems. Normal. " son "
32
Plural
:
INTRODUCTION TO PEAK KIT.
Nom.
Ace.
Instr.
putta
putte
putta putta or putte

.
puttphim
puttanain
"j
puttehi(m)
(various)
Abl.
(puttehim-to)
',
Gen.
Loc.
Note,
(i)
jputtana(in)
puttesu(m).
9,mg.
puttesu(ni)
abl.
puttado puttao,
= *j)utratas.
is
Before
this ablatival
ending
-ias
a short vowel
it
lengthened,
though when used adverbially

vowel,
(ii)
can keep the short
e.g. Sioaa,doa(jraiah, \di,mnia,do=^janmatah.
putte ace. plur. by analogy with pronouns tumhe,
ime, etc.
(iii)
puttehim
instr. plur.
= *pMf7'e6î^
(as in the
Kgveda)
(29).
(iv)
abl. plur. is rarely
found except in AMg.

tas.
The form
quoted = Instr. plur. +

(v) ^\xt\.Sbmm\
*'putrasmin.
pronora. declension.
87. Neut: phala, "fruit."
This
is
declined like putta except
Nom.
88.
Ace. Sing, phalain

I
N. Ace. Plural phalaim.
Declension of
Masc.
stems, Normal.
di.ggi=agni, "fire."
:
Singular
Nom.
Ace.
Instr
aggi.
aggii]^-
aggina.
Abl.
Not common. Various forms. aggino or

in
Gen.
Loe.
Plural
:
M. aggissa.
aggimmi.
aggio or aggino (M. aggino or aggi).
aggino.
Nom.
Aec.
Instr.
aggihim (M.
agglsu(m).
agglhi).
Gen.
Loc.
agglnani (M. or aggina).
Note,
is
(i)
33
Gen. Sing, aggino like the Neuter in Sanskrit

;
borrowed from the declension of tw-stems

Loc. Sing, aggimmi compare puttammi.
aggissa
by
analogy with puttassa.

(ii)
(iii)
Nom.
Ace. Plural aggino from m-stems aggio comI
pare the Feminines in

(iv)
plural -io
=i
is
as.
M. aggi by analogy with putta from putta.

aggihim Instr. Plur.
(v)
The vowel
cf.
always lengthened
before the endings -hi him,
puttehim.
all
The
final
anusvara
is
optionally omitted in
otlier dialects.
these forms by
M. and some
{89.
Neut. dahi
This
is
= c?arf;ii, "curd."
dahim
or dahi.
stems.
declined like aggi except

Plur.
Nom.
90.
Ace. Sing,
dahiim.
Closely parallel are the
Thus
Plur.
Ya,\i
Instr.
Nom. vaii, Ace. vaum, vauna,Gen. vauno (orinM. vaussa),IiOC. vaummi.

(wind) has Sing.
(or in
= vdyu
Nom. vauno
msihvL
M. vau), Ace. vauno, Instr.
vaiihi(m), Gen. vauna(m), Loc. vaiisu(m).
Neuter.
= madhu,
'honey,' has
Nom.
Ace. Sing.
mahu(ip).
91.
Plur.
mahuim.
Feminine Declension.
locative smgular have
i,
ii
The instrumental,
fallen
genitive and
together.
Nouns
in a,
are exactly parallel.
Singular:
Ace.
Abl.
Nom. mala malam

malado
(M. malao)
devi
devini
vahil, 'bride.'
vahum.
vahiido.
(M. vahiio).
devido
(M. devio)
I.
G. Loc.
malae
male
malahi(m)
devie
devi
vahue.
vahu.
Voc.
Plural:
Nom.
Ace.
maiao mala devio

de\ Ihi(m)
vahuo.
vahuhi(m).
Instr.
Abl.
(malahimto devihimto vahuhimto).
Gen.
Loc.
3
malana(m)
mala8u(in)
devrna(in)
vahiina(m).
devisu(m)
vahusu(m).
34
Note
1.
Abl. Sing,
ado-ao from the masculine declenae.
sion.
2.
Sauraseni also uses

I.
G. Loo. Sing, -ae from Skt -ayai used for Gen.

Abl. in Yajur
Veda and Brahmanas

by analogy with devio,
etc.
3.
Nom.
{10
Plural -ao
=1
*-
ah).
92. Variants in the
Normal Declensions.
stems,
(i)
Mg.
puliSe.
Nom. Sing, in Mg. and AMg. ends in e. AMg. pur'ise = purusah in Apabhrainâ
;
Nom. Ace.
(ii)
Sing, in u.
AMg. has
devattae
a Dat. Sing, in ae (from fem. decl.)
= devatvaya.
AMg. becomes
in a
dii
(iii)
Abl. Sing, -do in M.
metri causa
rannau = aranydt.
M. AMg. have also a form

va&dt, gha,vsi
from
-at:
vasa =
grhdt.
is
Common
Rarer
(iv)
in
is
M.
Abl. Sing, in hi
:
mulahi, diirahi.
-himto
hia,ahim-to = hrdaydt.
Gen. Sing. Mg. has

Caludattaha.
Ma
ox
ha.
-e
CaludattaSâ or
(v)
Loc. Sing.
together
:
In M. forms in
-ammi often stand

pradose.
is in
gaammi paose = g'aê
In AMg. the commonest form

47).
msi
= 5min
logainsi
= loke.
in -him.
Some
dialects
have Loc.
Mg. pavaha-
nahim = pravahane.
(vi)
Neut. Plur
M. dim
-ai -ai.
Forma
in
dni also
occur in AMg. and Sauraseni.

Dialectic also d (as in Veda)
S'.
midhuna, jana-
vatta = ydnapdtrdni.
jvii)
Ace
Plur.
Masc
Dialectic
d = dn M. guna
in
qunnn,
A.Mg. asa
= a^van (common
Apa-
blirainiâ.)
93.
35
and
(i)
stems.
Abl.Sing.
Examples.
M.\ia,h\ii
= udadheh,AMg.
kar-
kucchlo
mdfjneh.
(ii)
kukseh,
JM.
kammaggino =
Loc. Sing.
In AMg. the commonest form
is
in
msi: kucchimsi
a,ihi
(iii)
= A;M^saM
in
Apabhramâ
hi:
= adau.
Ay[g.Tisa,o
Nom.
Plural.
vah, (Neuter) M. acchrini
= rsayah,sa.ha,vo = sadha= a^.//i, also acchini,

= s/na^runi.
are
AMg. mamsuim-or
(iv)
ina.msn ni
Masculines in
declined like nouns in

94,
and u shorten these and i and u.
Feminine stems.
(i)
stems.
is
1.
G.L. Sing, -ae
shortened metri causa to
ai.
(ii)
form
in -aa is
forbidden by some grammarians:

in
but occurs as
(iii)
M.
]6nha,si
= jifotsnaya.
is in
Abl. Sing.
Commonest form
S'.
-a
>
S'.
Mg.
-ado.
Mg. also have
-de.
imae maa-tanhiae
= asyd
(iv)
S'.
mrgntrsnikdydh.
in
N. Ace. Plur. sometimes

puijjanta devada
a: M. reha
= reA;Mfe.
= pS;?/amana
devatdh.
95. I,
stems.
(i)
For
S'.
-le
M. often has
ta.
(ii)
d\tXhiB,
Instr.
= distyd
preserves the older form of the
(iii)
Nom.
Ace. Plur. to uo become lu uu, metri causa.
96.
Stems derived from Skt.
stems.
is
Tlie distinction
between relations and agents
maintained.
In the
Nom.
in
f)
Ace. Sing, and
Nom.
Plural Prakrit follows the
Sanskrit.
or a
Otherwise the stems become stems in u (or
now stem
is
made from
;
the Accusative: piu-,

bhatti-,
pii-,
or pia ra-
= pj7r-
bhattu
or
bhattara-
= hharir.
36
97. Agent,
bhattu = feârir Relation.
piu
= pt7f.
M.
piaram.
Singular:
Nom.
Ace.
Ins.
bliatta
S'pida, M, pia.
hhdttdram
bhattuna
pidaram,
piduna, M. piuna.
Gen.
Log.
Plural
:
bhattuno
S'.
piduno, M. piuno.
bhattdre
S'.
Nom.
Ace.
Ins.
bhattdro
pidaro,
M.
piaro.
pidaro or pidare piaro or piuno.

bhattdrehim
bhattarana(iii)
piuhini.
Gen.
Loc.
Note.
1.
piunam.
piiisu(m).
bhattaresu
6/iar/r
=" lord "
beeomes
an
i-stem.,
Nom.
bhatta.
2.
Ace. bliatta ram.
Inst, bhattina.
mdtr Nom.
Ace.
Inst.
M. maa.
S*.
Mg. mada.
S'.
M. maaram.
madarani.
maae.
S'.
madae.
Can be declined as maa mai
mau or maara
to
98.
AN stems.
ting
(
These are mostly reduced
A stems by
omit-
N = middling
base before pada endings and in
compounds), or a new
base.
stem
is
formed from the strong
So
pemma = preman Nom.

G.
;
Ace.
pemmam
I.
pemmena;
Plur.
pemmassa; i/)c. pemme (M pemmammi); Nom. Aec. p6mmaini Gen. pemmanani.
Muddha
or
or
muddhaiienam
relic of
muddhano = mUrrf/m. (the Nom.

;
AAIg. Instr.
Sinsr. in
muddhena
often the
is
only
sion
the old declension).

is
The
old -an declen-
however
partially preserved, especially in the
common words
90.
rajan and atman.
Declension of raa
Singular:
Nom.
Ace.
Ins.
= ra;an. raa = raya. raanam = rdjdnam. ranna = m/na (36)

Svarabhakti vowel
or
i).
raina
(with
Gen.
Log.
ra n no
37
= rdjnah
or raino.
rae).
(raimmi raammi
T&sim
Voc.
Plural:
= rdjan.
= m/anai^.
(as
if
Nom.
(Ace), raa no
Ins.
raihim
raina).
from an I stem; from
Gen.
Note.
rainam.
In Compounds rda does not always follow the

declension.
S'.
msiha,Ta.o
= mahdrdjak
]ua,VRO
= yuva-
rdjah, Va,ccha,va,o= Vatsara j ah,
but AMg. devaraya =
devardjah.
S'.
maharaam
(Ace.),
maharaena
(Ins.),
maharaassa (Gen.),
but AMg. devaranna, devaranno.

100.
Atman becomes M. Nom. appa Ace. appanam

Ins.
atta- or appaS'.
( 366).
Mg.
atta.
attanaam = * afmawaâm
appana
attano (Mg. attanaaiâ).
in
Gen.
appano
or attano
AMg.
also declines
Nom. appo
the
declension.
New A
stems are also formed; appano, attano, and in

attana-, appana-.
Compounds
101.
-IN
stems.
These partly retain the Sanskrit method, and

I
partly
become
stems.
As the
stems in Prakrit
have borrowed from the -IN declension the difference

is
apparent only in a few forms.

Sing.
]idX\,\n.
S'.
Nom.
= hasti,
but Ace. hatthim = fea5^mam

in -inam).
(occasionally
has. Ace.
-issa,
Jain Prakrits
it
is
often
-ino.
have Gen. in
otherwise
regularly
102,
-AT
stems.
Stems
in -at, -mat, -vat
form ^-sterns anta,
manta, vanta.
38
Examples.
S'.
karento = A;urt7an,puloanto = pralokayan,

mahantassa = wiaâfa^, gacchante-
karentena-A;wr?'a<a,
him = gacchadbhih.
103, Exceptions.
clension,
Ardha-Ma'jjadhi often
e.g.
retains
the old de-
mahao = mahatah. bhavat and bhagavat. Nom. bhavam bhaavam Ace. bhavantam bhaavantani Ins. M. bhavaa. S' bhavada M. bhaavaa. S'. bhaavada Gen. ,, bhavao. S'. bhavado S'. bhaavado. ,, bhaavao.
knvvAvn = lcurvan,
in
Other dialects do so
104.
Stems in
-S.
Nouns
S.
in -as -is -us
form stems
in -a
-i
-u.
Examples.
sa joi
Pururavassa, dlha.um = dirghai/usam, AMg.
= sajyotisam.
There are some traces
of the old declension.
Exceptions.
S'.
Pururava (Nom), Pururavasam

(Loc
)
(Ace), Puriiravasi
in
Old Instrumentals are

t&vsiaa,
common
teyasa,
AMg. JM.
cak-
manasa, sahasa,
khnsa, = caksusd.
105.
= tapasd,
= tejasd,
Other exceptions or irregular forms consisting generally

of the old
forms subjected to phonetic changes, occur
sporadically, and cannot be reduced to rules.

106.
Pronouns.
pronouns
great variety of forms
is
found for the
of the first
and second persons.
The following
table gives only the
commonest
Plural
:
39
Noni.
40
S
'Srd
108.
Person,
sa-
111. Pronominal adjectives are similarly declined.
41
Examples-
S'.
a,ima,3sim
= anyasmin
kadarassira
= toa-
rasmin, avarassirn
= aparasmtw,
savvanani
anne = ant/an.
sdm.
S'.
parassim = para5mm, AMg. savvesim = sarve-
112. Declension of Numerals.

1.
ekka (AMg. ega) follows the pronominal declenLog. Sing. S'. ekkassim Mg. ekkasîm sion.
2.
M. ekkammi AMg. egaipsi or egammi. Plur. ekke AMg. ege. do = dvau) duve (from dve Neut. Dual.) also Neuter (by analogy with tinni = ^nwt)) donni
{
dunni.
der.
S'.
All are used without reference to gen-
donni kumarIo =
(Zi'e
kumaryau.
Ins.
dohi(m), Gen. donha(m), Loc. dosu.

3.
tinni
= <nt, AMg.
ta,o
= trayah
(used without dis-
tinction of genders).
Ins. tihim,
Gen. tinh(am)-
Loc. tisu.
4.
cattari
is
the
commonest form.
caiiro
Ins.
Cattaro from the
Nom. Masc. and
from the Ace. occur and

caiihi(m), Gen.
are used for either case.
caunha(tp), Loc. caiisu.

5. 6.
panca I. pancahi(m), G. pancanha(m), L. paficasu. cha I. chahirn, G. chanha(m), L. chasu, and so on up to 18.
19 to 58 are neuters in -am or feminines in -a in the
Nom
e.g.
other cases mostly like feminine singular,
20
Nom:
irn
visain
visa Ace.
visam I.G.L.
visae
(also Nora, visai
and vTsaim).
i.
59-99 are neuters in

100.
S'.
or feminines in
sada M. saa and 1000, sahassa are neuters and

declined according to the
declension.
42
CHAPTER
IX.
CONJUGATION.
113. The Prakrit Verb has undergone greater changes than
The general phonetic laws have naturally disintegrated the consonantal conjugation, and by forthe Noun.
bidding
final
consonants have tended to
make
the old
forms ambiguous.
There has been the same tendency,

all
as in the case of declension, to reduce
verba to one
type.
This process had not gone so far in the old
Prakrits such as Pali, whereas by the Late Prakrit or
with
Apabhramâ period only one conjugation remained, a dwindling number of "irregularities," i.e.
isolated survivals of tlie older system.
Moreover fewer forms were used.

disappears: the
The Dual Number Attnanepada Voice has almost gone; apart from some scattered remnants all the wealth of
Perfects, Imperfects and Aorists has been lost, and
the past tense
is
expressed by a participle with, or
without, an auxiliary verb.

there remain only:
Thus
of tlie old
system
Present Indicative,
Imperative,
Parti-
Optative,
acid
Future: Active
and Passive:
of
ciples, Infinitive
and Gerund.
In place of the old
Ten classes
Verbs only two are
normal
(i)
and the Passive,

derived from
including
the A-class including the great majority of verbs
(ii)
the E-class (with

all
axja)
Causatives, most Denominatives and some
simple verbs.
The
inflections of the
two
classes are the same.
114. Present Indicative.
{Normal Conjugation)
A -Class.
Singular:
1.
p\icchB.Wi\
= pfcchaini
M. pucchai
2.
3.
pucchasi S'. pucchadi
Plural:
1.
4S
2.
pucchamo M. pucchaha S'. pucchadha

pucchanti.
E-Class.
3.
M.
Singular:
1.
kadhemi
kadhesi
kahemi = kathaydmi
kahesi
2.
3.
kadhedi
kahei
Plural:
1.
2.
kadhemo
kadliedha
kahemo
kaheha
kahenti.
3.
kadhenti
Note
1.
AMg.
follows M. in pucchai, pucchaha.
Maga-
dhl has the same endings as Saur. puscadi, pu^cadha,
and
Note
of course puscadi.
2.
1.
ApabhramSa
pucchau,
2. 1.
has
travelled
much
3.
further
Sing.
Plur.
pucchasi or pucchahi,
2.
pucchai.
pucchahu,
is
pucchahu,
pucchu,
,
3.
pucchahi.
From
Plur.
this stage it
e.g.
not a long step to the modern forms,

1.
Hindi.
Sing.
t
2-3.
pucche.
pucche.
2 ,p^. Y^ <^ f
^C
115. Atmanepadam.
In SaurasenI this
is
rare, occurring occasionally in verse,

It is
and
in
in stock expressions.
M. AMg. JM.
2.
The endings
3.
are
somewhat commoner shown in Sing. 1.

:
jane,
janase,
janae
(S'.
would have janade

ma,nne = many e
iic a,ie
if
it
occurred).
Plur.
3.
janante.
Examples.
M.
S'.
jane,
M.
S'.
lahe
pec-
= labke, icche, Gha,e = preksate

116. Imperative.
M. janase, Mg.
,
= icchase M.
,
tlrae
= tiryate
(passive).
Singular
1.
(pucchamu)
puccha, kahehi, pucchasu, kahesu.
S'.
2.
3.
pucchadu
M. pucchau.
44
Plural
1.
pucchamha.
S'.
kahemha.
M. pucchaha
(
2.
pucchadba
= Indie.)
2nd
3.
pucchantu.
rule hi
is
kahentu.
in the
Note
1.
By
added to a long vowel
Sing.
AMg.
generally, M. Mg. sometimes
add
it to a-
stems lengthening the

Note
of
2.
a. AMg. gacchahi (S' gaccha) The ending -su has been explained as a survival the Skt. Atmanepada ending -sva. Pischel ( 467)
it
explained
as a product of analogy
Indie, pucchadi
pucchanti: Imperat, pucchadu, pucchantu.

pucchasi, Imperat. pucchasu.
Singular,
Indie,
..Indie,
1st
So also the
:
person
pucchami
is
Imperat.
pucchdmu.
It
is
This -dmu however
found only in grammars.
true that Sauraseni and

in -su
Magadhi often have the form
though otherwise they rarely use the AtmaneS'.
padam.
kathaya.
karesu^^wrw, anesu = a/iai/a, kadhe8U = As however Pali derives -ssu from sva, and
uses this also with

Pali
Parasmaipada stems
107), this
is
(E. Miiller,
its
Grammar,
p.
probably
its
origin,
though analogy may have aided

active voice.
adoption in the
Note
ing
3.
1st Plur.
to
Pischel
-mha = 5ma is from the Aorist accordwho compares Vedic jesma ( 470),
c.).
desma (Whitney 894

117.
Optative.
This
is
common in AMg.
(i)
JM., rarer in M. and
exceptional in the other dialects
There are two types
the usual form in

of
M, AMg.
JM. derived from the Opt. = ydm, -yah, -ydt, etc.

e.g..
the 2nd conjugation.
Singular
1.
vattejja, (vattejjami, analogy with Indie.)
2.
vattejjasi (ahi)
vattejja.
vattSjjaraa.
(''asu).
Plural
'
1.
2.
3.
vattSjjaha
vattejja
3rd Sing.
(ii)
45
the only form in Sauraseni, also found in the others
derived from
-eyam, -eh
Singular
1,
the
Opt.
of
the
1st
conjugation,
-et.
vatteam
vatte.
(vatte analogy witli 2, 3, persons).
2.
3.
vatte also used
for 3rd Plural.
Note.
janiydt
its
The short e in -ejja seems to be for ^ ( 72). So becomes AMg. janijja, janejja, but doubtless prevalence is partly due to the influence of the 1st
conjugation.
118. Future,
Singular
(-issa1.
from
-isya-)
pucchissaip, AMg. pucchisaami.
2.
pucchissasi (M. AMg. pucchihisi).
3.
pucchissadvM
pucchissamo.
pucchissai (or pucchihii).
Plural
I.
2.
3.
pucchissadha, M. pucchissaha.
pucchissanti (AMg. pucchihinti).
in ihi arose
Note.
The forms
to
from forms in hi after
diphthongs or long vowels.

contracts
The 3rd
Sing, pucchihii
pucchiln as the metre requires.
The
Plural
grammarians give
also 1st Singular in ihdmi, ihimi:

\iek.\i\\\\\'\va\
(Apabhraima has -ihimo, 2nd Plural

119. Passive.
= 'preksisye)
1st
-ihiha ihittha.
The Prakrit
-;;;
passive either
(i)
corresponds to
S'
(S'.
the Sanskrit form in -ya (y being omitted in
Mg, Mg.
to
and becoming
i^
(ii)
^^^ others), or adds the root, or more
-la-
la, others -ijja) to

(iii)
commonly
the present stem.

;
The endings are those of the (A-class) parasmaipada but M. AMg. often have atmanepada endings especially
in the Present Participle.
Examples,
mai, M.
(ii)
(i)
M.
jujjai.
S'.
iujjsidi
= yujyate.
gamiadi.
M. gam-
dijjai, S. dijjadi
-diyate.
S'.
vom. ^/(jam M. gamijjai,
(iii)
From
gacch-
S'.
gacchiadi.
46
S'auraseni.
Mdharastri.
Singular
1.
pucchiami
pucchiasi
pucchijjami,
pucchijjasi,
2.
3.
pucchiadi
pucchijjai,
and so on.
120.
and so on.
in Skt.
Causatives.
of
This
is
formed as
by the addition
root,
aya (becomes
e)
to the strong form of the

;
hase'i
hasayati.
After a Skt. inserts p
-paya be-
comes Pkt. ve.

/ ni vvavedi
= ntrmpai/a^t.
pucchavedi.
Prakrit extends this usage to
many
stem,
121.
other stems, lengthening the a of the present

e.g.
Participles.
ing
The normal forms

:
are
shown
in the follow-
scheme
Active.
Present,
pucchanto,
.
F.
pucchanta, N. pucchantani,
causal, puccha\;'ento
.etc.
-ta, -taip.
Future,
Perfect,
pucchissanto,
nil.
Middle (active meaning,

Present,
common
in
AMg.)
pucchamano -na
pucchissamano
(ni), -nani.
Future,
etc.
Passive
Present.
Future.
pucchianto, AMg. pucchijjamano. ("Gerundive") pucchidavvo - M; pucchiavS'.
vo
Past.
121.
(pucchanio).
M. pucchanijjo.
[kajjo
kdryah]
(137).
S'.
pucchido, M. pucchio
( 124-5).
S'.
Infinitive.
Sanskrit -turn becomes

is
i).
Mg. -dmn. M.
(6)
'iim.
The ending
stem (with
Examples,
added
(a) to
the root,
to the present
S'pucchidum M. pucchium.
S".
gantum,
gacchiduiii, gamiduin,
S'.
kame-
dum = krimayitum,
(For Inf. in -ttae see
dhixridum
= dhdrayitum,
S*.
kadum
and karidutn M. kiium = kartum.
136.)
122.
47
Gerund.
S'.
pucchia.
S'.
M. pucchitina.
AMg. pucchitta
,
or puc-
chiduna.
S'.
Mg. have ksidua. - krtvd
g'adua = gatva.
e.g.
has sometimes in verse the ending una-duna,

is
pekkhiiina, otherwise only -ia
correct.
Examples.
apaniya,
S'.
naia
(for
nltva.)
= *nayiya
(Mg.
but avan!a =
pekkhia,
oda,r\a,
= avatirya
odalia),
bhavia, pavisia,
In Magadhi
Examples,
tlie form in -una is the commonest. hauna, gantiana, hasiuna, kauna.

tlie
AMg.
tanara.
123.
prefers
form in
ttd
(to,
after a
:
nasal)
bhavitta, ganta, hasitta, karitta, also ttdnam
bhavit-
Irregular Verbs. The normal or regular conjugation being as given above,

there
are also
numerous
''
trregular^^ forms.
These
are of two kinds;

their formation,
(&)
(a) tliose
that agree with Sanskrit in

;
only undergoing phonetic changes

irregular
by both Sanskrit and Prakrit standards. These latter, wluch are not very numerous, may be due to analogy, or to the survival
those that
are
of
forms used
in
the ancient spoken language, but not
recognised by classical Sanskrit.
124.
large
number
of
"irregular" verbs in Prakrit

in the
tliat
differ
from the normal conjugation only

ciple
Past Partiolder
Passive.
It
was natural
forms
should be preserved in the case of this participle
Some words
like gafah, krtah
were in such constant
use, that their phonetic equivalents, e.g. gado, gao,
kido, kao, were hkely to hold their
own
against new
forms suggested by analogy such as *gacchido, karido.
Moreover
width
literal
in
many
cases this participle has acquired a
of
meaning as an adjective over and above its meaning as a participle. Words, e.g. like snig-
dha, mugdha,
Buddha
are not necessarily thought of
48
as parts of verbs, though their derivation
is clear.
The degree
to
which normal analogous forms

different dialects
pre-
vailed, or older forms survived (or
were introduced'
from Sanskrit) varies with

ent writers.
It is
and
differ-
not a matter of precise rule, nor
would an extensive list of occasional exceptions be of much value. There are however a number of forms of more frequent occurrence, with which the student
should be familiar from the outset
125.
( 125).
Past Participles Passive.
49
khimia
50
bhutta
52
126.
INTRODUfTION TO PRAKRIT.
Irregularities in Present Indicative.
Regular or Normal Indicativês are of the type pucchadi

or
kadhedi (114) and
are either
(a)
the phonetic
equivalents of Sanskrit Indicatives of the 1st Conjuga-
from roots in the 2nd Conjugation, equivawhat Sanskrit would most naturally have had, if they had been included in the 1st Conjugation. Thus we may class as regular such forms as (a) gaction, or (6)
lents of
chadi, icchadi, siiicadi, muncadi, maradi, suraaradi

^
pivadi, phusadi, kuppadi, naccadi, kadhedi, takkedi,

cintedi, (6) hanadi (y/han) sasadi {-y^vas).
Irregular
'
forms comprise
(ii)
(i)
forms not of the normal
type, e.g. thai;

e.g.
(iv)
verbs attracted into the
class,
;
karedi
(iii)
forms diverging from Skt. types in a
nasalised roots; (v) addition of

;
n original or by
analogy
(vii)
(vi)
other
survivals
of
Skt. conjugation
anomalies.
Sing, in di (S. adi) arises (a)
;
127.
(i)
Type with 3rd

tion.
by
contrac-
Apa. k\mi = kha:SL'i = khddati

in Skt.
(b)
by survival
but also vaai
of
(S.
form
2nd
Tp
class.
M.
va,i
= vnti
{S.
(c)
vaadi),M.
SidihM = pratibhdti
paclihaadi), S.
h\mdi
bhdti,
vihsidi
= vibhdti;
by analogy M.
thM = * sthdtiiov
all
tisthati (S. citthadi)
and so with
(
roots ending in a.
dhai or dhaai, gai, jhai
Epic dhydti).
Other contracted forms are S. bhodi

nayati,
(
bhavati,
nedi =
v^
da to give has demi desi dedi

is
denti.
Absol. daia.
dedi
128.
from *ddyati,
cf. S.
Fut. daissani.
(ii)
Many
verbs are attracted to the
class
(10th class
(distinguish
in Skt.).
Examples. Karedi
= Karoti)
,
from
causal
,
karedi =^*aral/a/^),
,
muncedi (causal
moavedi) hasedi, sumaredi cinedi sunedi, bhanedi

dhuvedi,
etc.
129.
(iii)
53
v/
*M
tias
ravai (1st class), ruvai (6th) and rovai

(S.
Inf. roviura.
has forms from
riid.
rodiduin).
y/ dhau.
M.
dhuvaii.
AMg.
dliovai dhovei S. dhoadi.

S.
v/
bhu has M. hoi huvai.
homi hosi bhodi.

class)
Opt.
bhaveam bhave. Infin bhavidum. ruccadi = * ntc?/afe (transferred to 4th
(also roadi
\
;
Mg. loadi) similarly laggadi, vajjadi
(^Z vraj), jujjadi
^yujyati
130.
(Epic yunjati).
(iv)
From
chid
as the root
come chindai chindadi. This is natural was nasalised in the Sanskrit Present.
Bhin-
Similarly with other roots of the 7th class.

dai, bhanjai, bhunjadi.
The
nasal in rambhai
[^
rabh)
is
also familiar in Skt.
derivatives.
(Epic rambhati).
is
muncadi (M. muiicai)
regular, but
M. has
also
muasi
= *mucasi.
131. (v)
is
preserved in cinai S. cinedi {Skt. cinoti)
kunai
\
(Vedic krnoti), sunedi (M. sunai), janaii S. janadi,
na anadi, kina>i = knndti, gen\ia,di =^grhnati, S. sakkanomi sakkunomi = âknomi, dhunai (S. dhoadi, Pali dhovati) by analogy in jinai (8. jaadi) thunai
:
{x/ stu).
132.
(vi) ^/i
"to go" has emi

si atthi,
esi edi
(M.
ei)
enti: ^ as
is
to
\^
'
be. .mhi
{Note.
Atthi the only

all
if
mha (M. mho) ttha santi. common non-enclitic form
used
with
^/ bhl.
(vii)
numbers and persons). M. bihei (S. bhaadi).

from bha-na-mi (9th
class) also bha-
bhanadi as
nedi. sunadi
= sunedi
as
if
in 9th class,
v/ svap
becomes suv,
lience suai
and (by analogy with
ruai rovai) sovai S. sovadi.

133.
Survivals of other conjugational forms.
Imperfect,
bers.
asi
= a5?<
used f or
all
persons of both num"^
5-1
Optative.
AMg. siya = sydt, kuj ja = kurydt, buya = bruydt,

465),
sakka = Vedic &akyat (Pischel

Precative M.
Aorist.
AMg.
akasi
hojja = 6/m?/a<.
AMg.
d6jja = d?/a/.
AMg.
(cf.
= aHrsl/i
or akdrsit.
Plural
-msw
akariipsu
Perfect.
the Aorist in Pali).

Plural aharnsu.
AMg. ahu- dhuJi.
134.
Irregular Futures.
Futures in -issadi
(or
M.
ihii)
are normally formed from
the Present base: pucchissain, kadhissaip, M. pucchi-
ham kaheham
118).
They
M.
are also
ne\\\\
formed from
but
S.
the root as in Sanskrit.

naissadi, S. gamis.sadi.
= nesyati,
From
^ bhu various present bases are used to

S.
S.
form the
future.
bhavissam, huvissam, Mg. huvi^âni M.

citthissadi (pres.
cit-
hokii hossam.
/
v^ Sthd M. thahii (pres. thai).

thadi).
Other forms represent the Sanskrit
sydmi
especially in
M.
AMg
so dacchani
dacchisi,3.s.dacchii 3pl.dacchinti),
= rf;'ai'si/awt, (2. s. mSccham {y/ muc)
veccharp (y/ vid), rocchani (v^ rud) voccham (^Z vac).
S.
daccham and the rest are not used in S. Mg. pekkhissam (M. pgcchissam) rodissam, vedissam. Causatives and others in E- class form Futures (a) as in Sanskrit (omitting intervocal y). S. kadhaissam moavaissasi
yati (b)
= * mocdpayisyasi
omitting aya
niattaissadi
:
= nivartayis-
M. AMg. from the e-stem vattehami
= vartoyis-
ydmi
= e. M. kahissam, S. kadhissam, M. puloissani = pro/oA;a?/a?/isyami S. takkissadi = /ar/ra?/(c)
i'syati,
su3smssa,m -û^rusayisydmi.
Mg. mali^SaSi-
mdrayisyasi.
v/ dd has S,
daissam M. dahain,
y/ kr has S.
karissam
M. also kahaiii
J?
135.
Irregular Passives.
(a)
Many
passives
that are often
called
irregular
a.s
not being formed with the commonest ending
INTRODUCTION TO PBAKRrT.
-ijjai
S'.
55
iadi, are regular equivalents of Sanskrit
passives.
(119.
(i))
e.g.
iuHsidi = yujyate, gamare:
m&l- gamy ate.

dhy becomes
bhadi
(hhuj),
[kr).
{h)
Other
examples
(&/<ai),
Khippai
(a-
{ksifi, luppai {Iwp), bhajjai
bajjhai (badh:
jjh 44), rujjhai [rudh],
arabbhai
rabh), gijjai {gd), khajjai (khad), labbhai
S. lab-
(Za6^), ehijjai {chid), bhijjai {hhid), bhujjai
muccai (mwc), vuccai
(vac), tirai {tr), kirai
Others are similarly formed from obsolete roots or

modified forms of roots,
(from *vuhh), dvihhha.i
e.g. vubbhai = M%af = duhyate,\ihhha.i = lihyate, gheppai = gr.r%ae and with wi'
;
for u
(S.
ruhhh&i = rudhrjate, TUYv a.1 = * ruvyate
(S. rodiadi),
suvvai
{dhu)
(sru)
sunladi), thuvvai {stu),
dhuvvai
{civ.
also
dhunij jai.
Similar are civvai
for ci) also cini j-
jai, S, cladi, jivvai {jiv for ji).^

(c)
adhappaiis a causative
vidhappai.
Tpsissire
âdhapyate, so also
(d)
jammai, "is born,"
is
derived from janman Pkt.

{y/ Jian)
jamma; similar is the case with hammai khammai {,' khan). Anomalous summai {sru), cimmai {\/ ci).
j\ôfg._SaurasenI and
Magadhi often prefer the form from the present base. M. labbhai, S. labbhadi, but also lambhladi M. muccai, S. muncladi; M. suvvai, S. sum;
adi, Mg. Sunladi;

S.
M. ruvvai.
kirai.
S.
S. rodiadi;
M. bhujjai,
bhunjiadi;
M.
S.
kariadi
(AMg. kajjai =
*karyate);
M.
najjai,
jdniadi;
M.
bhannai,
S.
bhaniadi
The two
Grammarians.
passives civvai jivvai are assigned to ci and ji by the They have been explained as analogous to the forma
u.
from roots in u or
CIV
Pischel held that civvai
was a regular passive from
given in the Dhatupatha

jiv
(=
'
take' or
'
cover') and jivvai probably
from
{-
'please
').
Vide Pischel, 537.
56
INTRODIUTION" TO PRAKRIT.
(Variations).
136. Infinitives.
Tlie
commonest form
i.e.
especially
in
Sauraseui
is
tliat
derived from itum (M.

sent base,
mn,
{jnd),
S.
idum) added to the pre(stha),
gacchidum, anucitthidum
genhi-
duni (grah), janidum

(ksip),
dahidum
(dah),
khividuni
haridum
{hr).
Causatives, karedum, dhilre-
duip,
ted S. ni3ktta.id\im
damaednmdansayitum, (sometimes uncontrac= nivartayitum) or by analogy with A-stems: dharidum, maridum, kadhidum.
,
Equivalents of Sanskrit forms in
-turn are also
found
in
Saur
S.
but are commoner in M.

{stha),
Ihadum
gantuni
padum
(to drink),
kadum kauin
(kr).
(gam).
M. hhottum = bhoktum,
datthuin
drastum, dclum {da), neuin {ni), pauni {pa) S. paduni
JM. pivium, souin {^rotum), jeutn {ji) (AMg. jiniuui), laddhum {labh), vodhum {vah), chettum {chid), bhetturn
{bhid),
formed are ghettuin

sottum
(
naum {jna). Similarly * ghfp-tumior grahitum) ( 19) = *sov-tum for svaptum cf. rottuni = roûw).
{muc),
{
'
mottum
v/ vac has M.
vottum
S. vattuni.
Ardha-Magadhi often uses the -tum form

that kauiii means krtvd.
as a 2:erund, so
For the
Infinitive this dialeer
prefers a form in ttae or ittae. citthittae (stha), gacchittac
(gam).
This
is
derived from a Dative Infinitive
a.*
found
in Vedic.
(cf.
137. Gerundives (Varieties),

(a)
121).
(ii)
From
-tavya, either
(i)
with the present stem, or
with the root (strong form),

(i)
pucchidavva, gacchidavva, hodavva
( 4)
or bliavijaiii-
davva, anucitthidavva, dadavva, sunidawa,
davva, genhidavva.
(ii)
sodavva M. soavva
{iru),
ghettavva, kadavva (63)
M. kaavva
{kr).
"
' '
''
'
! Al.go
'
'
M. pahium. AMg. ginhinm,
JAT. jr^nhinm, 6. gJ*nhidiim."
(6)
D,
From
-niya.
M. AMg.
-anijja, S.
Mg. -ania: karania,
damsania, (from Present stem pucchania), M. karanijja, danisanijja.

(c)
From
AMg. vojjha = vahya -ya. kajja ( 50) = karya. from Present stems: gejjha {^10) *grhya from
grhe
present stem grha (as in Vedic
and Apa
(Hemacandra)
grhanti).'
CHAPTER
The
rules
X.
CLASSIFICATION OF PRAKRITS.
and examples given in the
last sis chapters deal
mainly with
Maharastri and Saurasenl.. other languages being
mentioned incidentally.
The
principal peculiarities
of
some
of
these
may now
be
brought together.
Magadhi.
is
It
is
a matter for regret that the sources of

it
information about this language are not more abundant, as

in
some ways the most

for.
interesting of the Prakrits.
We
have here striking variations

accounted
S'.
in phonetics that are not easily
(^ for ^) is an equation that is reflected in the modern languages of the East of India, where people speak, and even write of the "Sham Ved " and " Sheeta." As
for S.
other Prakrits use only
^ s this law should cause

is
the student
no
diflBculty
bhavissadi
easily recognised as the equivalent
of S. bhavissadi, tassiin of tassim, sa of sa,
puttassa of puttassa.
and so
on.
or
(^
for T) is
more
' '
striking,
especially at the begin-
ning of a word,
1
laano =
kings."
jlia,
This is Pischel's derivation. However grahya would become *gajand association with the group gSnhadi ghSttum, etc. might account
,
for the
change of vowel a to
e.
58
puliso = S. puriso, galuda = S
garuda,
Caludatta, ovalida-
i8Al}a,
= apavaritaAarira,
I
ia,ma\e
^samare, nagalantala = nagrara7?-
tara.
This change
(
for r is
found occasionally in other Prakrits
26)
and
in Pali (taluno
= taruno)
it is
found also
in the
,
Vedic
^w<^
language, where alam y/ kr replaces aram-{krnoii)

replaces nic.
it is
and v^
There are many
instances in other languages,
and
often difficult to determine which was the original sound.
It is however remarkable to find an Aryan dialect without an R sound at all. The modern dialects of Bihar and Bengal have not replaced every r with an I. Perhaps this rule for
dramatic Magadhi
the mouths
is
a conventional exaggeration of a
marked
is
tendency of the Eastern dialects.

in
Possibly as Magadhi
it
put
of only low-class people,
represents only the
habit of a non-aryan stratum of society, which like the Chinese

coolies of to-day
may have had no
R's.
remains and replaces J (^ for^). yadha = S. jadha (1), yanadi = ?awaî. yanidavvam = S, janidawam, yanavada = ;/a7iajoa(fa.
ya,y&de
= jayate.
(jh
becomes yh.
yy.
for
Yhsitti
= jhatiti.)
Dy.
rj,
ry. all
become
So that where Sauraseni hasjj,
Magadhi has yy.
(^
^).
a,yySi = adya or arya (S. ajja), avayya = avadya, mayya = madya (dhy becomes yyh mayyhanna = majjhanna ayyuna = ar;Mna, ka,jya. = karya (kajja 50).
:
74),
duyyana = durjana.
From
these examples
it is
clear that '^ in
Magadhi represents
in
a front palate fricative different from the semivowel sound

English " yes."
The equivalent
of "^
was used
in the North-
West
to express a foreign
sound written Z
in Greek.
So on
spelt
coins of
King Azes we
find the genitive Ayasa.
Words
with the equivalent of ^, are pronounced in some dialects with a sound resembling Z, in zeal or zh in 'azure.'
in Bengali
'
'
similar sound
is
commonly given
ziie.
to
in
many
words,
e.g.
^=r^
pronounced
Ny, ny. jn. nj become nn.
50
punna = 2)Mwt/a
(S.
(S.
punna
48).
anna = an?/rt.
anna)
ksLunskka.
(S.
= kanyaka.
keeps
sc.
fij).
\3inno
= rajnah
(S.
ranno
99).
a,nnsM = anjaU
Medial cch becomes

gSLSCSi
,
("^ becomes ^.)
= gaccha isciadi = tccâft (*icchyate), uScaladi = wccâlati, puscadi = prcchati. tili^ci peskadi = M. tiricchi pecchai = îVyafe preksate.
sibilant is retained at the beginning of a group of con-
sonants.
written.
Grammarians
differ as to
which sibilant should be

give
MSS.
vsivy
too
much
to
much
help
in
the
matter.
becomes i^kh according to Hemacandra, otherwise we find ^11% i\i&ke = ûskah, Tuluka = Turu3ka. Sta sth become sta (or ^ta) 5Fg becomes =h^ or ^T2"
Ska.
^P^
susthu becomes ûstu or Sustu.
Spa, spha become spa, spha, nisphala = w?'spâ?a (M. S. nipphala, 38).
Ska, skha.
-pabskhalsidi
= praskhalati.
haste or haste
Sta. stha becom'e sta for 6ta)
= /â.stoi^
(M.S.
hattho
38) uv&stida,
= upasthita.
(or it
is
Spa. Buhaspadi = Brhaspati (or Bihaspadi).
Ksa becomes
ska.
peskadi = preksate
written Ska.
paSka = pa^sa.
jihvamullya).
Hemacandra says pahka,
i.e.
with visarga
The
it
is
real
Magadhi sound may have been neither the

These groups being
"^FT
nor
their of the Midland Sanskrit.

assimilated forms
ttk^ etc.
difficult,
not surprising to find that MSS. generally write the
.<c
As verbal forms in ccha go back to I.E. forms in -SKA the MagadhI might be regarded as more archaic than the Vedic cch (however pronounced): cf. Slavonic, but this is considered inadmissible as Magadhi
'
'
has 6c also for secondary cch as in uScaladi, ma^cali (=Fish. matsya-ViPr.
maccha),
,
cf.
Hindi machli.
etc.
On
the other
hand
if
originally correct foi
iechadi etc.
the sa jae group would be readily introduced in other cases
where âuraseni
had
cch.
60
rth
NTRODUCTION TO PRAKRIT.
(or ^t) so t\stsb
becomes
liaste
st.
= tirtha,
Iti
a.3te
= arthah.
This
may be merely
Magadhl
and
conventional analogy,'
.*.
e.g.
Sauraseni hattho:
S. attho:
Mg.
aste.
characteristic points are
Nom.
Sing, in
-e.
e liaste
grammar the two = so hattho

grammar
closely
hage =
"I"
(107).
Otherwise
the
follows Sauraseni.
Some
Dialects of
is
Magadhl appear
in the plays. in tlie Little
S'akari
spoken by the King's brother-in-law
Clay Cart.
Peculiarities.
A
is
weak y before
found
in
palatals.
Yc'isthsi^tisl/ia/
r.
da in Past Participles especially from roots in

(the
kada = ^Tâ
same feature
AMg.).
Gen. Sing, in aha as well
as a&&a Caludattaha.
Loc. Sing. ahim. pavahanahim
= praua-
hane.
Voc. Plur-aho.
{y edxc-asdh)
These
last
three points
resemble Apabhramsa.
Dhakki spoken by Mathura and

Mrcchakatika.
the two gamblers in the
form of Magadhi that approaches the Apasa
bhramsa
stage.
Has both
and
ia.
Oandali and Sabari appear to be
dialects' of
Magadhl.
Ardha Magadhi.
regarded
it
Jacobi called this Jaina Maharastri and
as an older,
more archaic Maharastri.

language
'
The Indian
all his rules
grammarians called
the
of
the old Jain Sutras
" Arsam " from

excluded
Rsi.
'
Hemacandra explains that

'
have exceptions in
'
Arsa.
Trivikrama, another grammarian

treatise,
"Arsa" from
i.e.
his
because
its
meanings
were rudha, or conventional, not etymology,
strictly in
accordance with
not based on Sanskrit.
Namisadhu commenting on Rudrata's Kavyalaiiikara (2-12), derives the word Prakrit from prakrii in the sense of natural
'
On
tho other hand
tlie
change
I.
rt
becomes
.s
is
found
ii\
Iranian.
Avestan niasyo=war<.i/aA.
^
G.I. P.
289.
MSrkandeya gives
this for
Magadhi and
is
Vracada
Apabhrara^n.
Yf\\nm:=ci mm. The prontinciation
not rloar {ride Selivtiona. ATapadhi).
INTRODUCTION TO PRAKKIT.
61
speech free from the rules of grammarians, or from prak krta,

'
created of old
'
because, says he, the Prakrit of the Arsa
Ardhamagadhl is the language of the gods. Arisasiddham devanam Addhamagahd vdnl. Obviously Namivaijane sadhu was a Jain. The Jains indeed supposed that ArdhaMagadhl, the language in which Mahavira preached, was the original language from which all others were derived.' There is some difference between the prose and verse portions Verses often have Nom. Sing, in -o instead of of the Canon.
canon,
the characteristic
-e
(like Mg.),
gerunds in tuna Turn

(
(like
M.)
while prose prefers ltd or ttdnam
122).
Other points
are.
Verse meccha, prose milakkhu.

.
Verse
is
kunai, prose kuvvai {=^* kurvati)
The verse
in the
dialect
thus
somewhat nearer to M. than the prose. Ardha Magadhi agrees with Magadhi
-e,
Nom.
Sing, in
the use of Gen, Sing, tava
past participles in da for ta after

in ka
roots in r (but not always)

this is rare in
becomes ga " Asoga" (but
Mg.)
and
in Pluti of -a in Voc. Sing,
(common
in
and sa. In general more archaic features than the dramaAMg. tic Prakrits. AMg. is assigned by the Bharatlya-natya-astra (followed by Sahityadarpana) to servants, Rajputs, and the heads of guilds. The Jain monks in the plays who might be expected to speak AMg. appear to speak ordinary Magadhi.' AMg. differs in many respects from Maharastrl.^ Phonetics. am becomes am before eva and avi = a'pi). iti become i after pluti vowel or in iti vd. prati drops i pad uppanna = prafi/M^pawwa (rare
It differs
ApabhramSa). markedly
in the retention of ra
(like Pali) retains
in other dialects).
Vide Pischel,
16.
Central Asia
Buddhist dramas found in Old Ardha Magadhi. 3 Jacobi considered the language of the Jain Canon to be an older form of Maharastri. Kalpa Sutra, S.B.E. XII. Pischel showed this view
^
One
of the dialects in the fragments of

is
classed
by Liiders
as
to be untenable.
Pr. Gr.
18.
)x
62
dentals for palatals,
teiccha
= cikitsd.
aha = yatha.
use of samdhi consonants
( 78).
Noun
dative in -ttae
( 92),
(
instrumental in sa
locative in -msi
(
104),
v.).
92
Verbs
v^khya aikkhai (Pali acikkhati) M. kuvvai (in prose, see above).

Infinitives in
akkliai,
Relics of Aorists, e.g. 3 plur. pucchirasu.

ttu -ittu
used as gerunds,
e.g.
kattu (means krtva) avahattu (means apahrtya)

sunittu, janittu.
Infinitives in -ttae -ittae
(
136).
Gerunds
in
-tta,
ttanam,
-cca,
-ccana(in),
-yana(ra).
Moreover where they agree what

rare in
is
M.
Cerebralisation
is
AMg. is often much commoner in AMg. and so

is
common
in
the change la for ra.
The vocabulary
seni.
is
also often quite distinct.
It will be obvious that
AMg.
differs still
more from Saurathe sects had
The Owing
rich
later Jain writings belong to times
when
spread more widely and
were influenced by other dialects.
possibly to the popularity of this reUgion
among
the
the
mercantile communities on the
West
coast,
non-
canonical writings of the Svetambara Jains are in a language
which
may
be regarded as a form of Maharastri, although

of the peculiarities of
-itta
it
retains a
in -ittu,
number
AMg,
is
e.g.
infinitive
gerund in
and ga
for ka.
This
the main dialect
of Jacobi's Selected Narratives in Maharastri.
t,
The language of the Digambara canon has Nom. Sing, in o Hence it has been called Jain S'auraseni. th become d, dh.
:
It has
however much that
is
foreign to Sauraseni, but found
in either M. or
AMg.
In the direction of Gujarat were
many
of
strongholds of Jainism, and here the Sauraseni type of dialect
would meet Maharastri.
That JS. preserves rather more
the peculiarities of
fact that
it is
63
AMg. than JM. does, somewhat older.
is
probably due to the
The resemblances and

tion.
differences of the i^rincipal Prakrits

classifica-
given above would not necessarily lead to a closer
We
have an Eastern Prakrit (MagadhI), a Southern

Ar-
Prakrit (Maharastri), and a Central Prakrit (âuraseni).
dhamagadhi appears to resemble the Southern more than the

Central Prakrit. Hoernle,' on the basis of a comparative study of some of the modern Indo- Aryan languages, supposed that the whole of Aryan-speaking India was at one time
divided between two languages, a " S'auraseni tongue
" and
" Mdgadhl
tongue.''''
Maharastri he regarded as an
artificial
literary language,
without any direct relation to the spoken Further study of the Prakrits and
language of Maharastram.
of the
modern
dialects has
shown that
this
view
is
untenable.
Maharastri (and Jain Maharastri) has peculiarities which can be traced in modern Marathi, aad there can be no doubt that this Prakrit was based on the language of the Marathi
country.'^
Grierson^ with more abundant material has developed the

idea of the geographical classification of the Prakrits on the
basis of a comparison with
modern
dialects.
His
classifica-
tion
is
Central Prakrit
Sauraseni.
Outer Prakrits
Intermediate
This
is is
E. Magadhi.
S.
Maharastri.
Ardha Magadhi.
a convenient classification inasmuch as Sauraseni
desa, which
the most Sanskritic, and the representative of the Madhyawas the centre of Hindu culture after the early
:
Rigvedic times
1
while literary centres at a distance from this
Grammar of the Gaudian Languages, 1880. Introd., p. xxx. See Introduction to Volume on Marathi in the Linguistic Survey of
India.
3 See Article on Prakrit in Encyclop. Britaonica, 11th edition, and chapter on Language in Imperial Gazetteer of India.
64
middle point naturally show more independence from Sanskrit.

This classification
is
indeed connected with a theory relating to

out of which classical Sans-
the immigration of the Aryan-speaking tribes into the Peninsula.
The speakers
of the dialects
krit
was created, and on which

after a previous
later
on Sauraseni was based,
are supposed to have forced their
some time
of those first-comers
into the Madhyadesa Aryan invasion. The descendants produced the " Outer Band " of languages.
way
Much may be
however
said
both for and against this particular

It
is
theory as an explanation of certain linguistic facts.

possible to accept a classification
based on such
facts,
without necessarily accepting this particular explanation.
A weak
position of
point in the classification might appear to be the
Ardha Magadhl.
If this
was centred
in
Oude, one
would expect the language
to be roughly speaking half
Magadhl
it
and
If
half S'auraseni.
Now Magadhi
as far as
we know
hardly
differs
from Sauraseni except
in striking phonetic variations.
we allowed Ardha Magadhi a Nom. Sing, in e, a certain amount of for r, and for s with perhaps some traces of the other phonetic peculiarities of Magadhi, we could invent
1
a Prakrit that would

quite different
to
fit
in with the scheme,
but
it
would be
the real Ardha Magadhi of the old Jain

lie
Canon.
Eastern Hindi does indeed

dialects of Bihar,
between Western Hindi

of the peculiarities
and the
and combines some

;
of the languages
on either side
but in the case of the Prakrit
Ardha Magadlu this does not appear to be the case. It must however be remembered that this classification deals
primarily with the spoken languages on
which the
literary
all
languages were based.

crystallised at the
The
literary
Prakrits
were not
contemporary
same time, and so do not represent strictly dialects. Ardha Magadhl is obviously more
Further tho lancuage of even the
influenced by the spreading
is
archaic than Sauraseni.

oldest Jain Sutras
of the sect
may have been
towards the West.
It
also possible
that later
literary Prakrits
were influenced by
earlier literary Prakrits.
Pali.
65
Pali originally meaning a " boundary, limit, or line"

to the
was applied
it is
Canon
of the
Hinayana Buddhists.
Thence
used of the language of that Canon, found also in some non:
canonical books
all
being preserved in what were originally
the missionary Churches of Ceylon,
Burma and Siam.

(a)
Thence
of
;
again
'
Pali
'
is
sometimes applied to
the
inscriptions
ASoka, although these comprise three or four distinct dialects

(b)
the
official
court language of Asoka's Empire, a form of
Middle Indian
Prakrit
'
wideh'
all
understood,^
the inscriptions
and
(c)
including
down
The
to the time
'monumental when
Sanskrit ousted Prakrit (or " Pali
").''^
Pali language of
the Buddhist books forming a separate academic subject, (a

classical
language appropriate to Buddhists of Burma), has not

in India,
been much studied

the study of
(a)
Nevertheless
it is
important for
(6)
the history of Indian speech, and
the Old
Prakrit inscriptions.
For the study

texts
of classical Pali
and translations are
available.''
numerous grammars, readers, Only a verj'- general des-
cription need be given here.
more of the old grammatical system than AMg. The atmanepada is commoner (The Aorist and ImAorists, especially the S-Aorists, abound.
Characteristics of Pali.
Pah
retains
perfect have fused together).
The reduplicated
karoti
Perfect
is
rare,
but occurs.
classes,
There are more survivals

.sunoti
of the old conjugational
e.g
S.
sunadi,
(Atm kubbate) =
is
S.
karedi, dadati (also deti)
S. dedi.
:
In Phonetics the striking points are
the sibilant
dental
^,
y remains, r sometimes becomes

is
I,
but not always as in

Intervocal
Mg., n
sometimes cerebralised but not always.
consonants generally remain, and surds are only exceptionally

1
See
This wide use of "Pali"

Pischel preferred
Rhys Davids, Buddhist India. is made by Dr Otto Franke,
Pali
und
Sanskrit.
"Lena"
dialect for
'monumental
Prakrit,'
and "Lat"
^
dialect for Anoka's inscriptions.
Liiders suggests that the
widely understood Lena dialect was really Old Ardha Magadhi. See Biography.
66
replaced by sonants.
pucchati, gacchati, etc.
Hence we have bhavati, or hoti, mato = mrlah, kato = kftah.

:
katheti,
In some words conjuncts like dr- br- remain.
Svarabhakti
is
common.
Arya becomes ayya

be seen that Pali
or ariya.
is
From
these examples
it will
more archaic
than the Prakrits described above.
The geographical basis of Pali has been disputed. The Buddha was supposed by tradition to have preached in Magadhi. The Scriptures were naturally supposed by Southern Buddhists to be in the language of the Buddha. Therefore As a matter of fact it is not. The Pali should be Magadhi. Nom. Sing, in -o, the presence of sa, ra, ja show this clearly. Some regard it as the language of Ujjain, whence Mahinda, the son of ASoka, took the sacred Canon to Ceylon, others as the Aryan language of the Kalinga country.' The latter seems Pali would then represent a very old form the more probable. of Eastern Maharastri in touch with Magadhi on the North. Asoka's Edicts are found in two different scripts, Kharosthi and Brahmi, and in a variety of dialects.^ These often preserve
conjuncts not found in Pali,
e.g.
pr in priya.
Such are not
to be explained as Sanskritisms but as Archaisms, survivals of
the old phonetics, especially in the North-West where such
conjuncts
still
exist.
Cf.
Sindhi tran, T.ahnda tre = 3.
Dealing with the circle of Buddhist ideas these inscriptions
have in
many
instances to be interpreted
by comparison with
the Pali scriptures.
Later Prakrit inscriptions are generally of a simpler character,

often too brief for their dialect to be classified with certainty.
Apabhramsa (see Ch. II, p. 6). To the student of philology it

'
will
be of interest to state
p. liv.
Vide Oldenborji, Vinayapitaka, Introduction,

Pischel (Gr.
but conaidered tlio " L5t. -dialect " to be on the whole one definite language, perhaps the official language more widely understood than spoken in the North-West
'^
29) tidmitted clear traces of dialects,
and South.
()7
some
tical
of the
main features of the Apabhraiiisa
stage.
Whereas
in the
Old Prakrit stage the typical phonetic and grammacharges are not carried so far as in Dramatic Prakrits,
all
so naturally in this Late Prakrit

further.
such changes are carried
At the same time being
in close
touch with spoken
dialects, the
ApabhramtSas occasionally retained very ancient features, that had survived outside the main current of lindevelopment.
guistic
Some
of the
"Outer"
dialects preserve
quite ancient features to the present day.
The following
Prakrits.
tables of typical declension
gives only forms peculiar to
and conjugation Apabhramsa, not those shared with
Declension.
Sing.
Nom.
Ins.
Ace. puttu
[Neut. phalu]
putte
Abl.
puttahe puttahu.
puttassu puttaho puttaha
putti puttahl
Gen.
Log.
Plur.
Nom.
Ins.
Ace. putta (Neut. phalal)
puttahi(m)
Abl.
puttahQ
puttaha
puttahl
it is
Gen.
Loc.
If
the oblique forms be compared

final
apparent that
it
needed only the blurring of the
vowels to reduce these to
one form for the singular and a nasalised form for the plural
(vide
is
Beames,
II,
42).
The Apabhramsa Nom.

in
Sing, in
seen
in the Sindhi forms with a very short m.'

s
In the
Genitive Sing, an
form survives
Apabhramsa.
dialects) or
This
.'?
Nom.
Sing, in o (Rajasthani
is
and Western Hindi

*aL-o
5 (Stan-
dard Hindi and Panjabi)

-aka-.
derived directly or by analogy from forms in
was dropped, hence from

o or a.
we
get
*a-o.
Apa. a-u whitli
becomes either
68
tlie
appears in
is
Marathi dative and in Kashmiri.'
In Hindi
it
seen only in the pronominal declension tis-ka

Conjug-ation.
kis-ka.'^
Sing.
1.
pucchaii
pucchasi or
-hi
Plur
1.
imcchahu
2. 3.
2.
pucchahu
pucchahi.
pucchai
is
3.
This
very close to Old Hindi and not far from the modern
forms pucchu, pucche, puccho, pucche.

In general
it
may
be said that the Apabhratiisa forms, when-
ever these can be ascertained, should be taken as the starting
point for the derivation of words in the modern languages and
Thus to derive Hindi pahla "first" we should start from an Apabhramsa form pahilail rather than from prathamah or padhamo.*
the comparative study of their phonology.""
Pais'aci Prakrit.
Paisaci
lies
outside the circle of languages
The term seems to have been used (a) of the language of demons ' Bhutabhasa," (ft) of a number of uncivilized languages, including some Apabhranisas and some non-aryan languages, (c) the Paisaci dialect of the grammarians (especially Hemacandra) with asubdialect Ciilika PaiSaci (C.P.).
dealt with so far.
This Paisaci dialect
is
archaic in character.
Its
chief pecu-
liarity is the substitution of
surd mutes for sonants.
Tamo-
tara
= Damodara.
C.P. nakara
nagara raca
,
raja,
khamma
gharma, kanitappa
=
T,
kandarpa.
na
becomes na
h.
la
becomes 35
fas in
/a
ya remains.
are
Intervocal consonants are
not dropped.
Aspirates
not
reduced to
jn,
ny become nn
Mg. and probably every
other dialect at a sufficiently early stage).
Who
were the speakers of this dialect

tliis
Edict agrees with

I
dialect in
The Shahbazgarhi a number of particulars. The

?
Also in
Roniani
"'
of Gypsies in
Europe, C'oros-kero
t>f
thief."
^
^
These forms have fused with the old fominino
tifsa. etc.
Sec Grierson's Phonology of the Indo-Aryan Vernaculars.

Grierson derives from an Apabhrainda padhdvillail apparently deduced
suffix -ilia so frequent in
from AMg. padhamilla with the
M.
cf.
Pischol
44!t
wlio assumes Old Indian *pra(>iila.
Brhatkatha
of
69
to
in
story, in Paisacl.
Gunadhya was composed, according This work was popular in Kashmir

in the
the
the
ilth century.
saritsagara,
maiijari.
Soraadeva produced one version
Katha-
and Ksemendra a shorter one in the BrhatkathaSome scliolars have concluded that Culika PaisacI
North-West
of India.
was a
dialect of the
it
Sir
George Grierson
connects
with the Dard and Kafir languages of the

of Kashmiri.'
Hindu
Kush, including Shina and the under-layer
it is admitted that Gunadhya was a SouthThe Brhatkatha was composed many centuries before that late literary development in Kashmir which produced Ksemendra, Bilhana, Somadeva and Kalhana. 'Î na becomes f na, and ^ becomes 55 1 are suggestive of Dravidian influence.
On
the other hand
Indian,
Other features such as the retention

merely archaic.
of
medial
t,
and
of y are
Surd
for sonant
It is
can be paralleled in the South

a
corruption when a The student will relanguage member the Welsh parson Sir Hugh Evans in the Merry Wives Speakers of Gaelic have the same tendency. of Windsor. Any such corrupt dialect on the fringes of Aryan speech would necessarily disappear with the continued extension of Aryan
as well as in the North.
is
common
adopted by an alien
race.'^
speech.
So that
it
seems quite as possible that the original

as that they
Cockscomb' Demons belonged to the Vindhyas

were Cannibals of Kashmir.*
1
Vide the PiSaca Languages of North- Western India.
R. As. Soc. ilon.
The author's theory that these, mostly mixed, dialects should be provided with a separate compartment between the Iranian and
Vol. VIII, 1906.
Indian subdivisions of Aryan, because they combine Indian and Iranian

peculiarities, is
not convincing.
Nor
is
the connection with C. PaiSaci

is
obvious, as the main peculiarity of C.P. (surd for sonant)

in this area.
'^
exceptional
It
is
quite probable that the

is
same change
in
Armenian
(tasn
ten
')
and Teutonic (Gothic taihun)

3
due to the same cause.
If that is the
meaning
of ciilika, cuhka.
* References.
Grierson's
Monograph,
ff.
pp.
and
2.
Sten
Konow.
Home
of
Paisaci Z.D.M.G. Ixiv, pp. 95
Grierson Z.D.M.G. xlix. pp.
393-421.
70
CHAPTER XL
PRAKRIT LITERATURE.
If
tirst
the whole of the Middle Indian period be included, the

place in literary development
is
must be assigned to
its
Pali.
Its claim to this place
due not only to
antiquity, but
also to the inherent worth
and
historical interest of the early
Buddhist
literature.
Of
all
Indian religions, Buddhism has had

Tlie Pali_5ipitaka
the profoundest effect on Asia as a whole.

or " Triple Casket
religion.
"
contains the oldest scriptures of that
Moreover from the Pali books we get incidentally

life,
a view of Indian
that serves to supplement the more
pedantic outlook of the orthodox priesthood, and the romances

of the bards.
Every student
of Indian History should at least
read some of the Jatakas or Birth Stories of the Buddha.'
Representations of these stories, and scenes

of the
from the
life
Buddha occur
continually on the sculptured panels of
Buddhist stupas and vihdras.
Indeed without a knowledge of
the outlines of the Buddhist doctrine, and

sion of the lives of
these old scriptures,
some comprehenBuddhi.sts, lay and cleric, as revealed by the student cannot really grasp what was
one of the dominant factors in Indian History for more than a
thousand years after the Founder's death.

Indian Philosophy
will find
The student
of
that acute reasoning and bold specu-
lation were not confined to the ortliodox schools of tliought.
but also found among the Bauddhas.

i]
History
is
represented by the versified monkish chronicles
contained in the
of Ceylon.
Mahavamsa
dealing with the early history
The term
Prakrit Literature however does not ordinarily

If
include Pali Literature.
Pali
works be excluded, then the
greater part of the whole of the Prakrit Literature is made up This, as we have seen, is found in three of Jain Literature.
distinct Prakrits.
'
See Bibliography.
/,
71
Ardha-Magadhi
comprises
4:5
is
the language of the oldest Jaiu books,

of tlie
which form the Canon
S'vetgjubara^ct.
This canon
.
dgamas including
ele ven
anga s and twel ve updngas
These are sometimes spoken of under their Prakrit names and

sometimes under the Sanskrit equivalents,
1st
e.g.
Anga.
,,
Ayaranga-suttani
Sii5'a-gadangani
2nd
7th
1st
,,
Upanga.
= Acdrdnga-sutram. = Sutrakrtdngam. UviissLgardskaao = Updsaka-daSdhJ Ovavaiya-suttam = Aupapdtika-sutram.

The date
of the completion of
This great collection of writings was arranged by Devaddhi
Ganin in the 5th century a.d. the work is given as 980 years
the Founder of Jainism,
i.e.
after the entrance to nirvana of
a.d. 454 (or possibly a.d. 514).

,
The
older books, G'a,\]ed_Puzvas on which this redaction
was
it
based, have completely disappeared.

tains materials of different centuries
is difficult
Thus the
collection con-
mixed together, so that

is
to distinguish them.
B.C.).
Bhadrabahu (about 300

This apparently
is
Some portions One such work
are ascribed to
the
of
Eappa-
suttam'" {Kalpa-sutram) which contains a
life
MaEavira.
not really older than the 5th century a.d.
The
style of the oldest prose
books
is
diffuse, delighting in
elaborate descriptions and endless repetitions. Their chief interest to the general student lies in their incidental references to
facts
and circumstances of the ordinary everyday life in India. The oldest Kdvya work in Jain literature is the PajimaL^cariya, which gives a version of the Ramayana. It dates perhaps
In Jain Maharastri there are non-canonical books of the
:Q
from the 3rd century a.d.

Svetambaras,
stories
consisting
lives of
mainly
of
collections
of
stories
and narratives of the The Svetamconversion of various people to the Jain religion. bara literature has as yet been only partially explored by
from the
saints,
famous
Edited and translated by Hoernle Edited by Jacobi, and translated
in the Bibliotheca Indica. in
Sacred Books of the East Series.
See Bibh'ography.
72
scholars,
modern
and much material both

in
for philology
less
and
for
history awaits scientific treatment.
Even
known
are the
works of the Digambara sect
Jain S'auraseni.
Bhandarkar
has published extracts from the Pavayana-sara of Kundakund-
acarya and the Kattigeyanupekkha of Karttikeyasviimin, both

of
which are
in verse.
is
Jain literature
neither so famous, nor so widely studied as
the Pali Buddhist hterature.

or in uncritical editions.
Much of it is Much of it again
still
is
in manuscript,
difficult
without
(and even with) a commentary.
Apart from the Jain Canon the earl}' literary development of Ardhamagadhi has been deduced from its occurrence in certain inscriptions, and in fragments of plays ascribed to Asvaghosa
'
or his contemporaries.
Jain Maharastri
is
found
in the
Kak-^
kuka
inscription.
of
For the purposes
Kavya however
the most important
Prakrit was from an early date Maharastri.^
This was the
language of the Prakrit Epics and Lyrics, and formed the

starting point for Prakrit
Grammarians.
is
Most famous
dasa.
of the Epics
it
the Setubgjidha, a work of such
excellent technique, that
has often been ascribed to Kali-
The poem, which is called in Prakrit Ramnavaho or Dakamuhavaho relates the story of Rjima, but is supposed to commemorate the building of a bridge of boats in Srinagar by
,
Pravarasena, king of Kashmir.
'
Luders.
Jacobi (Selected Narratives, Introd.. 1886) suggested the 4th centur\
A.D. as
about the time when M. attained
this position.
:
Early
inscrip-
tions of
M. country are of the Pali type
the latest of these (sliowing
some instances of elision of single intervocal consonants) date from 150 and 200 a.d. Tlie Jain Canon according to tradition was written down in 454 A.u. Its language [AMg.j was influenced by M. [Pisohel denies
this].
^
Dandin praises the Sotubandha.

Sanskrit Literature, p. 331.
Steiii'a trana.
:
Macdonell.
Rajatarangini,
lif-ntioii
of Kfilidasa witli
For Pravarasena II see For an attempted identiMntrigupta, sec Stein's note on verse 129.
Bk. Ill, V. 354.
73
The Gaiidavaho celebrates the conquest of Bengal by Yaovarman of Kanauj about the end of the seventh centur}' A.D. Its author's name was Bappai'raa ( = Vdkpatirdjd) possibly a nom de plume. The same author composed another Epic Maliumahaviaa of which only one or two verses have been
preserved in quotations.
The Ravanavaho and the Gaiidavaho have both been much influenced by Sanskrit models, and dehght in long compounds. The last eight cantos of lêvaa.ca.nAtai' s Dvyd&raya-Mahdkdvyam
form a small Prakrit Epic entitled Kumdrapalacarita describing The the deeds of Kumarapala of Anhilvada in Gujarat.
object of these cantos, as of the whole work,
is
to illustrate
the rules of the author's compendious Sanskrit and Prakrit
grammar called Siddhaj-Hemacandra. The most important work for tlie study
Sattasai {Sapta&aiakam) of Hala,
prising verses by
of Maharastri is the
This
is
a n_anthQlogv_jcom^
many
of
poets.
names, another, that

recensions differ very
Bhuvanapala, gives 384.
One commentary gives 112 The various

'
much in the distribution of the verses, and probably few can now be definitely assigned to their authors. The collection is evidence of the immense amount of
Maharastri poetry that must have been composed, but not
preserved.
(spelled
Besides Hala
who
is
identified
with Sdtavahana
variously Sahvahana,
etc.)
there are a few
names
2.
known from other sources.

The Vidiasaka
purado sukai
says, " ta
Hariuddha, Xandiuddha and Pottisa
are mentioned in Rajaêkhara's Karpuramaiijari Act I, p. 19,
ujjuam jeva
kini
na bhaniadi
amha-
nani cedia Hariuddha-Xandiuddha-Pottisa-Hala-ppahudinam pi

tti."
'
The date
put
it
of this anthology has not
been determined.
Weber
in the 3rd century at earliest, but earlier
than the 7th
century.
Macdonell says, the poet Hala probably lived before
In Lanman's racy translation this runs:

straight out
:
"Then why
don't you say
it
Our
little
pussy
's
first-rate
poet, ahead even of

{Sukai- Stikat'i.)
Harivrddha, Nandivrddha, Pottisa and the
rest."
<4
1000 A.D.
Some
confusion has been caused by the identifica-
tion of this Hala-Satavahana with the 17th king of the
Andhra
dynasty (68
a.d.).'
Jacobi on the other hand identified him

Pratisthana,
with the Siitavahana, king of
who induced the
Jains to change their Church Calendar in 467 a.d.
There can be no doubt that

poets well
this anthology, including lyric
known
in
the time of Rajasekhara, was not put
together in the 1st century a.d.*

early Prakrit of the Pali stage.
when we should rather expect The introductory verses of the

love
lyrics
Sattasai rather suggest that these
of
the South
were not so universally on the

been.
""A
lips of
men
as they
had formerly
Another anthology of similar material

or Vajjalagga of Jayavallabha a
is
the
Jaavallaham
It contains
collec-
Svetambara Jain.
some 700
tion.
verses.
Some
of these are
common
to
Hala's
Dramatic Prakrits.
Sanskrit.
The ordinary use

is
of
three
Prakrits
(M. S. Mg.) in Sanskrit plays
familiar to every student of

differ
The
authorities
however
as
to the precise
allotment of the Prakrits
among
its
the roles.
The Mrcchakatiof similar standing, It

is
kam
is
one of the richest in

of course,
variety of Prakrit dialects.
The Hero
tional for a
and male characters
except the Vidusaka, speak and sing in Sanskrit.
excep-
woman
to speak Sanskrit, bub the
Nun
in Mala-
timadhavam does so. A purely Prakrit play in which even the Hero speaks Prakrit is also exceptional. A well-known instance
is
the Camphor-cluster.
The author however thinks

Sanskrit has been
>ised.
it
well
to
explain
why no
In the Prologue the Stagemanager
'
See Vincent Smith,

it
Early
History of India,
'2nd
edition, p.
19<i.
whence
*
has been copied by school
liistories of India.
Vincent Smith has evidently given too

,
much
weight to
hi.s
"
late;^t
leading authority the

*
classical'
on the relations between the vernacular language and or .secondary' Sanskrit," i.e. Professor O. Franke's " Pali
'
and Sanskrit,"
jud'jineiit.
1902.
This
is
a book of some ingenuity, but
little historical
INTRODUCTUiN TO PRAKRIT.
reflects,
*
75
Then why has the poet abandoned the Sanskrit

?
language and undertaken a composition in Prakrit

assistant replies in Maharastri
"
His
" parusa, Sakkaabandha Paiia-bandho
vi hoi
suumaro
" purisa-mahilanani jettiam ihantaraiii tettiam imanani
II
"Sanskrit poems are harsh:
but a Prakrit poem
is
very
smooth
as that
the difference between
thera in this respect is as sjreat
between man and woman."

is
Sauraseni
jester.
is
the ordinary prose language of ladies and of the

is
Mtiharastri
the corresponding verse dialect.
Magadhi
It
is
used by menials, dwarfs, foreigners and the

in
like, e.g. the
two policeman and the fisherman
Sakuntala.
also
MSS. and texts often assign the dialects contrary to the rules of Poetics and the statements of commentators. They also confuse the dialects, so that Magadhi appears almost the same as Saurasenxspoken by Jain monks and small boys.'
This mixture of languages in the Indian
Drama
has been
much
discussed, and various explanations suggested.

is
There
no exact parallel to the Indian usage.

of the
Comedy has
Aristophanes
always made fun

brings
in
speech of foreigners.
barbarian Triballos,
the Thracian
jargon with a vague resemblance to Greek.
who speaks a The Phoenician
The
following note of characters supposed to speak

Pischel
:
Magadhi
as re-
corded
bj'
Mrcchakatikatn
be useful to students of the Drama. 6akara, his servant Sthavaraka, the shampooer23)
may
Kumbhilaka, Vardharaanaka, the two Candalas and Rohasena. Sitkun, tala Fisherman and two policemen, Sarvadamana Sakuntala's young Prabodhacandrodaya the Carvaka's pupil and the messenger from son.
:
:
Orissa.
Mudraraksasa
servant, Jain
monk, messenger, SIddharthaka
and Samiddharthaka while they appear as Candalas. Lalita-vigralia[Otherwise Turuska raja: the bards and the spy (who also speaks 6.). captives and spy. The Indian spy speakes 6.]. Vemsamhara the Raksasa
:
and
his wife.
Mallikamarutam
:
elephant-keepers.
Nagananda
servants.
Caitanyacandrodaya
:
servants.
Candakausikam: Candalas and Rascal.

:
:
Dhurtasamagama barber. Hasyarnava Sadhupirnsaka. Latakainelaka Amrtodaya: Jain Kamsavadha: the Hunchback. Digambara Jain. monk.
76
tongue was parodied in Latin comedy, tliough the readings are

too corrupt for
much
to be
made
are
of
it
now.
Shakespeare's
Welshmen and Frenchmen

speech of
familiar.
Again the vulgar

to
common
people, as opposed to the language of the

its
educated, has al\va3rs found

Dialect also, in a
way on
the comic stage.
even
in serious
more or less conventional form, has appeared Moreplays from Shakespeare's time onwards.
vvc
over in Greek Tragedy

dififerent to
have the chorus singing
in a dialect
the general language of the play.

is
The Doric chorus

in a conventional
dialects,'
in the Attic play, like other lyric poetry,

dialect, a literary poetic language based
on the Doric
in fact
what
in India
would he called a (literary) Prakrit.
The Indian usage however dififers from all these partial In the first place we may find four, and regulady three, different dialects used in the same household, nay by members of the same family secondl}^ one of these is a learned
parallels.
;
('dead') language belonging to a previous stage of linguistic
development;
thirdly, dialects purporting to represent widely
distant areas are combined iu a single play, and assigned to

particular characters without
any obvious reason

Dramatic Prakrits
and
finally
>
the practice has been reduced to definite rules.
The systematisation
prising.
of the
is
not
sur-
Everything
else
about the Drama has been

of tlie various sorts of of
classified
and
the
'
codified,
from the virtues

in the endless
faults
of
'
kinds
poetic
Hero to ornament. The

of the
making
minute rules seems to have characteristics
Brahman
in all ages.
Explanations of this Sanskrit- Prakrit

or three different lines.
Drama may
:
follow
two
One
line is the Realistic
namely that
the conversations in the plays represent the actual conditions Grierson writes: " In of Indian life in say the Gupta period.
India there
is
nothing extraordinary in such a polyglot medley.
'
See Giles. Manual
of
Comparativo
I'liilology.
014-6.
Almost
every word of these three sections dealing with Greek dialects can be
applied to Indian dialects.
INTRODUCTION TO PRAKRir.
It is paralleled
77
by the conditions
of
any
large house in Bengal
at the present day, in which there are people from every part
of India
each of
whom
speaks his
own language and
is
under-
stood by the others, though none of them attempts to speak
what
is
not his mother tongue."
'
Beames suggested a
similar
explanation.'^
Of course
it is
admitted that the dialects are
conventional in form, not faithful copies of spoken vernaculars,

also that the assignment of a particular dialect to a particular
sort of menial
granted that educated
may have been mor#or less true to fact. Again, men could speak Sanskrit and that
is
ladies generally could not, it
not to be supposed that the
men
could speak nothing but Sanskrit, and habitually addressed
not only their wives but even their grooms in that language.
The well-educated man was able

spoke
it
to speak Sanskrit.
The
^^
hero therefore spoke Sanskrit, and by
a stage convention
always, just as stage kings almost always, and real
kings rarely, wear a crown.
Of course
this explanation implies that the
form
of the classic line
drama was
is
fixed in the SaurasenI country.
Another
must
This
x,
be adopted to explain the use of Maharastri in verse.

clearly a case of
Literary convention.
school of lyric
poetry developed in the South and became famous far beyond

the borders of the Great
Kingdom.
Maharastri verses were

still
doubtless sung throughout India as Persian verses

It
are.
was natural to regard

It is
this dialect as the only appropriate
one for Prakrit songs.
more difficult to account for the use for the other dialects along this line.^ The solution of the problem is obviously bound up with the history of the origin and development of
I
Encyclopaedia Britannica, 11th
ed., Vol. 22, p. 254.
^ ^
Grammar,
Vol. I, p.
7.
Le Theatre Indian (1890), p. 331, suggested that the was connected with the development of the Krishna cult at Mathura the capital of the 6urasena countrj'. The use of Magadhi he would regard as a legacy from the ancient Magadhas, the bards of
Sylvain Levi
use of Sauraseni
JIagadha.
INTRODUCTION lO PRAKRIT.
Of this we have
little direct
the Indian drama.
knowledge.
Opinions have differed as to whetlier richness in Prakrit, as in

the case of the Mrcchakatikam,
date,
is
a sign of early or of late

in
Again some authorities believe

to
an original Prakrit
drama
Tlie
which Sanskrit was added
later.
fragments of Buddhist plays ascribed to the time
of
Kanishka show the use of two or three distinct Prakrits. The Sanskrit is not quite "correct" and Prakrit is sometimes
On the other hand the plays ascribed Bhasa (not yet dated) evidently prior to the Mrcchakatikam are not so rich in Prakrit. One play has none, and some at
used in stage directions.
to
lea8t of these plays are closer in
feeling
and diction
to
the
Mahabharata than to Kalidasa or Bhavabhuti. The extreme antiquity of Bhasa' s plays has been supposed to be supported by the character of his Prakrit, e.g. ayyautta instead of
ajjautta.
This however
is
common
feature in South Indian

is
The Trivandrum South Indian MSS. As

MSS.
edition of Bhasa's works

so often happens, these
based on
are evi-
MSS.
dently unreliable for the original form of the Prakrit.^
Prakrit origin has been proposed not only for the Drama,
but also for the Epic and Puranas,* that the Brhatkatha was
composed
in Paiâci Prakrit
is
recorded by literary tradition

for Prakrit originals of the
{vide p. 69 above).
The evidence
Mahabharata and Puranas
consists in small points of

to
grammar
remem-
and metre considered to point The question cannot be discussed

bered however that
J
translation
from Prakrit.
here.
It should be
all
poetry and
first siglit
;
verse,
that has had a
hm
for
mh
and hn
for
nh at
bably only orthographical variations
cf.
appear archaic, but are proguhniadu = (,r7?7jp/ta<M). In the
SvapnavSsavadatta the Vidusaka speaks âuraseni, while the dialect of the ladies and servants contains many forms proper to MaharSstri (or
AMg.).
^
Pargiter.
Dynasties of the Kali Age.
Griersoii.
Enc. Brit. Prakrit,
p. 253.
Compare
original.
also the tlieories of the origin of the Paucatantra.

is
(Hertol.)
Jayadeva's Gitagovinda
(Pischel).
supposed to be based on an Apahhramia
popular origin, must
definite
litive
79
in-
existed (in
some form however

old
and
fluctuating) in the popular speech before it

in
was
crystallised
Sanskrit.
If
the
poem be
enough, the
must have been current in Primary Prakrit, not in Middle Indian. Primary Prakrit would not be identical with the "Sanskrit" of Panini but it would bear a strong family
original
resemblance
period,
thereto.
Progressive
Sanskritising
at
later
acting unevenly
on various portions of
of
the
work,
would produce much the sort

find in tlie
plienomenon we actually
of
Epic Dialect.
Such a sanskritisation
its
Primary
Prakrit
is
very different in
significance from translation out
of a Middle Indian Prakrit into the Classical Sanskrit.
special
section
of Prakrit
Literature
is
formed by the
Prakrit Grammars.
The
oldest authority
is
the Bhdratiyandtya sdstra which gives
only a short description of Prakrit grammar in verses 6-23 of
Chapter
17.
Chapter 32 contains examples in Prakrit.

is
Un-
fortunately the text of this work
so corrupt, that little use
can be made of
it.
There seems to be no good authority

a grammar called Prdkrtalaksa na.
for ascribing to Panini
The oldest Prakrit grammar extant is the Prakrtaprakasa of Vararuci Katyayaua, who has been identified with the author of the Vdrttika kdraJ The oldest commentary on the Prdkrtd- prakdsa is the Manorama of JBhamaha. With this commentary the work has been edited and translated by Cowell. (See Bibliography). In Chapter X
on PaiSaci Bhamaha gives two short quotations from the
Brhatkatha.^
lost
Canda
in his
Prakrits (AMg.
Prakrtalaksana JM. JS.) together.
deals with M.
and the Jain

of
The arrangement
is
the
work shows it is comparatively ancient. The most important of the Prakrit grammars
that of
Hemacandra
1
of
Gujarat (1088-1172
32.
a.d.).
For the authorities see Pischel Gr.
Under Sutra
4.
ivasya pivah
\\
hrdayasya hitaakam
Kamalam piva miikham. Hitaakam harasi me taluni.

||
Sutra
14.
80
This forms the eighth chapter of his Siddha Hemacandra,

first seven chapters of which deal with Sanskrit grammar. The same author compiled a DeÎnamamala. Other grammars are The last chapter of the Samksipta-
the
ffdra of
Kramadi^vara
this follows
Vararuci and
is
of
little
value.
Prdkrtavyakarana of Trivikramadeva (about 13th cen-
tury) follows
Hemacandra. Mdrkandeya Kavindra who lived in Orissa in the reign of a Muiiundadeva (perhaps 17th century). Prdkrtakalpataru of Ramatarkavagiâ and many others of
Prdkrtasarvasvam of
importance.
Isolated verses in
less
Apabhramsa
occur in Jain
works, in
treatises
on poetics and in
late collections of stories like the
Seventy Tales of a Parrot and the Twenty-five Tales of the
More remarkable is the inclusion by many MSS. Apabhramsa verses in the 4th Act of the VikramorvaSiyam
Vampire.
be recited by King Puriiruvas.'
or
of
tu
Another source of Late Prakrit

.'^
Apabhramsa
verses
is
the Prakrta-Paiiigalain, an Anthology
of the fourteenth century or later

S. P.
Pandit (Bombay Sanskrit Series) omits them as spurious.
His
reasons for doing so have been disputed.

2
Edited by C. M. Ghosh in the Bibliotheca Indica, with commentaries,
various readings and glossary.
PART
S'auraseni.
II.
Extract No.
1.
Interlude preceding the 2nd Act of the Ratnavali.

logue between the heroine's two girl-friends
dia-
Susangada and
Niunia.
Susangada enters with a maina in a cage.
Susan
HaddhI haddhi
'
Adha kahim daniin mama hatthe

gada
imaiii sariani nikkhivia^
me
piasahl Saaria bhavis
sadi?
(Looking another loay) Esa khu^ Xiunia, ido jjevva
aacchadi,
{Enter Nipunikd\.
Nipu
Uvaladdho* khu mae bhattino vuttanto

{Steps round).
ta Java
gadua
bhattinie nivedemi.
Susan: Hala Niunie! Kahim danim vimhaakhittahiaa^ via idha-tthidam mam avadhiria ido adikkamasi?
Nipu
Kadhain
Susangada
Edain"
Hala Susaiigade
sutthu
tae
jaiiidam.''
khu
14.
mama
Kahim
?
vimhaassa
form a
74.
karanam.
=fcamtn
Haddhi
= ha dhik.
'*
Adha
in
loc. sing.
also used for

^
where
" and " whither
"
danim
nikkhivia gerund of nikkhivadi
{ni-\-kfjip).
In the previous Act the
Heroine Sagarika mentioned giving her maina into SusahgadS's charge, " Saria mae Susahgadae hatthe samappida " (= samarpita) before going
with Queen Vasavadatta to the Love God's grove, where indeed she saw
not the
;s
God but
the liing.
gada
125.
piasahl
(
9, 45, 13.
Capeller has
Esa kkhu
for esa
khu
= khalu
74) but only e
and o
should be so shortened in
*
6. (Pischel, 94).
ido jjSvva
68
(2).
uvaladdho
Java
17, 125.
mae
106.
bhattino 96.
122.
ta from vedic tat
"so."
6
1,29.
gadua, gerund
" So
I will
go and
tell
my
mistress."
vimhaa 47.
sutthu
38.
Skhitta (^^ksip)
125.
hiaa
9, 60.
via iva (from
(v)iva). (t)thida
6 J
{^stha)
125.
janidam
adikkamasi {âti hram). 125 (i^jila) " you are quite right."
edam
6
12.
82
Ajja
'
kila
bhatta Siri-pavvadado aadassa Siri-Klianda
Dasanamadheassa dhammiassa saasado aala-kusuma-sanjanana-dolialain

sikkhia,
attano'^
'^
parigahidaTii
tti
nomaliaip
kusuma-samiddhi-sohidam
devie
iiivediduiii
?
karissadi
pesida
mhi.
edam vuttantam Tumani una* kahim
patthida
Susan
Piasahim Saariam annesidum.'

Dittha*'
Nipu
mae
"
Saaria
gahida-8amuggaa-oitta-j)halaa-
vattia kaaliharaiii pavisanti.

pi
Ta gaccha
piasahini.
Aharn
Devisaasani
gamissam.
[Exeunt].
Translation.
Susan: Oh dear, oh dear! Now wherever has Saaria got to {Looking another after thrusting this maina into my hand ? this way. way) Why, hereis Niunia coming
[Enter Nipunika].
Nipu
Well
have received
tell
this
news from the master,

(Steps round).
so I
will just
go and
my
mistress.
Susan: Hullo Niunia! why,

ing here.
how
is
this?
you seem altogether
perplexed, and go walking off without noticing
me
are
stand-
Nipu
What Susangada ? Hullo Susangada

This
is
You
quite
right.
the cause of
my
perplexity.
To-day the
ajja 44. Siri 68. pavvadado " from the mountain." 50, 86. Sada 2. dhammia 'righteous' here = " juggler," dhammiassa saasado " from a juggler " (saka.<at). aala = akala. 2 attano 100. gahida (^grah) 125. nomalia 75. 3 " bright with an abundance of flowers " tti 74. pesida mhi 08(1)
+ if). una=' but (piinar in this meaning is treated as an enclitic meaning " again " it becomes puno). patthida (pra-^ \îftha). 6 annesidum Inf. fr. annesadi {anu-k-\/is). dittha 125 (dr^) samuggaa " box " (aamudga). citta-phalaa " paint" paint brush " {vartika also means " wick." cf. H ing tablet," vattia
(pro
*
'\
'
batti).
T
kaaliharam
for
kaaligharam.
74.
-aBsain " to," pi
master learned from a juggler
S'^
named
Siri
Khanda Dasa,
have been sent
bright
it.
returned from the mountain of Sri, about the longing to

see flowers produced out of season,
to inform the
and
she
Queen, that he
off to
will
if
make a jasmine
will
with an abundance of flowers
embrace
But where are you
Susan
To hunt
I
for our Saaria.
Nipu
saw Saaria with her paint-box,

Queen.
tablet
and brush going

I will
into the plantain-house.

to the
So go to your friend.
go
Sauraseni.
Katnavali, Act
II.
Extract No.
2.
Soliloquy of Sagarika and conversation
with Susaiigata.
[Enter Sagarika with a painting
tablet,
and
evidently in love].
Sa
Hiaa,
pasida pasida.'
Kim
imina'^ aasa-mettaphalaena
dullahajana-ppatthananubandhena? Annamca,
ditthamettena idiso^ sarptavo vattadi puno
vi
Jena jevva
tam jevva
pekkhidum
hiaa.
ahilasasi tti
aho de* mudhada!

saha
Adinisarasa^
Jammado^ pahudi
samvaddhidam
imam
janam pariccaia khana-metta-damsanaparicidam'' janam anugacchanto na lajjasil adha va ko tuba doso ? Anangasarapaclanabhidena^
tae
evvam
ajjhavasidatn.
Anangam dava
1
uvalahissam.*'
{Tearfully)
Bhodu! Bhaavam Ku-
Pasida (pro
-t-
sad).
2
'
imina
idiso
anena.
-mStta
69.
dullaha
'
hard
to attain',
ppatMiaaa
desire' (prarthana).
3 70.
annam
48.
'
samtavo
anguish
(tap),
vattadi
45.
ahilasasi (abhi
laa).
*
5
de
ati
3.
nrsamsa
cf.
'
very
cruel.
12.
Jammado 'from
sacca
birth' pahudi
(pari + iyai).
vaddhida past. part.
[vrdh).
pariccaia
7
8
44.
damsana
paclana
49, 64.
20
(cf.
H. ^5It).
reproach
ajjhavasidam
cf. 44.
(adhi
+ ava +
<to)
bhodu
**
cf. 75.
'
uvalahissam
I will
'
(upa + a + labh).
84
sumaiilia nijjida-surasuro
'
bhavia, itthljanam paharanto
ua
lajjasi
savvadha
na ko
mama
vi
mandabhainle imina dunni(Looks at her
mittena'^ avassam
tablet)
maranarp uvatthidani.
Ta
jilva
idha aacchadi tava alekkha-samap-
pidara^
taiii
aliiinadain janain
tablet
pekkhia* jadhasamihidani
resolutely fixes
karissani.
{Takes the
and
her atten-
tion, then sighs)
Jai vi adi-saddhasena*) vevadi aani aditassa

alihia
mettam me aggahattho, tadha vi damsanovao^ natthi tti jadha tadha

[Enter Susangada].
janassa
anno
pekkhissam.
Susan
Edam khu
na
kaaliharam ta Java pavisSmi,

Kiiu
{Enters
and
"^
looks
surprised)
una
esa
garuanuraakhitta-hiaa
se
alihantr
mam
pekkhadi.
Ta Java ditthipadam
and
pariharia niruvaissam.
over her shoulder.
{Goes softly behind her,
looks
Delightedly)
!
Kadbam
Bhatta alibido
^
sahu Saarie sahu
Adha va na kamalaarani
mae
vajjia raa-
hamsl annassim ahiramadi.
Sa
{Tearfully) Alibido
-salila
eso.
Kim una
?
nivadanta '"-baha
{Looking up
me
ditUiI pekkbiduip na jDabhavadi.
and forcing a smite) Kadhaiii Susangada

ido uvavisa."
nij jida
Sahi Susarigade
(mr + /i).
'
bhavia
122.
itthi (=s</I) held to indicate old
form
*istrl.
2 3 +
''
paharanto pres. part, (pra + hr).

omen.'
u\atthidaiii {upa+stha).
alelchija-sainarpita))i.
dun-nimittarn
pekkhia
uvao.
122.
saddhasa=sad/(-t;asa.
'
6
"^
means'
109.
17. 71.
natthi
'
isn't "
ij
8."5.
garua " heavy "

se
'
'her'
'
pariharia.
gorund (pari -\-h/).
niiQxaissain
'
I will
investigate
1*
S 17.
(vrj)
I"
kamalaarani mass of lotuses,' a lotus pool, vajjia gerund of vajjed " excepting."
nivadanta
17.
-baha(cf.
(65.*/)//
a) against
(!) 0.'5.
38.
For
-'
tear." appar'
ently Ijappha becomes *b5pha

etc., it
II
baha
^HS
13).
In the moaning
steam,"
remains bappha
H.
'HHT
'
(Pisch. 305).
nvavifia (iipa +viN).
INTRODUCTION TO TKAKRIT.
'S5
Susan
{Approaching and looking

?
at the tablet) Sahi,
ko eso tae
alihido
Sa
Sahi nain pautta-maliusavo
'
Bhaavam Anango.
pi
Susan: [Smiling) Alio de niunattanam! Kim una sunnaiu via

cittain
padibhadi
ta
ahani
alihia
Radi-sanadhaip
karissai)!.
[Takes the brush and paints).
Sa
[Indignantly on recognising the drawing) Klsa^ tae ahaiii
ettha alihida
Susan
Sahi kini aarena kuppasi'?
Jadiso
ta
tae
Kfimadevo
ahhido, tadisi
kira
mae Radi
alihida
?
annadha-sanibhavini
tuha edina^ alavidena
Kadhehi savvain vuttantam.

janida mhi piasahie.
[Aloud)
Sa
[In confusion aside)

Piasahi,
Xam^
mahadi khu me lajja. na edam vuttantam avaro ko'vi
Ta tadha
janissadi.
karesu'' jadha
Susan
Sahi,
ma
lajja,
ma
lajja.
Translation.
Sa
Be
in
quiet,
my
heart, be quiet.
is
What
is
the use of keeping

!
on wanting a person that

trouble.
unattainable
It
is
only results
this,
Another
thing ^What
folly
that
though the mere sight of him results

desirest to see
in
such anguish, thou

!
him again
Cruel, cruel heart
art not thou
ashamed
glance
to desert this person that has
from birth, and go after

?
grown up with you known only from a moment's one

it
Nay what
Be
art
fault is
of thine
Thou
didst so
determine when frightened by the falling of the Love-
God's arrows.
it so,
then I will chide the
God
of
Love
Gods
?
Revered Lord
of the
Flower
Bow
after vanquishing.
and
'
Demons
not
ashamed
to
harry
womenfolk
paiitta
125 {pra-irvrt).
'
^ ^
KIsa " why ? " ettha kuppasi " art angry."

edina
here "
70.
*
^
= edena.
alavida (5 + iop).
savva
45.
(H. sab.)
nam=nundm.
karesu
116.
avaro
17.
(H. aur).
86
Utterly illfated that I
am,
this
omen
inevitably
means
beloved
my
death
is
imminent.
is
So while no one
coming,
I will just
gaze at
this
one in picture limned, and gaze to
my
heart's content.
Although perturbation makes

yet
I
my
finger
shake so violently,
I shall
have no other means
of seeing
him, so
see
him
just as I
draw him.
So
I will
Susan: This must be the plantain house.
go
in.
Why
vision
her heart
is
so beset with
deep attachment that she

I will
does not see
me
as she draws.
is
!
avoid her
line of
and find out what she
up
to.
What
a
master, Bravo, Saaria bravo
Of course
drawn the swan does not

?
delight in ought but a lotus pool.
Sa
have drawn him, but

dear Susangada.
my
and cannot see him.
drowned What Susangada ?

sight
is
in falling tears
Sit
down
here
my
Susan
:
Who
is
this
you have painted

of Love,
!
Sa
The Revered Lord

:
whose great Festival
it is.
Susan
Ah, how clever you are
But the picture seems rather
empty.
So
I will
paint in Rati at his side.

?
Sa
Why have you drawn mp. there My dear, why are you angry Siisaii
:
without,
of
tell
any reason
have drawn a Rati to match your God

sembler,
Love
So, dis-
away with circumlocution, and

found
1
me
all
about
it.
Sa
So she
lias
My
Susan
:
dear,
else
me out the dear am much ashamed.

to
So do take care that
nobody
comes
know
of
it.
My
dear, there's nothing to be
ashamed
of.
S'auraseni.
Extract No.
is
3.
This extract
Pi.schel (1877), p. 29.
taken from the Bengal recension edited by A comparison with the usual or " Deva-
nagarl" version
have been taken
will
witli the original text.
show that considerable liberties must Here the king carries
INTRODUCTION TO PHAKRIT.
87
a bow in his hand and wears a garland of forest flowers, in the

other version he is attended by Javanihim with
'
Yavana women'
the Vidusaka
!
who carry the bows and wear
the flowers.
There the kin? passes

it is
a sleepless night thinking of his beloved, here
who cannot sleep though worrying about his return to luxury The VidGsaka in the second act of vSakuntala describes his
troubles as
companion to a sportive monarch. Hi manahe,' bho hado mhi, edassa miaa-silassa ^ ranno
'
vaassabhavena nivvinno.
jhandine
vi
Aam
mao,^
aam varaho'
tti
maj-
gimhe virala-padava-cchayasu vana-raisu'* ahindia, patta-sankara-kasaa-virasaim 5 unha-kaduaim pijjanti giri-naisalilaim.
Aniada-velam^ ca unhonhara
mamsam
bhunjiadi.
Turaa-gaanara ca saddena rattim'' pi natthi pakama-suidavvam.
Mahante jjeva pacciise- dasTe puttehim saunia-luddhehim kannovaghadina vanagaraana-kolahalena pabodhlami '" ettikenavi " dava pida na vutta jado gandassa uvari vipphodao
**
Hi manahe, an exclamation
assigned
expressing weariness.
Another reading
is
by high authority to VidQsakas, Hi hi bho. This however is

' '
said to express astonishment.

^
"^
miaa 'hunting.' ranno 99. nivvinno disgusted (nir-i-vid). mao " deer." majjhamdine of. 69. gimhe in summer 47. padava
' '
tree'
*
17.
vana-raisu 'in forest tracks.'
ahindia
cf.
wandering' hind a Prakritic
possibly non-aryan root, " to

5
'
wander"
ahindaa
= traveller (Mrcch.)
47.
patta 'leaf 45. samkara "mixture."

pijjanti Passive
'
unha -hot"
kadua
bitter.'
s
^
are drunk.'
aniada 'uncertain' (x/yam).

rattirh pi, ace. of duration,
vi
' '
bhunjiadi Passive
'is eaten.'
:
has rattimmi
even at night.'
Through the night' the other version suidavvam = suvidavvam from suvadi
sleeps.'
'
^ paccuse at dawn' cf. 44. commoner lubdhaka) hunter,

'
saunia (= vakunika) -hiddha

'
(= lubdha,
fowler.'
"
'
'ear-splitting.'
i.e.
kanna
cf.
Panjabi
of
kann,
ascetics.
H.
kan.
vana-gam.ina
forest-going,'
of foresters not
-ggahana 'forest-taking'
The other version has This explained by commentary as a "drive.'

passive.
'
makes better sense. pabodhiami am awakened'

1'^
'
II
6.
6ttika(M. gttia)e<am<.
vutta
finished'
(y.r.').
vipphodao a pimple
'
on top of a boil' (vi+sphut).
8s
'
sanivutto. Jena kila amliesum avahlnesum tattha-bhavada maanusarina assama-padam pavitthena^ mama adhannadiie
Sauntala
nama ka
vi
tavasa-kannaa dittha.
'
Tani pekkhia
sampadajii naara gamanassa kadhain

jjeva
pi
na karedi.
Edain
cintaantassa
?
mama
pahada,'*
acchisum raani.
^
Ta ka
pekkha-
gadi
mi.
Java nam kidaaraparikammaiii
pia-vaassaiii
Eso banasana-hattho hiaa-nihida-pia-ano vana puppha-
mala-dharl ido jjeva aaccliadi piavaasso.

vialo" bhavia citthissani,
evam
pi
Bhodu anga-maddanama vissamain" laheani.
Translation.
Pf. lieigho
!
am weary
to death of being
companion
to this
king with his hunting habits.
After wandering along tracks
in the jungle with hardly a tree to give shade, in the middle of
a
*
summer day, mind you, with

Here's a boar
' ;
cries
of 'Here's a deer'
is
or
then the water we drink
from mountain
streams warm,
bitter,
being mixed witli leaves.
and with a nasty astringent flavour from Meals at ungodl\' hours, and nothing
to eat but meat, burning hot!
Even during the night

rascally
"^
it is
im-
possible
to
get
proper sleep for the noise the horses and
elephants make.
At earhest dawn the
fowlers
wake
all
me
this
with the earsplitting din of a forest drive.^
And
with
my
troubles are not ended, for

boil.
now
there's a pimple on
top of the
For (yesterday) after leaving us behind, His

amhesum
48.
loc. phir.
'
106.
2
The other version has hio yesterday S 58. The anusvara is optional. pavittha (pra + vi.s) adhnnnada 'misfortune,'
' '
'
ij
SaiintaliT. this is
correct not Saiindala.

'
kadhani
kida
mention'
13.
{kathwti).
loc. plur. S 39.
*
'
pahada (pra + bha).
acchisiim
125,
aara {acara), parikammo " toilet."
"
madda
(=
'crushing,'
'
bruising
'
{mrd): the other version has l>hanca
vialo
1
^
rikalo)
'
lame.'
vissamain
Literally
rest' {vi-.sram).
lalieam opt.
(girl),'
117,
(ii)
(Inhh).
'sons of a slave
so frequent in
" whoreson"
"
more abuse Shakespearian comedy.
like
the
mediaev.il
Reading -ggahana.
Highness
in pursuit of a
siglit
'^9
deer entered a hermitage and, to

of
my
misfortune, caught
some hermit
her, not a
girl called Saiintala.
From
the
moment he saw
I
returning to town.
was thinking
?
of this
1 will
word does he say about when night fell on

go and see
my eyes.
friend
looks up).
Well, what's to be done
my good
and
when he has
finished his usual toilet.

witli
(Steps round
Here he comes
pretend
bow
in
hand, his beloved fixed
in his heart,
and a garland
of forest flowers
round
his neck.
I
Good,
1 will
my
limbs are so knocked about

I
can't
stand up straight.
leaning on his
staff)
So perhaps
may
get
a rest.
{Stands
S'auraseni.
Extract No.
4.
(Aside) Imain
S'akuntala before the King, who has forgotten her (Act 5).' avatthantaram ^ gade tadise anurae kim v^
sumaravidena.^
vavasissam.
Adha va
atta
danim me sodhanio.*
(Breaks
off)
Bhodu,
(Aloud) Ajjaiitta!
Adha va samjanani tadha
saido^ danim eso samudaaro.'
Porava! juttam' nama tuba

iniani
Idlsehiin
pura assamepade sabbhav-uttanahiaani^
samaa-puvvam
'"
^
.
sambhavia sampadam
akkharehim
paccacakkhiduni
'
Pischel's Edition, p. 104.

'
cf.
Monier Williams,
p. :203.
=2
Changed
condition.'
?
*
Past part. cans, of sumaredi.
sodhanio caus. gerundive (sudh).

for.'
The other version has soanio

Coram, supplies
2.
'
'
to
be sorrowed
5
vavasissam
fut. (vy
-ir
ava
-t
so)
'
I will decide.'
to tell
a secret.'
<>
Perhaps " wiU make an
effort."
Ajjaiitta
"questionable" (sam-\-H).
=sa7nudacaro "address,"
is
i.e.
the word 'Ajjaiitta.'
In the drama
t is
this
the regular form of address for a wife to her husband, but
not limited to this relation.

8
juttarn
nama
'
It
is
fitting
forsooth
'
34.
Other version has na
juttam nama. " Open-hearted through good nature."

**
10
With (preceded by) a contract (samaya).

'
sarpbhavia.
The other
verord.'
sion has pataria

1
having seduced or misled.'

' ' (
akkhara
'
syllable.'
\^
'
To
repulse
'
prati + 5
+ calc;).
90
The King
Bhodu.
paiittain,
issani.^
is
shocked and indignant.'

:
S'akuntala continues
ta
Paramatthado ^
jai
para-pariggaha-sankina tae
vi
edam
ahinnanena^ kena
tuha* samdeham avana-
[The King mutters a legal phrase about the
'
Primary Rule
'J.
Haddhi haddhi
distress to
anguliaa-sunna''
me
aiigul!
(Turns in
Gauiami).
"
Gautami. JJida" nam de Sakkavadare Saoititthe vandamanae pabbhattham angullaaip. [The King smiles and reflects on female cunning].
S'ak
:
udaam
Ettha" diiva vihina damsidam pahuttanarri,"^ Avaram
de kadhaissam."
[The King is still willing to listen]. Xaiu ekkadiasam vedasa-lada-mandavae nalinl-vatta-bhaanagadani'-
udaam tuha
'^
hattlie sainnihidaiii asi.''
[The King
still listens].
Takkhanani
so
mama
putta-kidao
'*
maa-savao uvatthido.
tti
Tado
1
tae
aam
dflva
padhamam
pivadu
anukampina uva
Sanskrit coining between the âuraseni speeches has been omitted.

=.
'^
paramdrthafo
'really.'
jai 6.
has also jadi
!?
I.
pariggaha 'wife.'
pauttam
^
125 {yuj).
'token.'
The name
tava.
of the play in 6auraseni
would
be
Ahinnann
the
Saiintalam.
+
Pischel read
cf.
in
!?
1900 he
421.
would have preferred
other
reading tuha.
'
Grammar
{apa + nl).
'
<>
devoid of
its ring.'
^
"i
Jada "
ettha
'
my
son."
pabbliattliain
âkravatare Sacitirthe.
here.'
S ^(^
slipped off' (pra+bhrain-^).
^ 10
= [prabhu-'vam) -ttanani
I;
goes bacU to
-Iranaiii
" kadhaissam
li
I
134.
'
lying in a lotus-leaf cup.'
asi 133.
I*
=:tat ksaiiam.
puttakidan
{"iahaka).
'
fostoreliikl."
The compound
'
is
inverted.
maa-s5vao 'fawn'
">
padhamam
20.
u\ac(liaiidido
coaxed
{iipa -^-rhfind).
cchandido.
91
Na una de
avaricidassa
'
hatthado udaaiii avagado
paduni.
panao.'
Paccha tassim jjevva udae mae gahide^ kado tena Etthantare vihasia bhanidam tae. " Saccaip savvo
vi
sagandhe visasadi,* jado duve

[The King
is
tumlie arannakao
"
tti.
touched, but thinks that these are "false
honied words," and to Gautamis' protest replies with a verse
on the guile of female cuckoos much more
the
guile
of
women
S'akuntala
is
indignant.
Anajja! attano hiaanumanena kila savvam edani pekkhasi.
Ko
nama anno dhamma-kancua-vavadesino
tana-channa-
kiivovamassa tuha anukari bhavissadi.

[Dusyanta's acts are well known
nonsense].
says
the King.
This
is
Sutthu.
Puru-vamsassa
Danim attacchandanuarini samvutta nihi ja imassa paccaena'' muha-mahuno hiaa-pattharassa
hattha-bbhasam uvagada.
{Hides her face in the end of her sari and weeps).
Translation.
S'ak
(Aside)
When
such love has so changed, what use

it
is
there in bringing
myself.
off)
to
mind
Yet
it is
for
me
!
to clear
Well, I will try.

this address
!
(Aloud)
My sweet lord
{Breaks
Nay
may now
be questioned.
for thee after
Scion of
the Purus
It is
meet forsooth
union with
me
to
at that time in the hermitage, after a
solemn pledge
me, that
am
openhearted through good nature, now to

truth you think I
repulse
me
with such words as these.
So be
it.
If in real
am
another's wife and
avaricida
'
stranger'
(a-^- pa7-i
+ ci).
'2
gahida
12.5.
'^
panao 'confidence' (pra + ni).

visasadi
*
*
= vissasadi
'
(vi
+ suas)
cf.
63.
dhamma
48.
vavadesi
pretending' {vi-Yapa-\-dis).
channa "hidden."
'
6 paccaa (= pra^^/af/a). patthara (cf. H. patthar) (pro + .'?<r). ablihasam (= ahhifaiam sometimes written ahhyasam) proximity,' etc.
92
hence your attitude, then
a token
I
will
remove your doubts with
alas
there
is
no ring on
my
finger.
off
Gautami
S'ak
Why,
j-ôur
ring
must have slipped
when you
you
were worshipping the water at Saci's tirtha

:
in
I
Sakravatara.
will
tell
In this indeed Fate shows
its
power
the
another thing.
Cane Bower some water lying in a lotus- leaf cup was resting in your hand Then at that moment my fosterling the fawn came up.
One
day then
in
you coaxed
it
gently that
it
should drink
first.
But
it
would not come to drink the water from your hand, as
you were a stranger.

water
it
Afterwards when I took that very
gained confidence.
Then you langhed and

its
said
" Truly,
everything trusts
kin,
and both
of
you are
forest-born."
Caitiff!
science.
You What
look at
all
this in the light of j'our ovrn con-
other could resemble you airing
the
garb of
?
virtue, but all the while like a
hidden well
in the grass
Verj^ well!
Now am
become a wanton, who through
trust
in this race of Puru sought refuge with a
man
of honey-lips
and a heart
of stone.
S'auraseni.
Extract No.
Act. IV.'
5.
Karpiira-manjari.
The Heroine " Camphor Blossom " has been shut up
in a
is
room
Tlie
in the
Queen's section of the palace, but there
subterranean passage from this room to the palace-garden.
Queen has had the garden end
of this passage closed
up.
Sarangika enters to the King and Jester with a message
from the Queen.
Harvard Oriental
Series,
No
4.
An
oxcellont edition
(if
this play
by
Dr. Sten
Konow
L'S
with Vocabulary, and also a racy translation by Prof.

I
Laninan, with some touches of Western apabltratnsa

Truns. pp
1-285.
Text pp. 102-110.
Sarangika. punjado
{Looking before her)
93
maharao raaragadaKaaligharam anuppavittho. Ta gadua devie vinnavidam*nivedemi. {Approaches) Jaadu jaadu bhattS. Devi vinnavedi jadha saanisamae^ tumhe mae parinaiEsc
'
davva*
Jester
:
tti.
Bhodi
kiin
edam akanda-kumbhanda-padanam
vitthavena'' kadhesu.
King: Sarangie sabbam
Sara: Edam vinnaviadi. Anantaradikkanta-caduddasi-divase'^ kadua Devie pomma-raa-mal Gorl Bheravanandena

paditthavida.^
Aani
ca
dikkha-vihi-ppavitthae
Devie
vinnatto'"
joisaro
guru-dakkhina-nimittam.
Bhanidain
ca tena " Jai avassam dakkhina dadavva, ta esa diadu.""
Tado Devie vinnattam. "Jam adisadi Bhaavam " ti " Atthi ettha Ladadese tena. Puno vi ullavidam
i'^
Candaseno nama
tti.
raa.
Tassa duhida Ghana-sara-manjari

'^
Sa devva-nnaehim
tti.
nidittha jadha esa Cakkavatti-
gharini bhavissadi
Tado sa maharaenaparinedavva,'*
of a seat or
maragada
12.
" emerald-heap" apparently the name

'
an arbour, whence the king watched
Camphor-cluster' on the swing.
anuppavittho {anji+pra+vii).
2 3
Past part. caus. (vi + jna). saamsamae " in the evening."
4 Gerundive of causal {pari + n'i), Ht. " you are to be made to marry by me." 5 akanda 'unexpected' kumbhanda 'white gourd.' 62. Lanman renders " shower of water-melons from a clear sky."
6
J
Causal Passive.
'
On
the fourteenth
day
just past.'
pomma
36
'
made
of rubies.'
8
'
Caus. p. part, {prati+stha).
dikkha
'consecration'
vihi
'observances'
ppavittha
(pra-\-vi.^)
begun.'
10
vinnatto 'consulted'
'
'
= vijiiapto),
'
joisaro 'sorcerer'
lord
of yoga,
dakkhina present,' fee.' " diadu Pass. Imperative

12
let it
be given.'
gharini
'
(ut
+ lap).
'
13
devvanna soothsayer'
Cakkavatti
{daiva-jna), nidittha {ni->rdi8).
wife,
of a
1^
'
Emperor.'
^lust be married.'
94
jenagurussa'
vi
dakkhina dinna bhodi

Ahanica
bhatta
vi
Cakka-
vattr kido bhodi.
Tado devie vihasia bhanidam

ti.
"Jam
pesida.
adisadi
Bhaavain "
vi
vinnavedutu
Guiu-dakkhina
Jester: {Laughing)
dinna.
tarn
sise
Edam
sappo, desantare vejjo
^
!
Idha ajja vivaho, Ladadese Ghanasaramanjari!

King.
Kim
de Bheravanandassa pahavo parokkho
"
Sara: DevIe karidam pamad-ujjanassa* majjha-tthida-vatatarum51e Camunda adanam.^ Bheravanando vi Devie

samain tahim agamissadi.
Tag-gade*' a tak-khana-vihide
(Steps about
kodua-ghare vivaho bhavissadi
and
exit).
King.
ti
Vaassa! savvam edara Bheravanandassa viambhidam''

takkemi.
Jester:
Evam
nedam.*'
Xa hu maa-lanchanam*' antarena
"^
anno mianka-mani-puttaliaip ukkaram va karedi.
pajjharavedi sehalia-kusum-
[Enters the magician Bhairavdnanda],
Bhaira
lam sa vata-taramule nibbhinnassa^' suranga-duva{Stretches out his hand to her raasa pidhanam Camunda.
:
in worship and recites a verse in Mdhdrdstri)

is
" Victorious
na niggacc-
Kah,"
etc.
{Enters
and
sits
down) Ajja
vi
hadi suranga-duvarena Kappura-manjarl.

I
gurussa
90.
dinna
125.
vinnavedum
to inform.
\ejjo=t'a2V/*/o
Proverb.
" Snake on the head, and doctor abroad.'"
61.
^
pahavo, power {pra-hhu), parokkha=paro"A\sa.

'
Pleasure-garden' (pra -^^ mad) raajjha

,
44, tthida
'.\B.
125.
aadanam 'sanctuary' {ayatanam) tahim

,
27.
*
T
tag-gade = Skt. tad-gate, \iod\ia,=kautuka.
viambhidam
nu+idani.
'
exploit, machination' (vi
-^ j
rmbh).
takkemi 45.
I''
moon
'
'
(mrga-l').
'
miankamaiii
cans, {pra
moon-gem,' puttalia
40.
.sohalia
*
statue,' pajjharavedi
,<cphalifc5),
'
'
causes to
ooze
I
-^-kitar)
(=
ukkara
'
inviltitude.'
nibbhinna (nir+bhid), duvSra
door
57.
INTRODUCTION TO
I'RAKRIT.
95
[Enters Karpura-manjari making an opening in the mouth of I he

passage'].
Karpa
Bhaira
Bhaavam panamiimi
:
'
Uidani* varam lahasu.
Idha jjevva uvavisa.

sits
[Karpura-manjari
down].
Bhaira
{Aside) Ajja vi na edi Devi.
[Enter the Queen].
Queen.
lani
[Stepping about and looking in front of her].
Bhaavadi Camunda [Bows.
Then looking round].

?
lani Kappilra-manjarl.
Ta kim iiedam
{To Bhairavd-
nanda) Idaip
vinnavladi,^ nia-bhavane vivaha-samaggini
kadua aada mhi.
Ta genhia*
agamissani.
Bhaira
Vacche evam kariadu.

[The Queen steps round as
if
departing].
Bhaira {Laughing to annesidum gada.

:
himself)
lam
Kappura-manjari-thaiiaiii
{Aloud) Putti Kappura-manjari suranga-duvarena jjeva turida-
padam^ gadua
agantavvara.
sa-tthane cittha.
Devie agamane puno
[Karpuramanjarl does
so].
Queen.
Idamrakkha-gharam'^.
(Enters, looks
around aside).
sariraiii
Ae, iam Kappura-manjari!

{Aloud)
Sa ka
vi
sarikkha^ dittha.
?
Vacche Kappura-manjari kidisam*' de
ipra + nam).
:=ucitam.
lahasu
116, note
ii
(?a6/i).
uvavisa {upa + vis).
vinnavladi Caus. Pass.
{vi-\-jna).
niabhavane 'in (my) own house."

'
genhia Gerund of genhadi (grah), vaccha

to search.'
girl'
(=vatsa)
cf.
H. baca =
vataako.
6
'
'
at a quick pace
20.
'
75.
gadua
122.
sa-tthane
'
in your
own room
'
cf.
7 8
= raksa-grham.
sarikkha
'
like
70.
'
66, 40.
kidisam
96
(In
tti.
the.
air)
Kini bhanasi
maha
siro-veana
'
(To
herselfj
Ta puno
tahiin gamissam.
samuppanna {Enters and

"^
looks to every side)
Hala sahio vivahovaaranaini

{Steps about).
sits
lahuni
genhia aacchadha.
[Karpuramafijarl enters and
down
just
as before].
Queen.
{Looking before her)

:
lam Kappura-manjari
?
Bhaira
Vacche Vibbhamalehe anidaim^ vivahovaaranaim
Queen: Adha im!

aharanaim*
Krm una
Ghana-sara-manjari-sarauidaini
visumaridaiTii.
Ta puno
gamissaip.
Bhaira
Evani bhodu.
[Queen acts in pantomime as
if
making an
exit],
Bhaira
Putti Kappura-manjari tain jeva karladu.^
[Exit Karpura-manjai'i]
Queen
{Pretends
!
to
enter
the
prison-room
seeing
Karpura-
manjari) Sarikkhidae vinadida'' Ae mhi. [Aside) Jhanavimanena nivviggham parisappina tarn anedi joisaro. {Alo^ld) Sahio jam jaiii nivedidara tarn genhia aachadha.
{Pretends
to
return to
Camunda' s
Maharao
shrine
and
sees
Karpura-
manjari)
Abo sarikkhada
vi
Bhaira: Devi uvavisa.

S'auraseni.
aado jjeva vattadi.

6.
Extract No.
Act
Karpiira manjari.
II. (pp. 40.
41 and 245-6).
Specimen
of decadent
punning
style
The Vidusaka describes
his master's love-fever.
'
siro-veana
'
headache.'
*
^
iivaarana
(a-ni).
upakarana
S 17.
lahuni 'quickly' {=laghu).
*
^ 8
aharana
'
ornament,' visumaridn
forgotten,'
of.
sumaradi
57.
Imperat. Pass.
vinadida " puzzled
"
(nad a Pkt. root).
jhSna
'
meditatioD. magic
'
'without hmdrance' 31). vattadi 45. In such redundant verbs " to be " we have the beginnings of the aado vattadi of. a gaya hai, dinna bhodi later system of auxiliary verbs, cf. divT hai, kido bhodi cf. kivii hai.
5 44.
niv-viggham
less
more or
97
Esc piavaasso hamso via mukkamanaso,' kari via maakkliamo,^
munaladando ^ via ghanaghammamilano,* dinadinna-
divo* via vialidacchao,*' pabhada-punnima-cando via panduraparikkhino citthadi.

S'auraseni.
Little Clay Cart.
Extract No,
Act
6.
7.
[Edition Hiranand and Parab.
Bom-
bay 1902].
Vasantasena and a maid.

ajja vi ajjaa'' na vivujjhadi.
Maid: Kadham
Bhodu. Pavisia
padibodhaiasain.
{Steps around).
[Enter VasantasenM wrapped
up and
sleepy].
Maid: Utthedu''
iitthedu Ajjaa!
Pabliadam samvuttam.
jjeva
Vasa
{Waking)
Kadham
ratti
pabhadam samvuttam
Maid
Vasa
Amhanara
Hanje,'*'
eso pabhado.
Ajjaae una ratti jjeva.

jildiaro
?
kahim una tumhanam
Maid:
Ajjae,
Vaddhamanaam samadisia pupphakarandaam

?
"
jinnujjanam gado ajja Carudatto.
Vasa
Kim
samadisia
''
Maid:
Joehi
'
rattie
pavahanam, Vasantasena gacchadu

'
tti.
(a)
(o)
out of
spirits,' (6)
having
left
(Lake) Manasa.'
'
'
thin with love-fever' {ksama), (b)

60.
thin as an elephant with rut.'
munala
'
* (a)
languishing from violent ardour,'
{b)
'
wilted in the intense heat.'
uiilana
&
'
57.
a lamp given in day-time.'

in daylight."
Note the
chaa
'
alliteration
"
like a
lamp that
is lit
<>
vialida 'vanished' (iH+gal).
(a)
colour,
'
b) light.
J
s
Ajjaa
'
my
'
Lady.'
vivujjhadi
'
awakes
(vi
+ budh).
'
utthedu
'
let
her get up
(ut+stha).
Pabhadam
?
'
morning.'
is
What,
it's
night,
how
of
is it
is
morning
Sarnvuttarn
Neuter.
In
the next sentence pabhado

10
masculine.
Hanje regular form

'
address by a lady to
her maid.
Judiaro
gambler
11
(dyutakaro).
38.
puppha
joehi
'
karandaa
'
basket,' jinna
old
'
(jf),
ujjana
'
garden.'
12 is
harness' imperat. caus. (yuj).
rattie as in the edition
quoted
impossible.
Bombay
edn. radio.
98
INTRODUCTION TO TRAKRIT.
:
Vasa
Hanje,
kahiiii
mae gantavvara
Maid:
Ajjae, jahim Carudatto.

'
Vasa: (Embracing the maid) Sutthu na uijjhaido rattle. Ti"* ajja paccakkham^ pekkliissam. Hanje, kini pavittha
aharn iha abbhantara-cadus-salaaip
?
Maid
Vasa
Na kevalam abbhantara-cadus-salaam.
Avi samtappadi
Samtappissadi.
Savvajaiiassa
vi hiaara pavittha.
:
'
Oarudattassa pariano.
Maid
Vasa
Kada ?
ajjaa gamissadi.
(Persuasively)
Maid Jado
:
Vasa
Tado mae padhamam samtappidavvam.

yenha edam raanavalim.'
!
Haiije,
Mama
bahiniae^
ajjfi
Dhudae gadua samappehi
Bhaiiidavvam ca
'Aha.ni Siripi.
Carudattassa gunanijjida dasi,
tada tumhanain
Ta
esa tuha jjeva kanthaharanam hodu raanavall.'
Maid
Vasa
:
Ajjae, kuppissadi^ Carudatto ajjae dava.
Gaccha.
:
Na
kuppissadi.
Dliiida 'ajjaiittena
Maid
(Taking
the necklace)
Jam
anavedi.
{Exit
and
re-enter)
pasil-
Ajjae, bhanadi ajja

dlkida.''
tumhanam
Na juttam mama
aharana-viseso
[Enter
tti
edani
genhidum.
Ajjauttf
jjeva
mama
janadu bhodl.'
ôith
Radanika
"*
a child].
Rada
I
Ehi vaccha, saadiae
kilamha.
=nidhyato.
pratyakmrn.
'
cadus-salaam
'
having four
halls.'
Is in distress.'
'
*
f>
raana
jewel
'
'
51.
Saur. has also radann.

[nam-i-r).
bahinia
sister.'
'
samappehi imperat. caus.

be angry.'
i.e.
J s
kuppissadi
*
will
presented
'
it
to you,'
the necklace.
saadia
toycart'
(rfafcattfca).
kilamha
'
let
us play
'
22,
1(>.
Child
:
99
edae
(Mournfully)
?
Radanie
Kim mama
mattaa
saadiae
Tarn jjeva sovanna-saadiam dehi.
Rada
(Sighing despondently) Jada,
kudo amhanani suvanriddhie''^
navavaharo.
kllissadi.
Tadassa puno
vi
suvanna-saadiae
Ta java vinodemi' nam.
Ajjaa Vasantasenaae
samivam uvasappissam.*
(Approaches) Ajjae panamami.

^
Vasa
Radanie, saadam de.

sariro vi
amkida
Kassa una aani darao ? Analcandamuho anandedi mama hiaara.
Rada
Vasa:
Eso kkhu ajja-Carudattassa putto Rohaseno nama.

(Stretching out her arms)
lap)
Ehi
me
puttaa alinga.
(Sets
him on her
Anukidara anena piduno^ riivam.

riivam, silam pi takkemi.
Rada: Xa kevalam
Edina
ajja-
Carudatto attanaam vinodedi.
Vasa
Adha kim nimittam

Tena a
eso
roadi.''
Rada: Edina
kilidam.
padivesia-gahavai-daraa-keriae^ suvanna-saadiae
sa nida.
*"
Tado una tarn maggantassa mae iam mattiasaadia kadua dinna. Tado bhanadi " Ra danie, kim mama edae mattia-saadiae. Tam jjeva sovannasaadiara dehi " tti.
:
Vasa
Haddhl haddhl.
Aam
pi
nama
para-sarapattie samta-
ppadi.
Bhaavam Kaanta"'
earth' 55
(cf.
pokkhara-vatta-padida-jala-
'
mattia
'
H.
mitti).
:
is
supposed to speak Magadhi

^
^
Rohasena the son of Carudatta but the text here gives him ordinary
Saiu-aseni.
viddhi=rddhi
(upa+srp).
'
58.
Caus. imperat. (vi + nud).
*
s
boy.'
97.
6
7
8
piduiô
roadi
'
weeps,'
cf.
roda, rodasi further down, and rodissam.

{
padivesia 'neighbour,' gahavai

in
= grhapati),
keria, belonging to.
Hence the Genitive

1*
kerau
raagganta Pres. Part, of
Chand Bardai's Old Hindi). maggadi demands,' vSkt. margati (H. malig(in
'
na).
'0
Kaanta
'
Fate.'
pokkhara
38,
71,
'
vatta
'
leaf.
100
bindu-sarisehim kilasi
fully)
tumam
'
purisa-bhaadheehim.
kilissasi.
{Tear-
Jada,
ma
,
roda
?
sovaana-saadiae
Child
Radanie ka esa
Vasa
Piduno de guna-nijjida
dasl.
Rada: Jada,
Child
:
ajjaa de janani bhodi.
Radanie, aliam'^
tumam
?
bhanasi.
Jai
amhanain ajjaa
janani, ta kisa alamkida
Vasa
muddhena muhena adikarunam mantesi. {Putting off her jewels and weeping) Esa danim de janani samvutta. Ta genha edam alamkaraani. Sovanna-saad:
Jada,
iam ghadavehi.'"
Child: Avehi.
Na
genhissara.
Rodasi
'
tumam.
Gaccha
karehi
Vasa: {Wiping away

kila.
her tears) Jada,

clay-cart
na rodissam.
jewelry)
{Fills
the
with
Jada,
sovannasaadiam.
[Exit Radanika with the child].
There
is
an excellent translation
of this play in the
Harvard
Oriental Series, Vol. 9, Dr. A.
W.
R5-der.
S'auraseni.
Extract No.
8.
Two
of the Jesters'
speeches in the Little Clay Cart to
illustrate the use of long
compounds.
:
(Act
4, p. 114).
maid
sai/s
to
the Jester
Pekkhadu
ajjo
amha-keraani
geha-duaram.
The
Jester looks
and says with admiration
Alio salila-sitta-
majjida-kida-haridovalevanassa*
ra-citta-lihida>bhilmi-bhaassa^
roadi 'weeps,'
viviha-suandhi-kusumovaha-
gaana-talaaloana-koduhala-dur-
'
cf.
roda, rodasi further down, and rodissarn.
^
^
aliam
67.
Cans, from v^'Cât fashion,

sitta 'sprinkled' {sic),
'
mako
(cf.
H. gharnS ghapana).
majjida 'swept' {mrj). harida 'green,' uvalip).
levana
6
smearing
'
(with cowdung) (upa +
suandhi
'fragrant.'
uvahara 'oblation-scattering,'
citta-lihida
lit.,
picture painted.'
hhRa=bhaga.
unnamida-sisassa
'
KH
dolaamantvalambid-Eravana hattha-bbhasamucchida-danti-dantapavana-bal'
maida-mallia-dama-gunalamkidassa ^
toranavabhasidassa''
maha-raanovaraovasohina
'
andolanalalanta-cancal '-aggahatthena
ido ehi
tti
vaharan
torana-
tena
via
mam
sohagga-pataa-nivahenovasohidassa*
dharana-tthambha-vedia-nikkhitta - samullasanta- harida- cuda-
pallava-lalama-phatiha-mangala- kalasabhiramohaa
pasassa
''
mahasura-vakkha-tthala-dubbhejja-vajja-nirantara-padibaddhakanaa-kavadassa''
duggada-jana-manorahaasa-karassa'^
'* !
Va-
santasena-bhavana-duarassa sassiriada
tthassa vi janassa baladitthim aaredi.''
1
Jam saccam
majjha-
gaana='sky,' tala + a(v)aloana, unnamida 'raised

avalambida
'
high,' sisa 'head,
top.'
^
hanging
'
bbhamaida.
Rather
Comm.
it is
gives
bhramdgata.
'
This should be
of.
S.
-bbhamaada.
bbhama(v)ida
agitated.'
rodavida, 'made to weep' in this play,
mallia-dama-guna 'festoons
of jasmine.'
3 *
'
'
Shining with an elevated portal of ivory.'

'
uvasohida
made
'
brilliant
'
nivahena
'
'
by a
niultitude
'
of
auspicious' pataa
{vi
flags,'
vaharantena,
'
calling' [Pres. part,

'
sohagga from vaha'
radi
+ a + hr)], uvasohina
brilliant
'
with uvaraa
'
colouring
of
mahay
raana 'precious jewels' or {maharajana)

the andolana
5
safflower,'
agga-hatthena
'with finger' cancala 'quivering' alalanta, 'waving to and fro' with

'
swing,' from the bala

its
force
'
of the
pavana wind.'
'
'Having both (uhaa)
sides
(pasa,
44)
charming (abhirama)
with auspicious pitchers (mahgala-kalaSa) made of crystal (phatiha 19, phadiha or phaliha would be better vide Pischel, 206) placed (nikkhitta) on the
(vediS) of the columns (tthambha) altar or balcony supporting (dharana) the gateway (torana), and brilliant (samullasanta)
' '
'
'
with head-ornaments
pSkllava).'
6
'
(lalama)
of
green inango shoots
(harida-ciida-
[passa
is
impossible.]
With golden door-panels (kanaa-kavada)

the breast-expanse (vakkha-tthala) of
studded
(padibaddha)
closely (nirantara) with impervious (dubbhejja) [dur -vhhid']

like
T
8
'
adamant (vajja) a mighty demon (mahasura).

'
Which causes (kara) trouble (aasa) to poor people {d\\g-g&da,=durgata).

sas8iriad5=sa^rJA;a<a
'
beauty, loveliness,'
cf.
-ss-
as
if
the svarahhahti
vowel had not been used.

y
sakkunodi=:saA;no<i.
'
Edition has
'
baladditthitn
is
which
is
impossible,
bala
is
found
'
in
M., perhaps balado

different.'
better 6aur. aaredi causal {a
+ hr), majjhattha.
in-
102
The maid says: Edu edu.

pavisadu
ajjo.
Imam padhamain paottham

about:
'
The
Jester
enters
and
looks
Hi
lii
bho
Idho
vi
padhamo
paotthe
sasi-sankha-munala-sacchahao'^
vinihida-
('unna-mutthi-pandurao'
viviha-raana-padibaddha-kancana-so-
vana *-sohidao pasada-pantio^ olarabida-mutta-damehim phatilia-vadaana^ -muhacandehini nijihaantl' via Ujjainaiii.

tic* via
Sot-
suhovavittho niddSadi dovario.

balira
Sadahina*' kamalo-
danena palohida na bhakkanti vaasa

Adisadu bhodi.
sudha-savannadae.
sentence of such enormous length as this "

!
Aho
Va-
santasena-bhavana-duarassa sassiriada
late into English.
Dr.
"
is
difficult to trans-
Ryder breaks
is
sentences, of which the eighth
" Yes
9.
it
up into nine separate

Vasantasena's house-
door
is
a beautiful thing."
(H. 0. S. vol. 9, p. 67).
Extract No.
Maharastri.
Verse
2.
Hala's Sattasai.
Amiam
paiia-kavvaip
padhium soum a je na ananti Kamassa tatta-tantim kunanti, te kaha na lajjanti ?

'
paottham courtyard' (=:prakostham). 'Ha\nng the same hue as' (sa-cchahao

'
cf.
M. chaha 'shadow,' but

*chakha from
M.6. chaa, 'beauty.'
Pischel (255) derives chaha from

'
*chayakha from *chai/aka)

'
mutthi
'
moon, conch, or lotus-stalks.' handful,' cunna 'lime.' (Apa. eunnau H. cuna.)

35.
sovana
'
'
stairs,' 17.
'
rows of palaces,'
''
'window' "where the wind comes in"

"]
{vaidi/ana).
[The English
word means " wind-eye

?
"*
nijjhnanti
'
look at' (nir+dhi/ai).
sntt\o=)(rotriyo.
niddaati
-'slumbers"
(H.
nid),
duvario
door-
keeper.'
t*
sa-dahina
rice.'
hni
instr.
'with sour milk' (dadhi
cf.
H. dahi). kamala 'au-
tumn
[Rdn.
palohida (pm-ijt6/i), bhakkanti 'eat' {hhaks). vaasa 'crows.'

is
rayana which
Sanskrit not Saurasenil.
INTEODXJCTION TO PRAKRIT.
103
Amia = amrto.
hium,
'
paiia Saur. paiida,
12.
kavvain50.
ananti,
pad-
to read,*
H. parh.
This
soujp
is
"to
liear."
131.
tatta-tantim.
it
the reading in
'know' the Kavyamala,
which represents
in
by
tittva-cintdm in the Sanskrit version,
accordance with Gangadhara Bhatta's commentary, which

vd.
adds however tantravdrtam
Weber
(1870) finding the read-
ing tamttatarnttim conjectured tantratantrim.
In his edition
tattatattira
(1881) he read on the authority of other

(
MSS.
= taptim).
We may
translate
it
either' practise the mysof love,'
teries of love,' or 'take

i.e.
thought on the principles
on the principles
'
laid
down
in
the KamaSastra.
kaha =
kaham,
Verse
3.
how.'
Satta saaijp
'
kai-vacchalena koclia majjhaarammi
Halena
'
vira'iaim
salankarana gahanamn
from among a
K.a,i
The Seven Centuries of embellished verses were arranged crore by Hala devoted to the poets."
= kavi,
vacchala,
95,
i.
39.
'devoted to poets.'
kodia,
'
of
a crore,'
majjhaara JM. majjhayara de-H word for
madhya
Verse
4.
ua niccala-nipphamda'^
bhisini-vattammi^ rehai balaa*
nimmala-maragaa-bhaana-paritthia^ samkhasutti
wall
form from the
ua
vedic
'
Lo
! '
Weber explained
'
as a shortened
y/uh,
mark, observe.'
'
'
Pischel conjectured a
bhisi ni
*û'p
whence oppam, seen

Pali
rare, of a surd
of.
in Trivikrama.
for bisa.
= bisini, S. bisini.
is
and AMg. have bhisa
.Aspiration of a sonant
rehai,
'
commoner,
6.
vattammi = pdtre,
of
shines
Vedic rebhati, 'crackles,'

aatpkhasutti,
etc., rebhdyaii, 'shines.'
bhaana,
verse
is
platter.'
'mother
pearl.'
This
'
BuVI.
sataim, ivrong.
2 ^ *
5
KM.
nippanda.
pph
is
commoner.
of
patammi.
W. valaa following majority KM. -tthida, wrong.
MSS-
104
jjoetics to
quoted by the Kavyaprakaâ and other works on

illustrate
vyangya
the suggestive.
" Lo there gleams a crane quite motionless on a lotus leaf, like mother of pearl at the edge of a platter of pure emerald."
Verse
8.
atta! taha ramanijjam
amham gamassa mandam-huam

'
lua-tila-vadi-sariccham
sisirena
kaam
bhisinl-sandam
ii
atta
cf.
attia in Mrcch. (p, 110)
Commentators "mother-inin
law." Apparently used to any elder lady

mother, elder-sister,
'
the household,
for luna) vadi.
etc.
cf.
lua,
'cut'
*luta
garden
''
'
= vatt).
H. bara
{vata + ka-).
Oh mother!
so the mass of lotuses that was so dehghtful

of our
village, the
and the ornament
cold has
made
like a
garden of cut sesamum."
Thus the lady gives a hint

meaning the pandits
differed.
to a lover.
As to her
precise
Some
said the lotus-tank
was
to replace the sesamum garden as a meeting place, as people
frost-bitten lotuses
would be going and coming to harvest the sesamum. The would be deserted. Another view was.
that neither place was suitable.
Verse
13.
andhana-kamma-niunie
ma
jhurasu, ratta-pad^'la-suandham
muha-maruam pianto dhumai sihl, na pajjalai

jhurasu,
II
"Skilled in the work of destruction,"

'
i.e.
'
in love's magic,
be angry,' ^/jvar or jur,
'
get hot
(because the
fire
does not burn),
becomes
-aa-, so
dhumsbi = dhumdyate. The denominative -a?/asido,\aa,di = iitaldyati Mg. ciUia d'\ = cirdyati
,
S'.
this -aa- often
contracts
to
-a-
in M., etc. pajjalai
'
blazes
'
{pra^jval).
While the
as red
fire
can drink in the breath of thy he

will
mouth, fragrant
piltalas
only smoke and not
burst into flame, for then thou wouldst blow no more.
KM.
alimani, wrong.
Verse
16.
10^
amaa-maa gaana-sehara
raani-muha-tilaa canda de chivasu
chitto jehi
i
piaamo
pi
mamam
said to
tehim cia karehira
II
Addressed to the moon,
amaamaa
cia
consisting of amrit.
'
de
= ê.
'
chivasu
imperat. of chivai,
touch
via)
'
{^ksif).
chitto p. p. p. of the same,

particle
(KM. reads
a restrictive
with these very hands.'
Verse 42.
arambhantassa dhuam
Lacchi
Maranam va
hoi purisassa
tam Maranam anarambhe

vi hoi,
Lacchi una na hoi
ii
dhuam,
Verse 49.
'
certainly' {dhruvam).
Lacclii =Lafesmi.
thoam
pi
na
nisarei
i
majjhanhe ua sarira-tala-lukka
aava-bhaena chahi
vi, ta
pahia kira na visamasi
ii
thoaiu,
'
a
'
little
'
{stokam).
nisarei for nisarai
= nihsaraU)
'
:
majjhanha,
-lukka
'
mid-day,' 52.
ua see
v. 4.
sticking to,' as explained in Skt. by
Una
torn loose
or torn out'
=*lukna connected with ^/lunc

(dtapa).
(Pischel, 466).
aava 'heat'
chahi 'shadow,' not derived directly
from chdya, but from ^chaydki
^*chayakhi
to
(aspiration,
19).
*chaahi
contracts
{vi
chahi.
(Pischel,
255).
cf.
pahia
'traveller.'
visamasi
+ &ram).
8.
For short vowel

etc., so
forms from
^kram
nikkamai,
etc., 8.
adikkamasi,
from
iram M. JM. visamai,

from the bodj^
heat
visama, pass, visamiadu.
At midday the shadow does not move out, even a little way or but clings to the body from fear of the
so traveller stay by me.

nisarai.
niti
KM.
Weber
rejected this as against the metre.
Later he
adopted
ima.
106
Verse 76.
na
vi
taha viesa-vaso
janei
doggaccam maha
asaTpsiattha- vi muho
santavam
jaha panaiano niattanto

viesa
II
'abroad'
(videka).
doggaccam
'poverty'
{dauryaasani-
(yam).
vimuho
(d
'indifferent to, without a thought of.'
sia 'desired'
+ mms).
'
panai
'
'beloved' {pranayi), -ano
jano.
niattanto
returning
(m + vrt).
Verse 81.
addamsanena pemnaam avei, aidamsanena vi

pisuna-jana-jampiena
avei
,
avei
'
vi
emea
vi
'
ave
i ii
'
Out
of sight, out of
tempt.'
a.vei=apeti.
mind and emea = evawieca
'
familiarity breeds con(Pischel, 149).
Verse 94.
suano jam desam alam-karei, tarn cia karei
pavasanto
gamasann' ummulia-maha-vada-tthana-sariccha
nj
ii
pavasanto (pra +
up.'
vas).
is
vada
'
fig-tree
'
{vata).
ummilia
'
roote
The rendezvous
cancelled.
Verse 107.
f
Gola-ada-tthiam pecchiiina
gaha-vai-suarp halia-sonha
i
= KM. ii.7).
adhatta uttarium
dukh'uttarae paav
le
ii
Gola = Godavari, ada

vai
(
'
bank
'
'
(tola),
-suam the son

'
'
of
gaha.
= grhapati).
'
sonha
daughter-in-law,' for
cf.
commoner sunha
adhatta
contracted from *sunuha,

'
Paiâci aunusa
= 57iusa.
she began
adhatta).
+ dhd. caus. fidhavai with pass, adhappai p.p. paavie by a path.' halia ploughman.'
{d
' *
She wishes to see

Verse 115.
(
if
he
will help her.
savvattha disa-muha-pasariehi
15
)
=KM.
ii.
challini
annonna kadaa-laQ;gehiini va muai' Vimjho

mehehi visamghadantehini
INTRODXJCTION TO PRAKRIT.
challim
(iaa
'
107
'cloud.'
ka-
'
mantle, skin.'
rauai (v/wwc).
vi +
meha
'
slope,' etc. {kataka).

of the rains.
sam + qhat
dispersing.'
The end
Verse 128.
{
mahu-masa-maruahaaranne
gai virah'akkharavaddha-
= KM. ii. 28). -mahuara-jhamkara-nibbhare

-pahia-raana-mohanam govi
In a forest
full of
II
the buzzing of bees carried
by the
vernal
to
zephyr there sings of love in absence

traveller's heart, the
maddening
the
maiden with the
kine.
Verse 171.
(
Gola-nale kacche
= KM.ii. 71).
cakkhanto
raiai
pattaim
upphadai makkado khokkei

a pottham a pittei
'
î
On
the
bank
of the
Gola
river,' of.
cf.
107 above,
cakkhanto
raia
pres. p.
cakkhai jaksati devours,

rai.
Marathi v^cakh.
(markata).
'mustard,' rdjika H.
dai
makkado 'ape'
cf.
uppha'
KM. gives -utpatati which should = uppadai.

phudai phidai.
?
Weber suggests
'
v/sphat related to sphut,

deSi
pittei v^lDind,
khokkhei
snarls
word,
pottham 'belly'
den.
-prostJiam
'bench or
connection
stool.'
'crams'
Weber
suggests
with
"On
belly."
the bank of the Goja river, devouring the leaves of
black mustard, there leaps the monkey, snarls and stuffs his
Maharastri.
Extract No.
10.
Verses from S'akuntala.

(a)
Spring song in Prologue.
bhamarehim suumara-kesara-sihaim odamsaanti daamana pamadao sirisakusumaim

Islsi-cumbiaim
^
^
ii
isisi =:l.iadl>ât.
'^
{ava
-^
tarns).
108
{b)
INTRODLCTION TO PRAKRIT.
Grief at S'akuntala's departure.
Ullalia-dabbhakavala maipariccatta-naccana'^mora
'
osaria-pandu-vatta
(c)
'^
muanti atpsuim va*
laaoll
Act
III.
Sakuntala reads the verse she
lias
composed
at her friend's bidding.
Tujjha na ane hiaam,

rattiin
mama
una niaano diva a
ca
nikkiva dabai baliam tuha hutta-manorahai angainiii
na ane
'
do not know,'
of.
No.
9, verse 1.
Williams reads kamo.

gives tapayati.
nikkiva 'cruel' niskrpa.
maano Monierdabai comm.
Pischel (p. 154) says, not exactly tapayati but
Marathi dabne, Gujarati dabavu, Urdu dabna to press, compress.
(M.W.
tabei,
i.e.
'
ta,vei
= tapayati).
baliain
(hallyah).
hutta
'facing'
Comm.
abhimukha.'
Derivation
uncertain.
With numerals M. huttaip AMg. khutta = krtvah.
M.W.
reads
vutta = 'yr^to. -ai gen. sing. " Thy heart I know not, cruel one, but day and night does
Love grievously
thee."
(d)
afflict
my
limbs, whose desires are fixed on
Act V.
Hamsapadika
is
overheard singing.
Ahinava-mahu-loluvo
tumam
taha paricumbia ciia-mailjarini

4
kamala-vasai-metta-nivvuo
mahuara
loluvo
'
visario
'si
nam kaham
has
vrt),
'greedy,'
Bengal
version
(nir
loha-bhavio.
cua
mango.'
'
metta
69.
nivvuo
H.
M.W.
is
reads nivvudo
an explanation,
-kavala
'
Ullalia,
deH word
'
(cf.
iiltna, ulalna).
(Pischel'.s edn.
iidgalita
,
hence the Pkt. reading uggaHa.

ful.'
p. 191.)
mouthBoeht-
mai doe
'
as-
in Pischol's edn.
'
Devanagari MSS. have miio.
lingk conjectured raia

'^
deer.'
of.
cca.tta.^tyak(a.
'
naccana,
vatta
H. nScna.
mora
peacocks.' Pischel
morl
*
a peahen.'
'
osaria (ava+sr).
Pischel, Bengali
loaf.'
muanti (muc).
version reads
angaim
'
va.
DevanSgari MSS. have

assuim) via ladsu
suits
"
jissuni via.
is
Boehtlingk conjectured amsu-.
assiini (for
oaur. not
naetre
Maha. and meaning,
The reading above amsuiin va laao

amsu,
40, G4.
dialect,
aa.
12.
INTRODUCTION TO PRAKIUT.
which
is
109
Saur.
mahuara
'
bee.'
visario
bj'
'
forgotten.'
iii.
M.W. has
by which
visaria,
vimharido.
He
supports this
Vararuci
is
32,
vimhaa,
visaria.
etc., cf. 47.

S'.
But
-ido
not M.
M. has
sumarida
cf.
(JS. visarida,
JM.
vissariya,
part,
is
dialectic
vimharia),
Hindi bisarna.
The past
active
in
meaning.
(6)
Act VI.
Arihasi
(MW. p. 230, P. p 120). me cuahkura dinno Kamassa
gahiacavassa
saccavia-juai-lakkho paiicabbhahio saro
houm.
gahia = Saur. gahida, cava 'bow.'

ssbccava,!
saccavia, past part, of

juai
= satydpayati
pa>nca,
'make
'
true, verify, contract.'
yuvati.
+ abhy-adhika.
houm
"
;
'
to be.'
M.W.
differs, for
si
arihasi houip he has hohi " Thou art offered by me
be,'
and begins with turn
mae
to
for saccavia the easier pahia-
jana,
'
cf.
Megh.
8.
pathika-vanitdh.
Oh
mango-sprout, given by
me
to
Kama
grasping his bow,
do thou become the best arrow

maidens as thy mark."
of his five,
with contracted
Maharastri.
Extract No.
11.
Mrcchakatikam.
(a)
(Verse 19).
Vicalai neurajualam, chijjanti a mehala mani-kkhaia
valaa a sundaraara raanankura-jala-padibaddha.
neura, regular Pkt. for Skt. nupura; from a form *nepura

cf.
keyura,
(khac).
Pkt.
keiira.
(P. 126).
chijjanti,
pass.
(chid).
k\xdbidi
sundaraara =Saur. sundaradara.
raana51.
(6)
Act
II.
Karnapiiraka (verse
20).
Ahaniilna sarosam tam hatthim Viipjha-sela-siharabham
moavio mae so dantantara-samthio parivvajao.

ahaniiina gerund (a -i-^w).
edition reads " saila "
gr.
Virajha, 35.
is
sela
= iat7a
[H. P.
which
part,
not Prakrit, vide

(muc).
thio
Pischel,
38.
60].
moavio past
causal
pa-
rivvajao 'mendicant.'
110
(c)
INTRODUCTION TO l^RAKRIT.
Act IV (verse
mother.
sihu-surasava-mattia
30).
The Vidusaka mocks
at Vasantasena's
eavattham gaa
jai
hi attia,
marai ettha attia,

hoi siala-sahassa-pajjattia.
sihu
'rum'
{sldhu).
sura
'
wine, etc'
asava
'
intoxicating
'
drink
made from uncooked
vegetables and water,'
toddy.'
eavattham = eâ + auas^âm. attia 'mother,' vide M.W. Die. sub atta, apparently a non-aryan word, pajjattia sufficiency
'
'
{parydptikd).
" She would
make
good meal
for a
thousand
jackals."
Texts read gada and bhodi, these are Saur. forms.
Maharastri.
Extract No.
12.
Karpuramaiijari.
(a)
Act
11.
Verse
10.
nisasa hara-latthi-sarisa-pasarana candan-uccodakari,
cando dehassa daho, sumarana-sarana hasa-soha

anganain pandu-bhavo diaha-sasi-kala-koraalo
;
muhammi
kiiii
ca
tie
niccani baha-ppavaha tuha, suhaa, kae honti kullahi tuUa.

['* eslatthi a lathi, also a necklace string nisasa sigh.' cape Hke pearls from off their string " Lanman.] uccoda' wither'
ing.'
cut
meaning not certain

small.'
cut is said to
'
mean
'
'
'
split off'
or
'
grow
Perhaps the sandal

of the sighs,
throws out
fragrance
owing to the moist heat

na-sarana " has
fi\iha,a.
cando
tulla
fierce.'
sumaratiiee."
memory
kulla
'
as its refuge."
river-canal.'
tuha kae 'for

'
= subhaga.
equal
to.'
bJiha
(vide p. 84).
(6)
The Jester's rejoinder. (Verse 11.) Param j6nha nnha, garalasariso candana-raso,
kliaa-kkharo hilro, raani-pavana deha-tavana,
raunair banali,
jalai'
a jala-dda tanu-laa
varittha
jam dittha kamala-vaana sa su-naana.
jonha 'moonlight.'
wound.'
unha 47.
^5am.
garala
'poison.'
jalai
'
khaa
'
khara
'
alkali,'
-tavanil (top),
blazes.
INTROnUCTION TO PRAKIUT.
jala-dda 'running with water.'
varittha
'
Ill
tanu-laa 'body-creeper,' 12.
the choicest maid.'
Note the internal rhymes.

(c)
Verse
25.
vi
Nisagga-cangassa
manusassasohasamummilaibhiisanehirn
hiraehim vihGsane laggai ka vi lacchi.
manina jaccana
vi
nisagga 'nature'
jabi
(ni + srj).
caiiga
" liandsome,"
cf.
Pan-
canga
'
good.'
manlua
for
manlnani, gen plur.
jaccana,
gen. plur. 'genuine' (jdtya).

{d)
lacehi laksml.
Describes the swinging of the Heroine.
(Verse 32.)
Rananta-mani-neuram jhana-jhananta-hara-cchadam
kanakkania-kinkini-muhala-mehala-dambaram
vilola-valaavali-jania-manju-sinja-ravam
na kassa mana-mohanara sasi-muhia hindolanani.

ran to
'
tinkle.'
'
jhanajhan
'
'
to jingle.'
chada mass-lustre.'
'
kana-kkan
to ring
(kvan).
kinkini 'bell.'
sinja
muhala 'noisy'
'jingle.'
sasi
26 mukhara.
dambara
'
'mass-noise.'
-muhi 'moon-faced maiden.'

as " a
(e)
'
Lanman
describes
this stanza
p. 255.
tour de force
in the use of imitative
words,"
Even the
Jester waxes eloquent,
and describes the swing:
ing in eight verses concluding
(Verse 40),
la eai vilas-ujjalaim dola-pavanca-cariaini
kassa na lihai va citte niuno kandappa-cittaaro

ia
*
thus
'
related to
citta
iti.
'
eai
= Saur.
edaim,
'
pavafica
'
dis-
play,' prapanca.
(/)
heart.'
citta-aro
picture- maker.'
Act
III, Verse 2.
Maragaa-mani-guttha hara-latthi vva tara

bhamara-kavalianta malal-malia vva
rahasa-valia-kantham
tia ditthi varitthi
i
savana-paha-nivittha
manasam me
tara
bright.'
pavitthaii
guttha
sucked.' round.'
'strung'
(gumph).
kavalia
'eaten,
anta 'end.'
rahasa 'impetuously.'
{iru). pskha,
valia 'turned
savana'ear'
= patha.
112
(g)
Verse 31.
The Heroine's
cotuposifcion.
Mandale sasaharassa gorle danta-panjara-vilasa-corae

bhai lanchana-mao phurautao keli-koila-tulam dharantao.
sasa-hara
'
hare-bearer
in
= moon."
all
danta 'ivory.'
bhai
'is
bright'
["appears
its
beauty"],
-mao 'antelope.'
phurantao 'manifest' (sphur.)

(h)
-tulam 'likeness.'
Act IV, Conclusion.
" Bharata-vdkyam.'^
Anudiahain viphuranto manlsi-jana-saala-guna -vinasa-aro

rittattana-davaggi viramau kamala-katakkha-varisena.
manisi
'
clever, learned.'
fire.'
rittattana 'emptiness
Poverty.'
'
davaggi 'forest
glances.'
Kamala = Laksm!.
katakkha side-long
varisa 'rain' 57.
Maharastri.
Extract No.
13.
Ratnavali (a) Act I.
Madanika sings. Kusumauha-piya-duao maiilaia-bahu-cuao

viraha-vivaddhia-soao kankhia pia-ana-melao
sidhilia-mana-ggahanao vaai dahina-pavanao.
padivalanasamatthao tammai juvai-satthao.

iha
paccha
vaai
'
padhamam mahumaso janassa liiaaim kunai mauaim vijjhai kamo laddha-ppasarehim kusuma-banehim.
blows.'
dahina
'
south,'
dakkhina becomes *dakbina

13.
by lengthening the vowel, hence dahina by
Cf.
'
Deccan'
kunai
and H. ddhinii
valana
(pal),
riuht.
kankhia 'longed
'
for.'
pia-ana 'lovers,'
'
asamatthao
unable.'
satthao
troop.'
'makes,'
ti)
maiia' tender' (wrrfM).

latldha-ppasara
'
paccha 38.
vijjhai (vtrfAt/o
35.
unimpeded.'
of sulky temper.
for
''The south wnid blows, sweet messenger of Love, making
many a mango
With pangs
defence.
blossom, and dissolving
lits
increast-d
by separation, longing
is
union with
their lovers, a troop of ladies
fauit with love, incapable of

of
First
comes the month
sweetness and softens

his
mortals'
hearts, then
Love wounds them with
flowery
arrows unimpeded."
(fe)
113
Act IV.
The Magician.
calane indassa indaalammi laddhanamassa,
Panamaha
taha ajja-Sambarassa vi maa-supadi tthia-jasassa.
(Deva) kini dharanle miaiiko
tiase
mahiharo
jale jalano,
niajjhanhamini paoso, davijjaii dehi anattim.
panamaha,
for
iraperat,
{pra
+ nam).
jalano
'
calane,
nom.
ace. plur.
Skt
neut.
indrajala
'illusion.'
padi-tthia {prati + stha)

{jval)
jasa
'renown.'
aasa
'sky.'
majjhanha
52.
davijjau, imperat. pass. cans, {da)
let it
be caused to be given-
demanded.'
" Revere
anattiin (a + ;na).
who takes his name from sorcery, so also those of worthy 8ambara whose renown is well Wliat shall it be? moon on the established by his masic.
the deeds
of
Indra,
ground, earth in the sky, or flames in water

give your
(c)
or dusk at noon
commauds."
?
Kim jappiena bahuna Uhum,

mahasi
'
jain
jam
liiaena
mahasi sanda-
tarn tain dainsemi ahain

desirest.'
guru no manta-ppahavena.
(d)
Hari-Hara-Bamha ppamuhe deve damseini devaraain
ca-
gaanammi
Bamha,
[There
simplicity,
cf.
is
Siddha-Vijjahara-bahu-satthain ca naccantam.
deve. ace. plur.
52.
very little Maharastri in tliis play. Note its and the great contrast with the decadent Camphor Cluster which uses the same motif of the magician producing
a vision of the Heroine,
b}'
bringing on the lady herself],
Maharastri
Extract No.
or
14.
Setubandha
Bk.
I.
Ravanavaho.
Verse 57.
How
the
monkeys
crossed
the
mountain
streams.
Bolanti a pecchanta padima-sanikanta-dhavala-
ghana-sainghae
phuda-phadiha-sila-saiiikula-khaliovari-patthie via
naippavahe
i;
114
'
^bol
pass, cross,'
cf.
bolei
'
passes (the time).'
M. pecchai
padi
khalia
= S'. pekkhadi
ma-sa)iikanta
S*.
-
40.
pecchanta, nom. plur. pies. part,

satngliae, ace. plur.
'reflected.'
S'.
86.
khalida.
patthia=
patthida (pra-stha).
-ppavahe
= pra-
vdhdn.
" And they cross the streams

ing masses of white clouds, as
ol rivers
if
that they see
reflect-
trickling through
and run-
ning over a welter of clear crystal rocks."
Bk. VII. Verse 56.
The waves splash on high

drop
in the
as
tlie
monkeys
mountains.
Uttlianghia-duma-nivaha giri-gha'-uvvatta-mucchia-
maha-maccha,
vela-sela-kkhalia
uddham
bhijjanti uahi-jala-kallola.
(ut
utthahghia.
regularly in
Co mm. = uttamhhita
S'.
+ stambh).
This
is
M. uttambia,
uahi 'ocean.'
uttambida.
uvvatta (ud +
vrt).
mucchia 'stunned,' maccha

pass of hhid.
56.
kkhalia (skhal).
bhijjanti
" Supporting a multitude
of trees, with
might}' fish turned
over stunned by the impact of the mountains, the ocean billows
break on high checked by the rocks of the shore."
Bk. VIII. Verse
3.
The sea
subsides.
Giri-sainkhoha-vimukka jhina appatta-padhama-gaman-oasa
mand-andolana-maiia gaagaa ccia samudda-salila-upplda.
patta
samkhoh a = samfcso6/ia. vimukka(w + mwc). jhina oasa = ayoââ. (a + pra-i-ap) padhama 20.
ccia
'
40.
ap
maiia^
mrduka.
like.'
uppida
'
bursts'.
"The
jets of sea-water
when
freed from the shock of the
mountains do not mount so high as before, but subside, and

oscillate in a slow
and gentle swing."
Verse
6.
Mingled spoil of land and sea.

saraa-maragaa-vattft-bhanga-
Motta-gl'adanta-kusuinaiii
bhariavattatn
vidduma-milia-kisalaarn
sa-sankha-dhavala-kamalarn
pa-
sammai
salilam.
INTRODCCTION TO PRAKRIT.
motta
witli.'
115
'pearl.'
ghadanta, pres. part,

'
(ghaf)
'
'being joined
vatta avattain emerald leaf.' maragaa 12. vidduma coral.' pasaramai (pra + iam). (d + vrt). "Quiet grows the water, blossoms united with pearls, the whirlpool filled with fragments of leaves and emeralds, buds
'
'
mingled with coral, white lotuses with the Triton's shells."

Verse 14.
Weariness
Nala).
of
the
workers
(Sugriva
speaks
to
Khavio vanaraloo duratthia-virala-pavvaam mahi-vedhain na a disai seu-vaho, ma hu namejja guruarn puno Ramadhanuni.
Khavio exhausted {ksap caus. of ksi). pavvaa mountain.' earth.' vedha = vesta enclosure 38, cf, M. vedhia, S'aur. vedhida, Comm. gives the meaning a,s mahi-prstham. disai =
*
' '
mahi
'
'
'
dr^yaie.
-va,ho
= patho.
namejja, opt. 3rd person sing, or plur.
The Comm. is uncertain whether -dhanum is nom. or ace. may Rama's bow not bend,' (a) Nom. then neuter, {b) Ace. Met not him (i.e. Rama) bend Rama's bow. Comm.
'
suggests naynayata but namejja is not 2nd person plural. " The monkey-people are exhausted, the surface of the earth
has mountains
the
left,
but few and far between, yet the mole

so let not
of
'
Bridge
is
not in sight,
Rama's bow bend
heavily again.
Verse 20.
Nala's reply.
dalia
Khavio pawaa-nivaho samuddo.

nivviidha.
va rasa alam dhuo vva
jiam va pariccattam ajja
va sambhavana tuham
pariccattam {pari +
ajja
tyaj).
Comm.
va
is
affirmative.
After
one
Comm. would
prefer to read vi.
"
multitude of mountains has been exhausted, the surface
of the earth
may
but
be torn up, the sea
may
be agitated, and
life
despaired
'
of,
now must your

'
design be carried out."

to
Comm.
says samudra-tidanaya,
chastise
the
sea
"
rather
to
chastise the
monkevs.
116
Sita a vision of
The Raksasas show

Bk. XI, Verse 61,
Rama's severed head.
p. 345.
Pecchai a sarahas-oharia-mandalaggahighaa-visama-cchinnani
dura-dhanu-samghiaiicia-sara-punkhaliddha-samahaavarigam,
oharia, past part, (ava + hr).
(abhi
'
mandaldgra scimitar.'
'
aliighaa
+ han).
'
sa,mghiai,hcia,
= samhita
aiicita ^ 65.
sara-punkha
shaft of arrow.'
17.
corner
" Rama-sirara."
"And
ahddha (a + lip) =*aligdha. avamga 'eyeThe object of pecchai comes in verse 69.
Sita saw (a
human head)
rudely lopped, hacked
off
with a scimitar's stroke, the corners of the eyes darkened by the shaft of the arrow set to the
bow and drawn
far
back."
Verse 62.
nivvudha-ruhira-pandura-maiilanta-ccheamasa-pelHa- vi varani
bhajjanta-padia-paharana-kantha-cchea-
dara-lagga-dhara-cunnam,
niv-vvid\iSb {iiirvyudha).
maiilanta
lit.
'budding
'
{muhula)
71.
chea
'
the cut.'
pellia
through *pelia *peria =prerita.

bhajjanta
Comm.
part,
gives the
meaning
'
as mudritam, 'sealed up.'
from bhajjai
is
broken.'
dara
'
cleft.'
its
"The
dust of the sword-edge clung to the cleft hewn in

fell
neck where the weapon

bloodless flesh at
tlie
breaking in pieces, while the pale

shrivelled
wound had
and sealed the hollow
thereof"
Verse 63.
niddaa-samdatthahara-miil-ukkhitta-dara-
dittha-dadha-hiram
samkhaa - sonia paiika - padala

-
purenta-
kasana-kantha-ccheaiii
niddaa 'ruthless.'
+
saindattha (sam + dam^).
adhara.
ukk-
dadha 'tusk,' 65. samkhaa Comm. = sawhitta (m< yfcMp). slyana 'coagulated' from the rare root styai. Rather from a
past part, sam-styata through *sarnskydta.
'
'
knaa,nii
= krs)m.
tooth of
adamant
lip,
is
seen through the gaping rent at the
base of the lower
ruthlessly bitten through,
and the dark

congealed."
neck-wound
is filled
with a
muddy
iilm of blood
Verse 04.
117
nisiara-kaa-ggahama-nilada-ada-nattha-
bhiudi-bhumaa-bhangam,
galia-ruhir-addha-lahuam anahia-uinmillataraani
n\s\-a.rsi=*niiicara.
Ramasiram
kaaggaha 'hair-seizing'
nidala.
{kaca-).
ania =
ania nilada 'forehead' also nalada, Pali nalata or lalata and

with metathesis M. nadala or M.
S'.
Apa. nidala (Pischel
260).
lata,
bhiudi
Comm. =b7irukuH
really
= bhr-kufi,
which
occurs.
AMg.
bhigudi.
(P.
are incorrect.
The forms bhuudi huudi Pischel says anahiaa means 124). bhumaa 'brow.'
a,na,d\h.Sir a,
ahr daya cL
an.Simi\ia.
amilita.
adirgha.
its
it
"The frown
that furrowed
its
brows had faded from
broad forehead, for the demons brought
with a grip of the
hair lighter by half with the blood poured

open but devoid
of soul
forth, with its orbs
the liead of Rama."

Sita's
Lament.
Verse 75
(p. 350).
jaip
Avaa-bhaaaram cia na hoi dukkhassa darunam nivvahananimahila-vihatthamditthamsahiamcatuhamaeavasanaip.

Avaa, = apata.
cia
ci,
(AMg.
ciya), ccia after vowels
means
eva:
sa-
also cea.
{caiva
ney a, z=7iaiva).
vlhattham = 6t6/ia^sam.
hiam
'
'
endured.'
frightful in its onset the
I
Though
if
terrible,
end of sorrow is not so can view a sight loathsome to women and endure
vision
thy death.'
Sita not
knowing that the
is
unreal, marvels that she
should continue to exist.
The
vlhattham to mean
Verse 7(\
'
a cause of reproach
commentary takes mahilaamong women.'

tti
valiunbani tujjha ure jani mocchihirai
sainthiam
maha
hiae,
ghara-niggamana-paattam sahasu tani
vaha
ko
it
or
kammi nivvavijjau dukkham ? baha = "tear." unham 'hot.' Text

to
has uhnani,
incorrect,
;
tujjha this oblique base of tuaiii survives in H. tujh
comes from ^tuhyam analogous
mahyam.
ure
loc. of
118
uro
'
breast/
'
mocchihimi.
Fut.
of
muc,
also
moccham.
pass,
thia 12.
paattam = prat;rf<am.
sahasu
'tell'
(nir
imperat. ids.
kammi
loc.
=
it
S'aur.
kassim.
niv-vavijjau
+ vap)
imperat. 'let
be poured out.'
"It was
home, that
breast.
fixed in
I
my
heart from
the
moment
of
leaving
would dissolve
tell
my
sorrow with hot tears on thy
Now
me, where shall

tujjha
my
grief be out-poured
"
?
Verse 77.
virahammi
tumain
tarn esa
tti
dhariam
dacchami
jiviam kaha vi mae,

dittho phalia vi
mae
manoraha
and dacchani
is
na piirenti mahatp.
dacchami
'I shall see,' also dacchirai
Saur.
uses pekkhissam.
kaha
esa
vi
= A:ai/iam
esa
apt, kahaiii
commonef.
Final anusvara in pronouns and adverbs tends to be optional.
So
maham = maha,
= eso.
is
used freely, according to

is
Hemacandra,
for all genders,
sa on the other hand

life
rare.
"In separation from thee my

thought of seeing thee.
was barely stayed by the

thee thus,
Now
see
my
desires
though bearing
Verse 78.
fruit bring
no satisfaction."
Puhaviahohii pal bahu-purisa-visesa-cancala Raasiri,
kaha ta maliain
vehavvani.
cia
imam nlsamannain
oblique
will
uatthiani
Puhavl
Earth,'
Saur. Pudhavi,
forms
'ta
in
Ta
are
tat.
common
in
M.
pal
= pa/i7i.
hohii "
'
be."
= Vedic
uatthia (iipa + sthd).
vehavvam
will
widowhood.'
"Of
fickle
the Earth there
be a Lord.
Royal Fortune
is
with
widowliood on
many me
'
distinguished
men, so
why
falls
absolute
alone?
"
[Earth and Royal Fortune are regarded as the other wives

of
Rama.
Absolute,'
lit.
having nothing
in
common
(witli
those other two).|
Verse 79.
Kim
ea
tti
palattani
visa-ummillehi
loanehi
ditthaiti,
vialia-lajjae
mae phudam Naiia tuha muham
ti
paruniiain.
INTRODUCTION TO PKAKPaT.
earn
visa
ti
119
(Saur.
edam
+
ti) is
;
more usual,
palattam
= *pralaptam.
(pra + rud)
etc.,
meaning visama
vialia (vi
reading should apparently be visani-
ummilP.
jjast. part,
gal),
phuda
38.
parunnam
by analogy with bhid hhinna: chid, chinna,
Saur. rudida.
"
'
What
is
this
'
cried,
and looked with obliquely opened

I
eyes, then casting
modesty aside
shrieked.
Clearly
it
is
thy face,
Verse 80.
my
lord."
Sahio tujjha vioo raani-arihi
samaam
ettahe
sahihi
va
vuttham datthum tumani

vialantam.
vioo 'separation'
9.
ti
hottam
jai
vi
jiviam
vuttha,m
= *vyustam
'
dawned.'
of hoi.
dat-
thum =c^ra5/Mm. hottam = hontam pres. part, (Comm, = iddnlm) cf ettio so much ? *ettadrse
,
ettahe
*ettaise *ettahe
of.
Apa. taisa for tarisa and M. divaha for divasa.
Hottam
and vialantam are used

Hindi usage, agar hota.
in the sense of the conditional, cf. the
" Separation from thee

friends
endured with female demons as

stars
life
it
dawned with the

then would
as
companions were
it
onlj' to see thee,
my
melt away."
vavasaa-matta-suha-
Verse 81.
Jae
paraloagae
tumammi
daddhavve
liarisa-chane vi
mahara dajjhai adittha Dahamuha -vaham hiaam.
matta = ma/ra commonly metta

vya.
69.
daddhavva = c?ras/athis gene-
-chane
Comm. sthdne
'festival,'
this
should be (t)thane, or perhaps
we should read harisa-cchane.

rally
chana = ^saa, but

being
means
'moment'
khana
(Pischel,
322).
"Now
that joy
that thou hast gone to the other world, and I
may
see thee with joy
though only through tribulation,
in place of
my
heart burns, not to have seen the slaying of the
Ten-Headed demon."
120
Verse 82.
INTRODICTION TO PRAKRIT.
Vaham na
rumbhai
dharei
hiaatp.
muham
asabandlio
vi
me
na
navari a cintijjante na vinajjai kena jiviam sam-
ruddhajp.
rumbhai means runaddhi {rudh forms rundhai)
this is
from
a root *ruhh, analogous to Wbhhai = lihyate from a root *libh (Pischel 266, 507). navari " tliereupon," some say from
na pare, Pischel disputes
this (P. 184)
cf.
iiavarani
only."
cintijjante pres. part. pass,
vinajjai pass, (vi + jna).
"My
stay
face bears no tear, even the

heart,
life is
bond
of
it
hope does not

is
my what my
and when
restrained."
it is
considered,
not seen by
Verse 83.
Bolino maara-liaro majjha kaena
maranam
pi
de
padivannam
nivvudham Naha tume
ajja vi dharai akaannuaip
maha hiaam.
Bolino 'passed.'
from melai
(mil),
maara-hara
Form appears to be pres. part., cf. melina home of sea-monsters.* padi'
vannam
death.
{prati + pad),
akaannua
cf.
savvannu
G9.
"For my
survives."
sake thou didst cross the

hast gone
ocean and incur thy
Thou
my
lord,
and yet
my
ungrateful heart
Verse 84.
Uggahihi
tti
Rama tumam
gune ganeiina purisa-maio
jano.
galia-maliila-sah avail! sanibhariiina a

liii
mamain
niatti-
kaham.
uggahihi Fut. caus.
'
will sing.'
(ni-^-vrl).
ganeuna counting, gerund, niattiliii bhariuna 'remembering' gerund from
bharai; *mbharai *mhiirixi =smnrati Saur. sumaredi, sumaria.
kaham
'
story.'
will sing of thee,
" Folk
nuvde of valour, and remembering
Rama, counting thy virtues as of on*me that missed a woman's
nature they
will
change the story."
Verse 85.
121
Tuha banaukkhaa-nihaam dacehimmi Daha-kanthamuha-nihaam

ti
kaa,
pal-
maha
bhaadhea-valia vivara-hutta manoraha
hattha.
ukkhaa for ukkhaa destroyed.' nihaa {ni + han). dacchimi nihaa or dacchami have better authority (see v. 77 above), - nighata. vivara = vi + pardn hutta Comm. = mukhd, this has the same meaning, but the form is like AMg. khutta for krtva
'
as with numerals (Pischel
206)
cf.
AMg. ananta-khutta
'
end-
ess
5519.
times, endless-ly
'
;
k becomes kh becomes h,
cf. iiihasa
palhattha,
(r
Comm. =paryasta
'upset,' but that would be

I),
pallattha
lasta
assimilates y and
becomes
palhattha = *praA-
" Those wishes of mine, that

his faces
from root hlas hras to diminish. see Ten-necks with I might
smashed, destroyed and struck down by thy arrow, have gone awry reversed by destiny and come to nought.'-'
Verse 86,
Jam tanuammi
janassa jano.
vi
virahe pema-bandhena sankai
tarn jaaip navara iraaru peccliantie a tarisam maj-
jha phalam.
tanua
navara,
'
short.'
pema- =premd',
pemma
is
commoner
68.
Comm. =kevalam, means "only,"

(
i.e.
cf.
navari v. 82
above, Pischel's objection
184) to the derivation from
na
param 'no more,'
that the anusvara appears to be secon-
dary, is not conclusive. " What a body dreads through love of another, even in a
tiny separation, such a dread result has
come
to pass for to
me
Bk.
only gazing at this sight."
XV. Verse
visuddham
14.
Happy
return to Ayodhya.
Ghettuna Janaatanaam kaiicana-latthim va hua-vahammi

patto purim Raghuvai
kaum Bharahassa sapphalam

ghettuin
136.
anu-
raam.
Ghettuna taking
'
'
cf
is
latthi (Hindi latlii) the
equation
with
yasti
curious.
kaum = S'. Mg. kadum
Saur.
122
also
has karidum.
(
sapphalam, Comm. =saphalam, but

,
this
would be saphalam 5) rather = sai-phalam. " Taking Janaka's daughter, purified in the
of gold,
fire like
a staff
Raghupati arrived at the
Bharata's loving kindness
city, to give
good
fruits to
Jain Maharastri.]
Extract No.
15.
Mandiya.
[Jacobi's Selected Stories, No. IX.]
Vennayade nay are

na-pasatto
c^si.
'
Maiulio
nama
tunnao'^ para-davva-hara-
so
ya
eva
duttha-gando mi-tti jane pagasento

adda'valeva
littena
janu-desena niccam
baddha-vana-
patto' raya-magge tunnaga-sippam uvajlvai.
cakkamanto
vi
ya danda-dharienam paenam kilimmanto kahamci cakkamai.*

rattim ca khattam khaniilna
davvajayam ghettuna nagaratat-
sannihie ujjan'ega-dese bhumi-gharain tattha nikkiiivai.^
tba ya se bhagini
kannagil
citthai.
tassa
bhilmi-gharassa
Vennayada
letter
or
Bennayada {Bernatada) a town
in
Western India.
The
2
strong
y in this section represents the laghuprayalnayakara y not th {vide p. 9) nayara, hence in many modern names -nair, -net.
to
tunnao or tunnago appears

in
mean a beggar with an

'
'
implication
of rascality-.
tiirna
a.s
Exact derivation uncertain, but evidently connected with

turna-ga a
'
swift goer.'
.
pagasento pres. part, of pagasei

( 11).
" shows"
s
(pra-^kaii).
For k
g compare AMg. Asoga

of
gando has a variety ing "cheek," "pimple," "rhinoceros";

this
duttha
duHa.
meanings
in Sanskrit includ
for Prakrit Hemacandra vanam ('abundance'?) danda-pasiko M.W. 'policeman,' Jacobi.
gives
(for
passage)
'
nightwatchman.'
'beggar'.
'
'
(Probably
slang).
'
laghu-
mrgo (?) and napitah barber.' adda damp (ardra). avaleva ointment (ava + lip). litta 'smeared.' vana 'wound' (vrana). -patta 'bandage' whence pattika modern patti. This context suggests that dutthagando is bahuvrihi ami means one with a bad boil.' Tho trick is still familiar
'
enough.
*
cakivamai
goos in
circles,'
'
'wanders.'
'
pacna
(klam).
witli his foot.'
Kiliui
manto pres. part, kilimmai khattam hole.' -jaya

f>
gets weary
'
(;5/a)
"quantity."
cf.
-sannihie
'in
tlie
vicin-
ity' (sam-^nidha).
egadesa "portion,"
11.
INTRODUCTION TO TKAKRIT.
majjhe kuvo.
jain ca so coro
'
123
davva-vodharam
anei, tain sa se
davvena palobheuin sahayain bhagim agada-sanaive puvvaevani kalo vaccai* nayaiia
natth'-asane nivesium paya-soya-lakkbena pile genhiuna tainmi
kuvae pakkhivai.^
tao so vivajjai.^
ram
ipusantassa.
cora-ggaha tam
jao.^
jao.''
sakkenti genhiuiii
tao
nayare bahu-ravo
bhaniya-vilifinena
tattha ya
Muladevo
raya
puvvatakkara-
kahio ya tassa
paurehitn
vaiyaro, jaha
kassai
ettha nayare pabhuya-kalo musantassa vattai
takkarassa,
na ya
tirai
kenai
genhium.''
ta
kareu
kirppi uvayani.
vi
tahe so
annam nagar'arakkhiyam
tahe
tbavei, so
Miiladevo sayam nilaMuladevo anajjanto egae sabhae nivanno acchai Java, so Mandiya-coro agantum bhanai Muladevena bhaniyam aham kappadio ko ettha acchai ?
na sakkai coram genliiuni.
padam pauniuna
rettim niggato.**
**
tena
bhannai
ehi,
manusam
karemi.'"
Muladevo
utthio.
egammi isara-ghare khattam khayain."
su-vahum davva-jayaiu
payatta nayara-
nineuna Muladevassa uvariin cadaviyam.''^
'
palobheum from palobhei "entices, allures" causal (pra

infin.
-\-
lubh)
form
=^
used as gerund.
agada Pkt. word "well," 'spring."

(ni-k-vis).
nattha
'
'placed'
{-âuca).
(nyasta).
nivesium gerund of causal

3
soya
washing'
vivajjaii
"perishes"
{vi->rpad).
j).
vaccai "goes, passes," generally referred to vraj (a case of c for

;
but Pischel thinks possibly from vratya so = " tramps "

be a simpler explanation,
6
*vrtyate
would
(cf.
Pischel, Gr.
202) H. bacna.
Sakkenti.
From
"
sak either sakkei or sakkai.

{vi dha).
6
T
-vihana
-vaiyaro
'
manner
'
story
'
[vyatikara).
kassai (kasya +api).
tirai pass,
from
tf.
is
accomplished.'
^ ^
pauniuna
'
putting on
'
(pra+v?) paunomi, p.p

'
p.
paunia.
'
anajjanto 'unknown' pres. part, of najjai
is
known
pass.
_rcc/ia<i
Una),
niv&nno
{m+ pad),
acchai
'stays'
60.
Pischel refers to
(Gr
480.
''^
He
'
quotes the other theories),

pilgrim,' karpatika.
rich
aganturn gerund.
kappadio
isara
bhannai pass,
of bhanai.
' '
man.
'*'
cadavia past part. cans, from cadai which Hemacandra represents by

(cf.
a + rw/i.
H. cafh-na).
suvahum
subahum.
124
vahiriyam.'
ei.
sampatta bhumi-gharam.
bhaniya
!
Muladevo purao, coro asimi kaddhiena'^ pitthao coro tarn davvam nihanium ya
nena bhagini
^
:
araddho.
eyassa pahunayassa
paya-soyaiii dehi
tae kuva-tada-
-sannivitthe asane nivesien
tae paya-soya lakkhena pao gahio,

ativa
kuve chuhami-tti.^ Java sukumara paya, tae nayam, jah' esa koi anubhuya:
puvvâ-rajjo vihaliy'ango.''
tale
tie
anukampa
jaya.
tao tae payaso palao.
sannio
nassa-tti
^
ma
marijjihisi-tti.
paccha
tae volo kao:
nattho nattho-tti.
so-y-asim kaddhiuna magge
olaggo
Muladevo raya-pahe aisannikittham nauna caccarathio.''^
siv'antario
coro tain siva-lingam, esa puriso-tti kauin
kankamaena asina duha-kaum" padiniyatto gao bhumi-gliaram. tattha vasluna pahayae rayanle tao niggantuna gao
bahim.
antar'avane
teiia
tunnagattaiii
:
karei.
raina
purisehini
saddavio.'^
cintiyam, jalia
so puriso
tehini
nunam na
purisehini
mario,
anio.
avassani ca esa raya

raina abbhuttlianena
bhavissai-tti.
puio asane
nivesavio,''^
su-vahum ca
'
payatta =pravrltah.
vahiriya=bahiriya " outside."

4.
kaddhia 'drawn' from kaddhai (H.
lS7=krs)
krsta could give
*kattha thence *kaddha.

'^
nihanium
tada
'
to bury' {ni kJian).
*
*
pahunaya 'guest' (praghurna).

'
edge.'
chuhai or chiibhai
-'throws."
Heraacahdra = A.->//j
ratlier
from
ksubh cognate with EngHsh " shove."

"^
vihaliya {vihvalita)
'
trembling.'
sannio (samjhitah)
'
made
a sign.'
marijjai pass, of marei
"
kills."
in
palao 'fled' past part,

bolo
"^
of palayai
'flees.'
volo=bolo a cry'
M.
'
speech
'
cf.
modern bolna.
his)
so-y-a.sim
'and he' (drawing

'
'sword' or y
is
merely a sandhi
is
con.sonant.
*-lagna.
olaggo
followed
'
means anulagna, but the form

eaccara
ava or apci
'0 ai-sannikittham=a<t-sam-nifc/-.;'(a?n.
squaro
"
(catvara)
Ti-s-
chel.
II
299.
antario
*
'
hidden.'
like a
kankamaa shaped
avana
'
herons
beak.'
dnhS
kiiiun
'
luiving split
{dvidha krtva).
1*
\^
market.'
saddSvio (sahdupitah).
nivesavio past part, of nivesavei fuUor form of nivosei.
125
piyam abhasio samlatto: mama bhaginim dehi-tti. tena kaisuvi'^ bhoga ya se sarnpadatta. raina Mandio bhanio davvena kajjam-ti. tena dinesu gaesu
dinna, vivahiya raina.
' :
su-vahuin
sarapujio. annaya ya corassa ativa sakkara sammanam paiinjai.'' eena pagarena savvam davvam davavîo.* bhaginim se pucchai tie bhannati ettiya mceva vittarn. tao puvv'aveiya-lekkhanusarena^ savvam davvam davaveuna Mandio siilae arovio.
davva-jayani
;
dinnam.
raina
puno maggio
puno
vi
dinnam.
tassa
Mandio.
In the town Bernatada there lived a beggar
addicted to taking other people's property.
the beggar's art on
tlie
named Mandio
He
used to practise
high-road, tied up in bandages, with
a smear of grease, kept always wet, about his knee, to
show Mouching wearily around with his foot supported on a crutch he wandered at random. And at night he would dig a hole (in a walli and
that he suffered from
a
virulent
sore.
taking a lot of property -to a baoli in a corner of a garden
near the town
would
bury
it
there.
And
there
lived
his
unmarried
well.
sister.
In the middle of that baoli, there was a

thief
Anybody the
brought with him to

sister
Ccxrry his loot,

sit
having allured him therewith, the
would have
down
and
on a seat previously arranged at the edge

she would tip him into the well.
of the spring,
then, taking hold of his feet on the pretence of washing them,
And
so he perished.
Thus
time went on while he robbed the town.
The
thief-catchers
it
were unable to catch him, and a great noise about

the town.
arose in
Now
Miiladeva had become king there in the manner
re-
lated above.
The
citizens told
him about the

on her.'
thief;
that a
'
sarnpadatta (sam+pra+da).
kaisuvi {katisu
se
'
* 3
+ api).
paunjai
'
sakkara
'
favour."
employs' (pra+yui).
davavio past. part. eaus. da.
'
pagara
^
'
manner' {prakara).
aveia past part, of aveei causal (a + vid) lekkha
'
list
126
certain thief
had been
for
some time robbing the town, and
that nobody had succeeded in catching

devise some remedy.
him so
he should
Thereupon he appoints another superin-
tendent of the town police.

thief.
He
also
is
unable to catch the
Then Muladeva himself put on

Miiladeva goes and
there.
a dark cloak and went
out one night.

certain hall
lies
down
incognito in a
Mandio comes and Muladeva said, 'I ani a is it stopping here?' says, 'Who The other said, 'Come I will make a man of 3'ou pilgrim.' A hole was cut in a certain rich man's Muladeva got up
and stays
The
thief
house.
it
He
00k out a great quantity
of
plunder and piled
up on Muladeva.
They
set out
for
the outskirts of the
town.
Muladeva goes
to
in front, the thief
comes up behind
with a drawn sword.

to
They came
loot,
'
;
to the baoli.
to
his
The
thief set
'
work
bury the
and he said
sister,
Wash
wash
the feet of this guest
she set
him on the
well.
seat placed on the

if
edge
it,
of the well,
and took hold
of one of his feet as
to
meaning
to
shove him into the
As
his feet
were very
deUcate she perceived that this was some one who had enjoyed royalty and had sensitive limbs. She took pity on him, and
made
a sign on the surface of his foot.
"Flee,
lest
you be
slain."
After that he
fled,
made
his escape.
She raised a cry

his
"He's
close to
he's fled,"
and the other drew
sword and
was very him on the highway, stood hidden behind a lingam in a square. The thief mistook this Siva's lingam for a man, split it in two with his heron-bill sword, and went back to his He stayed there till the night grew light and then he baoli. came out and went abroad. He plays the beggar in the market-place. The king sent men to summon him. He thought to himself, "so that fellow was not killed, and no doubt he
finding
lie
;
pursued him down the road.
Muladeva
will
turn out to be the king."

rose to greet
The king
your
sister.'
him, and made him take a seat.

'
After several friendly remarks the king said to him,
Give
me
He gave
her,
and the king married
her.
Wealtli
was bestowed upon
her.
127
'
When
a few days liad passed, the king said to Mandio,
need some treasure.'

king honoured him.
So he gave him a good quantity.
Then again he asked, and again it given. He lavishes the greatest favour and consideration on the thief. In this way he made him give all his wealth. He asks his sister. She said, he had just so much property. Then he caused all this wealth to be given away according to a list previously announced, and Mandio he had impaled.
The was
Jain Maharastri.]
Extract No.
16.
Domuha.
[Jacobi's No. V.]
Sampai Dummuha-cariyam.' atthi ih' eva Bliarahe vase nama puram. tattha Hari-kula-vamsa-sambhavo Jao nama raya, tassa Gunamala nama bhariya. so ya raya annaya atthanatie saha rajja-sirim anuhavanto gamei kalam.
Kampillani
mandava-tthiena pucchio diio:^ kim n'althi mama, jam annarainam atthi

n'atthi.
?
diiena
bhaniyam
deva, citta-sabha tumha

:
tao raina anatta thavaino,^ jaha
lahum
citta-sabhain
kareha! aesananantarara samadhatta.*
tattha dharanie khanjal-
namanie kammagarehira
ano-vva
teyasa
jalanto
sittho^ Jaya-raino.
pancama-dine savva-rayanamao
dittho
vi
maha-maudo,
piiiya
sa-harisehim
tena
parituttha-manenam nandl-ravathavai-m-aino''
puvvayam
uttario
bhumi-vivarao.
jaha'riha-vattha-m-aihim.
theva-kalena^ vi
nimmaya
'
uttunga-
'
Sampai " now"

atthana
anatta
'
'
(samprati).
Dummuha=Do-muha
dQo
'
two-faces.'
audience hall'
'
{a-\-stha).
envoy.'
'
commanded
'
(a+jfia)
125.
thavai
architect
'
(sthapati).
samadhatta begun' past pass. part. {sam-\-a-dha) for dha becomes dha, compare 7. The derivation from arabdha is quite impossible. 6 dharanie kammagara during the excavations.' khannamanie
'
'
workman,'
6
1
i
cf.
Asoga.
(b'ista
sittho
told' p. p. p. of sahai
'
*sasati)
125.
thavai-m-aino
the architects, etc'
-m-
is
a sandhi consonant.
theva
'little' (Pali
theva) ^stip
'
drop.'
128
sihara
citta-sabha.
sohana-dine
kao
citta-sabliae
paveso.
Arovio
mansfala-tura-saddena'
appano
uttim'ange
maudo.
tap-pabhaveiia do-vayano so raya jao.

tti
loena^ tassa Domuho-
naraaiii kayani.
aikkanto koi kalo.
tassa
ya raino satta tanaya jaya.
duhiya
Gunamala addhiim' karei. Mayana'bhihanassa jakkhassa icchai uvaiyaip.* annaya ya pariyaya-manjariuvalambha-suvina-suiya tise duhiya jaya. kayam ca vaddhavanayam.* dinnam jakkhassa uvaiyatp. kayani ca tie namain Mayanamanjarl. kamena ya jaya jovvan'attha.
me
n'atthi-tti
io
3'a
Ujjeiile
Candapajjoya-raya.
jao.
jaha: raya
domuho
Pajjoena bhaniyam
atthi
;
bhaniyam
havanti.
tassa eriso
maudo
duena sahiyani, kaham ? duena tammi arovie do muhani

tassa
:
maudass' uvarim
:
Pajjoyassa
lobho
jao.
duj'ani
Domuha-raino pesei
aha na
eyam mauda-rayanam mama pesehi Domuha-raina duo bhanio Pajjoya-santio jai mama jam maggiyam deha, to aham avi maudam demi. duena. bhaniyam: kim maggaha? raina
^
pesesi, jujjha-sajjo'' hohi

:
bhaniyam
deha: Nalagiri hatthi
Aggibhirii taha raha-varo

leh'ariya
ya
Jaya ya Siva devi
Lohajangho ya
il
pacligao duo Ujjenini. sae5''am Pajjoyassa rajja-siram. hiyam Pajjoyassa Domuha-santiyaiii padivayanam. kuddho^ donni lakkhii mayagaaiva Pajjoo, calio caurariga-balena lanam," donni sahassa rahanam, panca ajuyani hayanam,
:
tura
musical instrument.'
'
* ^
loena
by the people
'
0.
addhii " care, anxiety."
{adhrti.)
jakkhassa 'to a demon.'

{wpa-ira-irkr).
^
icchai
'promises.'
uvaiyam
'offering'
suiya 'revealed'
{sue).
Satir.
suida.
'
suvina 'dream.'
l)irth
pHriyaya=
parijata
6
? 8
" coral
'
tree."
vaddhavanayam
leremonj-
"
iârdhapana.
pesei
he sends.'
*
jujjha-sajjo
ready for battle.'
"
knddho " wroth." mayagala 'elephant' {madakala).
satta koflio payai
'
2i)
jananam.
anavaraya^ -payanaeliiin patto

iyaro vi
Pancala-janavaya-sandhim.
Domuha-raya cauranga
Pajjoena,
vi
bala-samaggo
assa.
''
nihario nayarao.
gao padisammuham Pajjoybalana
Paficala-visaya-sandhie
sagara-vuho Domuhena.
jujjhain.
garuda-vuho * tao sampalaggam donha

raio
so
mauda-rayana-pahavena
ajeo
Domuharaya.
bhaggam*'
nayaram.
-rairio
Pajjoyassa balam. bandhiuna Pajjoo pavesio dinnam calane kadayam.'^ suhena tattha Pajjoya-
vaccai kalo.
annaya dittha tena Mayanamanjari.

kam'aggina
kahavi
rai.
jao gadha'nurao.
tao
dajjhamanassa
cinta-samtava-gayassa
dittho
voliya*
paccuse ya gao atthanarp.

;
parimilana-
muha-sariro Domuha-raina
puochio sarira-pauttim,
tao
na dei
padivayanam.
nisasiuna
s'asankena yagadhayaram puttho.

**
diham
jampiyam
Pajjoena
Mayana-vasa-gasaa, nara-vara
kuviyassa marantassa ya
ta jai icchasi
vahi-vighatthassa
'
taha
ya
mattassa
lajja
durujjhiya hoi
'
ti
'
[eyam
kusalam
'^
payaccha to JVlayanamanjarim
niya-dhuyam
tao
me
nara-vara
na desi pavisami jalanammi
II
hutte
Domuhena nicchayam nauna dinna. sohana-dina- mukayam paniggahanam. kaivaya-dinehim dhario,^^
puiiina visajjio, gao Ujjenim Pajjoo.

'
payai
'
footsoldier
'
'
(padati).
anavaraya
incessant.'
samaggo
ajeo
'
'
complete.'
*
'
v&io=zracito.
vuha
'
order of battle' {vyuha).
invincible.'
'
bhaggam
'
broken.'
'
'7
kadaya fetter (kataka). dajjhamana 'being consumed.'

nisasivina
'
voliya 'passed,'
{jalpitam)
*
cf.
bolei.
y '0
'I
sighing.'
'
jampiyam
'
37.
(vi
vahi
'
illness
'
(vyadhi).
vighattha
consumed'
behind.'
+ ghas).
kuvia
angry.'
dur-ujjhiya
left far
'2
dhOyarn 'daughter,' dhuya=:I\l. dhiaa S.Mg. dhuda =*dhuta from
*dhukta (Pischel,
'3
65).
'
dhario
'
waited
{dhr).
130
'
annaya agao Inda-mahusavo. Domuha-raina aittha nayara-jana: ubbheha indakeum ' tao mangala-nandi-maharavena dhavala-dhaya-vadaho doya-khiukliinl-jala'lamkio^ avalam
!
biya-vara-malla-damo mani-rayana-mala-bhusio nanaviha-palambamana-phala-nivaha-ciiicaio

canti nattiyao, gijjanti^
*
ubbhio indakeu.
tao nac-
sukai-raiya
kavva-bandha, naccanti
indayalfiiip,
in-
nara-samghaya,
dayalino''
disanti
ditthi-raohanaim
;
ya
dijjanti
tamboraira
khippanti
kappura-kun-
kuma-jala-chada,
aojjaim.^
dijjanti
evara
raaha-moena
maha-danaim, vajjanti muiiigaigaya satta vasara. agaya

"^
punnima.
meinle.
puio maha-vicchaddena
kusuma-vatth'alhiip Do-
muha-raina indakeu.
maha-tiira-ravena
annammi dine padio

dhir-atthu vijju-'"
dittho raina amejjha-mutta-duggandhe nivadio janena

ya.*
pariluppamano
datthiina cintiyam
reha-vva cancalanara parinama-virasanam riddhinam. eyain cintayanto saqabuddho, patteyabuddho " jao. paiica-rautthiyara loyam kaiina pavvaio."^
uktam ca
'
aittha
'
commanded
'
{a-^-dis).
ubbheha 'erect' imperat. from ubbhei 'erects' from ubbha = urdhva (also uddha uddha). For dhv becomes bbh compare dv l>ecomes bb. barasa twelve '^(dvadasa). -keum banner.' 3 dhaya=dftva;'Gt. vadaho {-pataka). doya " daruhasta" 'clapper.'
2
* '
':
*
f"
cincaio
gijjanti
'
adorned,' Pkt. root.

'
are sung'
'
135.
6
T
indayalino
magicians.'
'
khippanti pass, of khivai
throws
'
vajjanti
"are sounded"
(vadyante).
chada abundance (chata). 135. muihga 'drum.' aojja "musical

'
instrument " atodya.

8 w
araejjha
vicchadda 'liberality' (vi-^chrd). * impurity' (amedAj/a), mutta=mMtra, pariluppamana

vijju "lightning."
'
being
destroyed.'
'0
'I
all
patteya-buddho=pratyeka-buddho one who obtains enlightenment By analogy with pacciisa, etc., one might expect *pa(oeya (cf. alone.
Pischel
Pali pacceko).
'*
= " pra(Civ. 28 1 ) explains patteâ in this phrase, patteyam tyekam") and patti in M. pattiaT AMg. pattij'ai 6. IMg. pattiaadi = " pratiyaW as being derived not from prati but from *parn'i *parti, and compares Greek porti beside the ordinary proti. mutthiya handful.' pavvaio lie entered the Order {pra-^vraj).
(
' *
'
INTRODUCTION TO PKAKKIT.
jo
)31
indakeu suyalamkiyam tain datthum padantani pavi-
luppamanaip
riddhim ariddhiin samupehiyanani Pancala-raya
vi saraik-
kha
'
dhammatn
Domuha.
[Now comes
In
this land of
the story of Double-face.]

is
Bharata there
town
called
Kampilla.
There was a raja named Jaya born

wife was Gunamala.
of the lineage of Hari.
His
And
he passed the time together with her
enjoying his royal fortune.
One day
in the
pavilion
of the
audience hall he asked an envoy.
"What
do
I lack,
that
The envoy said, " Your Highness has no other kings have? " picture-gallery." Then the raja commanded his architects, They started work saying, Quickly build a picture-gallery.' immediately on the command. While the excavations for this work were going on, the workmen found on the fifth day a
'
great diadem of
fire,
all
sorts of
gems
flashing with brilliance like
and
in great glee reported this to

it
Raja Jaya.
He was
rest
very pleased, and had
taken out of the hole in the ground,
after the recitation of a blessing.
The
architects
and the
were honoured with appropriate robes and the

short
pleted.
like.
In a very
time a picture gallery with lofty pinnacles was com-
On an
auspicious day
came the opening ceremony.
To
the sound of happy music the raja placed the diadem on
and so shone with the light of a double countenance. So the people dubbed him " Double- face." Some time passed, and there were born to the raja seven sons. Gunamala grieved that she had no daughter, and
his head,
promised an offering to a
demon named Mayana.

to her in a
And then
per-
was born a daughter revealed

a cluster of the Coral Tree.
1
The
birth
dream ceremony was

for
of conceiving
samupehiyanam gerund (am +!<-- prefes) shortened

This verse
is
samuppe
17.
to
44.
scan.
in
AMg. quoted from Sva^yaka

i.e.
niryukti
samikkha " aamlksate"

in
samikkhai which is regularly contracted AMg. verse to samikkhe, but this would not scan here.
for
132
formed, and the offering given to the demon.

the baby
They named
Mayana
Manjarl, and in course of time she grew to
maid's estate.
Now
that
iiing
Candra-Pradyota
of Ujjain
was told by an envoy
had become double-faced. "How?" asked Pradyota. The envoy said, "He has such a diadem, on Pradyota was filled with putting it on he has two faces."
the
raja
desire for that diadem.
He
sent a messenger to
!
" Send
me
that jewel of a diadem
If
King Domuha, you don't send it, pre-
pare for battle."
King Domuha said to Pradyota's messenger, The 'If you give me what I ask, I will give the diadem." messenger said, "What are you asking? " The raja said,
" Give
me there's
the elephant Nalagirl, and the excellent
chariot Agnibhiru, and the consort
Queen
S'iva,
and the writer
LohaSâhgho."
This was the cream of Pradyota's kingdom.
returned to Ujjain, and told
Pradyota
Pradyota was exceedingly angry and set

of the four
fifty
The messenger Domuha's answer. out with an army

footsoldiers.
arms
two lakhs
of elephants,
two thousand chariots,

of
thousand horse, and seven krores
He
reached the frontier of the Paiicala country by forced marches.
King Domuha on the other side came out of the city with all his army, and went to meet Pradyota. On the Paiicala frontier Pradyota took up the " Garuda " formation, and Doubleface the " Ocean " order. Then both forces joined issue. Through the puissance of that jewel of a diadem Doubleface was invincible. Pradyota's force was broken. Pradyota was bound and
brought into the
city.
ring
was
fixed on his foot.
And
en-
there king Pradyota quietly passed his days.
One day he saw Mayana-maiijari. amoured. Then consumed with the

King-
He became deeply
fire
of
love,
and
fallen
into a fever of thought he passed the night as best he could.
Domuha
noticed his pale face and emaciated form, and
asked what ailed him.
He gave no
Then
answer.
He was anxiously
sigh
questioned more closely.
witli
a deep
Pradyota
quoted
" The man
133
is
is
in the power of Love, good sir, the man that drunk or consumed by disease, he that's wroth, and he that
on the point
wish your
give
of
death
has left modesty

me
this
far behind.
So
:
if if
you
you
the
own
good, vouchsafe
Mayanamafijari
sir,
I
me
not your
own daughter, good
shall enter
fire."
So Domuha, perceiving
his determination,
gave her to him.
The wedding was celebrated on an auspicious day and hour. After staying some days Pradyota, having paid his respects and taken his departure, went to Ujjain.
One day
there
came the Great Indra

raise
Festival.
Domuha
Then the
instructed the citizens to
an Indra Banner.
Banner was erected with a great roar

with white pennons and
their clappers,
flags,
of auspicious blessings,
of bells
adorned with a chain
and
hung with
fine
festoons, decorated with strings
and gems, and laden with an abundant variety Then the dancers danced poems composed of pendent fruits. by good poets were sung, crowds of people danced, dazzling
of
jewels
illusions are
like.
shown, and the magicians are given betel and the

water are thrown
Quantities of camphor, saffron and
in the air, masses of alms are given away, the bands crash with
drums and the rest. Thus in great delight pass seven days. The full-moon came. King Domuha honoured the Indra-Banner with great liberality, with flowers, robes and the like. On another day with a great roar of music down it fell on the ground. The king saw it fallen in a place foul with dung and
dirty
water, and
reflected
" Out
plundered by the people.
Seeing this he
flash
on the pomps of this world fleeting as a
of lightning, ending in disgust! " As he thought thus he was enlightened, and became a Pratyeka-Buddha. Regarding the
world as but
five fist-fulls
he entered the Order.
'Tis said
" What was an Indra-Banner,

and plundered.
*'
that he saw adorned, but fallen
And
perceiving the
pomp
that was no pomp, Pancala's king
discovered the
Law."
134
Jain Maharastri]
Extract No.
17.
From an
translation
inscription found near Ghatayala, a village situated

of
about twenty miles north of the city

Society
1895,
Vol.
Jodhpur.
Text and
Asiatic
published in the Journal of the Royal

27,
p. 513.
The
inscription
is
dated
Sarnvat 918.
is
This probably refers to the Vikrama era, and

It records that a chief
equivalent to about 861 a.d.
named
Kakkuka
0(11.
founded a Jain temple, estabhshed a market, and
erected two pillars.
Saggapavagga-maggara
I
padhamani
sayalana
karanain
devaiii
namaha Jina-nahain Rahu-tilao padiharo asT Siri-Lakkhano tti Ramassa tena Padihara-vanso samunnaim ettha sampatton 2. vippo Hariando bhajja asi tti khattia Bhadda
nisesa-duria-dalanam parama-gurum
i
ii
1.
tana suo uppanno viro Siri-Rajjilo ettha

assa vi
ii
3.
tti
Narahada namo
jao Siri-Nahado
eassa
ii
assa vi tanao Tao, tassa vi assa vi
Jasa-vaddhano jao. Candua-namo uppanno Silluo vi eassa

i
4.
Jhoto
assa vi
tti
tassa tanuo, assa vi Siri-Bhilluo cain
5.
Siri-Bhilluassa tanuo Siri-Kakko guru-gunehi garavio
Kakkua-namo Dullahadevie uppanno
ii
6.
Isiviasaiii
hasiam, raahuram bhaniam, paloiam sommaiii

jassa na dinara ro[so] theo, thira metti
li
namayam
riarn
i
7.
no jampiam, na hasiam, na kayaip, nu paloiam, na samblia-
na
thiani,
na paribbhamiam, jena jane kajja-parihlnani
II
8.
suttha duttha vi paya
ahama taha uttima

i
vi
sokkhena
janani vva jena dharia niccam niya-mandale
sawa
i
ii
9.
uaroha-raa-macchara-lohehim
naya-vajjiam jena
'
na kao donha viseso vavahare kavi
manayam
pi
10.
diavara-dinnanujjam jena janam ranjiuna sayalam
pi
ii
nimmaccharena Janiam dutthana

I
vi
danda-nitthavanani
11.
Read
kori or kahai'i.
dhaiia-riddha-samiddhana
vi
135
pauranam niakarassaabbhahiani
ii
lakkhani sayanca sarisantananca taha jena ditthaim
12.
<
nava-jovvana-ri3a-pasahiena singara-guna-garukkena
iana-vaya-nijja-malajjani jena jane neya sancariamii 13.
balana guru tarunana taha sahi gayavayana tanao vva

iya-sucariehi niccaip jena jano palio savvoll 14.
jena
jampantena ya
namantena saya saiumanam gunathuim kunantena laliani dinnam panaina dhana-nivahamll
15.
i
Marumada-Valla-Tamani-panawM-a^Ya-Gujjarattasu janio jena jananam sac caria-gunehim anuraoii 16.

gahiuna gohanaira, girimrai jalau[la]o
janiao jena visame
pallio
i
Vadananaya-mandale payadamil 17. niluppula-dala-gandlia ratnma mayanda mahua-vindehim vara-icchu-panna-cchanna esa bhumi kaya jena 18. varisa-saesu a navasum attharasam'aggalesu Cettammi
II
i
nakkhatte vihu-hatthe Buliavare dhavala-blae
il
19.
i
siri-Kakkuena hattain mahajanam vippa-payai-vani-bahulaip
Rohinsakua-game nivesiam kitti-viddhiell 20. Maddoarammi ekko, bio Rohinsakua-gamammi 21. Jena jasassa va punja ee tthambha samutthavia tena siri-Kakkuenam Jinassa devassa duria-niddalanam karaviam acalam imam bhavanam bhattie suha-janayaraii 22, appiam earn bhavanam siddhassa Dhanesarassa gacchammii
i
||
taha santa-Jamba Ambaya-vani-Bhauda-pamuha-gotthieii 23.

Notes.
Verse
sesa
1.
'
Apavagga
all
' '
'
final
beatitude
durita
'
'
(apa +
vrj).
ni-
{nihissa) 63.
sin.'
V.
2.
-padiharo
doorkeeper.' or
name
of clan,
vanso, better
spelling vamso,
V.
3.
bhajja 'wife'
50.
V.
5.
Inscription has -nama a mistake for

verse,
tyakta.
'
-namo
cf.
as in the next
cai 'generous'
tydgt)
AMg.
catta =
44.
119.
'
garavio
.
means
gauravitah
S*.
highly esteemed
{
cf
:
M.
AMg
;
J.M. garava for M.

Skt. gariyas.
'
gorava
V.
7.
= gaurava)
'
Pali garu
to
namayam perhaps corrected theo = thevo little.'
namiyam
meekness.'
136
V.
9.
INTRODUCTION TO PHAKRIT.
ipsiya
= prajdh,
' ' '
niya = m?o.
'
V. 10.
uaroa favour or
ill-will,
'
obstructiveness {upa + rudh).

'
macchara
ti
envy
cf
vaccha
39.
i
= iti.
In AMg.
In
after a long vowel
becomes
(Pischel 93).
JM.
V. 11.
dia
{nih
im pi
is
more
usual.
42.
'twice-born,'
nitthavanam
short vowel
cf.
'infliction'
+ sthdpanam)
67.
for
thavei
= .s^M-
payati.
V. 12.
paura
S'.
pora (=paura)
61.
ahhha,hia,rn
kam.
Kielhorn
ca
;
suggested
sarisattananca.
-ivana
drsatvanam
instead of
tative
-ttana = vedic
= abhyadhi= *sais common

is
-tva.
(His translation of this verse
ten-
and he notes that the wording

'full
of the original
may
V. 13.
be wrong.)
garukka 'heavy with,'

garu
;
of =*garukya
cf.
Pali
Skt. guruka (Pischel 299).

nijja
'
janavaya = yana-
V. 14.
1 5.
= wedya to be blamed.' neya = waii"a. gaya-vaya 'aged = gata-vayas) iysb, JM. AMg. =iti. saya = sadd. panai = pranayin.
pada.
'
V. 16.
Marumadaprob. =Marwar. Gujjara = (zwr^'ara Gujar.' Here we have an older form of the modern Gujerat.'
'
'
-parianka ajja has not been explained.

V.
17.
gohana 'herd,'
Idkula,
ô-c?)^wa.
palli
'
hamlet.'
jalaula
= ;va-
V. 18.
payadam =prakatam, M. paada AMg. pagada. ma\'anda mango tree {mdkanda).

' '
V. 19.
aggala
= argala)
used technically in dates, see Indian
Antiquary, vol. xix, p. 61, note 52.
vihu
bia
'
moon.'
hattha = Hasta
the
constellation,
'second,'
V.20.
AMg. JM. biya biiya. mahajanam as an adjective

'
'for
merchants.'
payai
foot soldier,' also payai (padati).

(arpi7a).
'
V. 23.
appiam
gaccha
'
series,' 'lineage,' i.e. 'school.'
gotthi
Translation.^
society.'
!
Om
is
Bow
to the lord of
tlie
Jinas. wlio
is
tlie
Follows what
apparently Kielhorn's.
J.R.A.S. quoted above.
INTRODUOTJON TO PRAKRIT.
path to
first
137
is
Ilea veil
all
and beatitude, the god who
the
cause of
things, the destroyer of every sin,
the supreme preceptor.

V.
2.
The
glorious
Laksmana, the ornament oftheRaghus,

;
was Rama's doorkeeper hence the Pratihara clan has

attained here to eminence.
V.
3.
There was a Brahman named Haricandra
his wife
was
Bhadrd
V.
4.
of the
Kshatriya caste.
To them
to
a valiant
son was born, named Rajjila. To him, again, Narabhata was born, and
him Nahada
{=Ndgabkata)
vardhana.
his son
was Tata, and
his son, Yaio-
V.
5.
To him Canduka was

Bhilluka^ s son was
qualities;
born, and to
him
S'ilhika
his
son was Jhoto, and his, the generous Bhilluka.

V.
6.
Kakko
highly esteemed for his noble
and to him was born from Durlabhadem,

[like a] slightly
Kakkuka.
V.
7.
His smile
is
opening [flower-bud], his
speech sweet, his glance benign, his meekness not

timid, his anger slight, his friendship firm.
V.
8.
He never
has spoken, or smiled, or acted, or looked, or
V.
9.
remembered a thing, without benefiting mankind. Like a mother he constantly has kept in comfort all the people in his dominion, the poor and the prosperous, the lowest as well as the highest.
V.
10.
And
never has he, departing from what was right,
through favour, affection, envy, or greed, made the

slightest difference
between the parties
in
suit.'
V. 11.
Following the advice given by the best of the twice-born,
he has pleased everybody, and free from passion has

also caused
punishment to be
inflicted
on the wicked.
of wealth
V. 12.
Even
to citizens possessed of
abundance
(?),
he
has assigned more than his revenue
a lakh and a
hundred and the

K. " transaction."
like (?)*
'
"As much
as
was suitable
"
(?)
138
V. 13.
Though adorned with the freshness of youth and beauty, and full of the sentiment of love, he never
has behaved
to
people
so
as
to incur
men's
re-
proaches, or witliout modesty.

V. 14.
To
children like a guru, to

like
young men
like a friend,
and to the aged
a son, by such good conduct has
he constantly cherished everyone.

V. 15.
Always showing respect with politeness, praising virtues, and speaking pleasantly he has given an abundance
of
wealth to those attached to him.
V.
16.
By
his
good behaviour and virtues he has won the
affection of the people in
Marumada,
Valla,
Tamani,
....(?)
and Gujarat.
V. 17.
He
has taken away the herds of cattle and has

'
made
a conspicuous illumination
of the
villages
district.
on the
mountain
V. 18.
in the
rugged Vatananaka
This land he has
made
fragrant with the leaves of blue
lotuses, and"pleasant with groups of
mango and ma-
dhuka
Vv. 19 and
trees
and has covered
it
with the leaves of
excellent sugar-cane.
20.
And when
the
nine hundred years were increased

in
by
eighteenth,
Caitra,
when
the
moon's
nakshatra was Hasta, on Wednesday, the second

lunar day of the bright half, the illustrious
for the increase of his fame,
Kakkuka,
fit
founded a market,
for traders, crowded with Brahmans, soldiers, and
merchants at the
V.21.
village of
Rohinsakupa.
He
of
has
erected like
heaps of his renown these two
pillars,
one at Maddoara, and another at the village
Rohinsakupa
temple of the god Jina, which des-
V. 22.
This illustrious Kakkuka piously has caused to be built

this imperishable
troys sin and creates happiness.
Iv.
" has boldly destroyed by Hre."
V. 23.
l39
And he
has entrusted this temple to the community
presided over by the ascetics
Jamba and Arabaya

(?) in
(?)
and the merchant Bhakuta

holy Dhane&vara.
the gaccha of the
Jain Maharastri.
Extract No.
18.
From
story
of
Kalakacarya.
Jacobi
Z.D.M.G.
Vol.
34
(1880), p. 262.
Failing to influence Gandabhilla the wicked
King
of Ujjain,
who had
the nun Sarasvati conveyed into his harem, and then
refused to give her up, Kalakacarya, the saintly brother of
the nun, went abroad to contrive Gandabhilla's overthrow.

tara ca
kuo
vi
nauna niggao nayario
silri,
anavarayam ca
tattha je sa-
gacchanto patto Saga-ktilam
nama
jo
killam.i
manta,
te
Sahino bhannanti
samanta-'hivai sayala narintao Kalaga-siiri
da-vanda-cudamani so Sahanusahi bhannai.^

thio egassa sahino
io
samive, avajjio^ ya so manta-tantalhim.
ya annaya kayai* tassa Sahino siiri-samanniyassa harisabhara-nibbharassa nanaviha-vinoehira cetthamanassa^ samagao

vinnattam ca tena, jaha: " sami
Sahina
bhaniyara
: !
padiharo,
Sahanusahi-duo
duvare
" lahum pavesehi." pavesio ya vayanena antaram eva nisanno ya dinnasane. tao duena samappiyam uvayanam^ tam ca datthiiria nava-pausa^citthai."
kala-nahayalam
va
andhariyam
vayanam
Sahina.
tao
'
kuo
vi ^=kuto'pi.
'
nauna ^jna, JM. usually does not

'
cerebi-alise initial
cf.
n.
2
Saga-kula
the shore (land) of the Sakas

i.e.
for the
form
Asoga.
ahivai "overlord" Sahi-,9a/ii,

'
Pers. sah or Sahi.
This word, and
also mhan'âhi='PevR. sahansah

prasasti.
King
of Kings,' occur in the Allahabad
(Fleet,
Gupta
Inscriptions,
No.
I,
Samudra).
The context
there indicates the use of these

tion with the Sakas.
3
two terms
in the
West
of India in connec-
avajjio a + vrj.
* itas
6
'
ca-anyada kadacit.
'
busying himself
(cest).
6 T
'gift'
pausa
'
rains
'
(pravrm).
140
cintiyani
:
" hanti
kamam apuvva-karanam
uvalakkhijjai,' jao
sami-pasayani agayam datthuna jalaya-darasanenam va sihino

harisa-bhara-nibbhara jayanti
ta
sevaya, so sama-vayano
etth'
disai.
pucchami
karanam
'
'
ti.
antarammi
Sahi-purisar
:
damsiya-vidahare^ gao duo.
tao pucchiyain surina
" hanta,
' '
tena sami-pasae samagae kim uvviggo viva lakkhiyasi ? " bhayavam, na pasao, kim tu kovo samagao bhaniyam
:
jao
amha pahu
jassa
rilsai,
tassa
nam'ankiyam muddiyaiu
karanena
churiyam
patthavei.^
tao
kenai
eie
amho
'
varini*
^
:
rusiuna pesiya esa churiya.
ya appa amhehim ghaiyavvo
ugga-dando
vi kassa vi
sira pi
tti
kaiina
:
surina btianiyam
?
na tav-vayane viyarana kayavva." "Kim tujjha ceva ruttho, uyahu ^ annassa

*'
:
"
sahina bhaniyam
mama
vajjiyanam anne-
pancanauf-rainam, jao disai chan-nauimi imie satthiyae

tti.''
anko "
surina jampiyara: "jai evara, ta

tena
ma
appanain
kula-
vinasehi."
bhaniyam
" na
pahuna
jai vi
rutthena
kkhayam antarena
chuttijjai';
mae puna maena
sesakulassa
khemam
vaharesu
bhavai."
^
surina bhaniyam: "
evani, taha vi
:
niya-dilya-pesanena pancanauyam pi rayaiio

'"
jena
:
tao tena pucchio duo, jaha Hinduga-desam vaccamo." " bhadda ke te anne paiicanaui rayano, jesini kuvio devo ? "
!
tena vi savve niveiya.

pesiya patteyain"
tao diiyam visajjiiina savvesim

jaha:
pi
niya-diiya,
" samagacchaha
mama
samive,
ma
niya-jiviyaim pariccayaha,
aham savvattha bhah-
hanti=:hanta.
nvalakkhijjai pass, of uvalakkhei (wpa +
//>>').
-vidahara apparently "rogues' hall" {*vita-ghara).

patthavei
'
sends' cans, {pra stha).
*
f>
uvarim=uvari.
eie ins.
fem.
'
with
this.'
ghaiyavva
fut. part,
from caus. of han.

for the
6
T
uyahu
or
'
{utaho).
chan-nauinil 96th.
satthiB
9Gth.'
'weapon'
{.sastrika) .
'
numher
of
this
*
weapon appears as
vaharesvi
'
chuttijjai pass, chut cut off, leave off
cf.
H. chutnti,
oluitti.
summon
'
'
(vi-â
I"
Hinduga=Fers. Hinduk.
'
+ hr). vaccimo
"we
are going."
"
severally
pro/i/eiom.
ssami."
'
141
tao te dupariccay-anlyattanao^ pananam savvasamaggim kauna agaya jhadatti^ tassa samivam, te ya samagae datthuna tenavi pucchiyii surino " bhayavarii kiiii " saamhehiin sampayani kayavvam?" surihim bhaniyain
: :
bala-vabana
tao
ettli'
uttariuna
Sindhum vaccaha Hinduga-desam.

*
samaruhiuna
janavattesu
samagaya
Surattha-visae.
tao
antarammi
tti
ya
samagao
pausa-samao;
duggama
raagga
kauni Surattha-visao channaui-vibhagehim vibhan-
jiuna thiya tatth' eva.
[Then came the Autumn elaborately described.] evamviham ca saraya^-kala-sirim avaloiiina niya-samihiyasiddhi-kamena bhaniya te Kalaya-surina, jaha: "bho, kim evam nirujjama citthaha ? " tehim bhaniyam '* aisaha kim puno karemo " surina bhaniyam " ginhaha Ujjenim, jao tie padibaddho pabhuo Malava-deso tattha pajjattfe tumhanam nivvaho bhavissai." tehim bhaniyam: "evam karemo: parain n'atthi sambalayam, jamha eyammi dese amhanam bhoyana mettam ceva jayara." tao surina joga-cunna-ca/mw/zz/a-metta-pakkhevena suvanni-kaiina savvam kumbhakara -vaham bhaniya:- " eyam sambalara ginhaha" tao te tarn vibhanjiuna savva-samaggie patthiya Ujjenim pai.** antare
:
: : "^
''
ya
je
ke
vi
Ladaya-visaya-rayano, te sahetta
tao
"^
patta Ujjeni-
visayasandhira.
Gaddabhillo
parabalam
agacchantam
take care
bhalissami
or
fut.
of
bhalai=bharai., either from ,yhhr
of
'
from smr through *mharai.

iti.
,
*
i
:=duhparityajanlyatvat.
jhat
*
&
janapavatta " vessel" {yanapatra)

saraya
'
92.
autumn
'
'
{sarad).
'
nivvaho
abundance, liveUhood
(nirvuha).
pajjatti
'
sufficiency
{paryapti).
"^
sambalayam
cunna
'
'stores, supplies' (sambalam).

'
jamha
abl. sing,
{yas
mat) used adverbially

^
since.'
powder' H. cun.
cahuntiya
(?)
Unexplained.
^
if>
Tpa,i=prati.
sahetta gerund of sahei=sahai (âsati)
'
telling,
summoning.'
Ladaya,
i.e.
Lata=S. Gujerat.
142
SO una
raahabala-samaggle niggao
pi
patto ya visaya-sandhim.
tao
donham
dapp'-uddhara -sennanam laggam aohanam,'

Translation.
When
came
the sage by
some channel came
to
know
of this,
he
departed from the city, and travelling without stopping he

to the land called the
Land
of the S'akas.
is
Those who
overlord of
is
are chiefs there, are called Shahis, and he that
the chiefs, the crest-jewel of the whole bevy of princes,

styled ShahanshahT.
Then the Kalaka sage abode with one of the Shahis, and won his favour by charm and spell. Now once upon a time when this Shahi was with the sage and full of
the porter entered and
great delight was passing the time with various amusements,
made
this
announcement, "
is
My
lord, a
messenger from the Shahanshahl
standing at the door."
The Shahi said: "Bring him in at once." At the word he entered and sat down on the seat given him. Then the messenger handed over a present. At the sight of this the Shahi's face grew black as the sky at the beginning of the rains. Then
thought (the sage), "Well, surely this seems an extraordinary
thing; for servants
their master
when they
filled
see a
mark
of favour sent
is
by
become
I will
with great joy
but his face
black
Meanwhile the messhown him by the Shahi's Then the sage asked " Come now, why do you seem people. He distressed at the coming of a favour from your lord? " replied: "Your Reverence, this is no favour, but a mark of For with whomever our king is his anger that has come. wroth, to him he sends a dagger marked with his name, so for some reason or other being wroth with us, he has sent this dagger; and with this same must I slay myself. His word The may not be gainsaid under pain of dreadful punishment.' said: "Is he wroth with you only, or with some other sage
as thunder.
ask him the reason."

(?)
senger went
to
the quarters
"
also?'"
sides
The Shahi said: "With ninety-five other kings bemyself for the weapon is marked with the number 96."
'
\\ddhavi\=uddhura.
acihana
'
l)attlo
'
(5
+ j/wdA).
INTRODUCTION TO PRAKRIl".
:
143
Quoth the sage " If that is so, do not do away with yourself." The other said " When the king is enraged, he does not stop short of destroying a family, but when I am dead, the rest of my family will be left in peace." The sage said: " If that is so, send the word to all the ninety-five kings by your own messenger, that you are going to the Hinduk country." Then he questioned the messenger thus, " Good sir, who are the other " five and ninety kings with whom His Majesty is angry ? He gave all their names. Then dispatching a messenger lie sent his own message to them all severally, saying, "Come to me, do not abandon your lives, I will take thought for everything." Then they came to him straightway with all their gear, for it is hard for a man to abandon his life, and seeing they had arrived, he asked the sage: " Your Reverence, what are we to do now ? " The sage replied " Cross the Indus with troops and transport and go to the Hinduk country." Then they embarked on vessels and reached the district of Surat, and in the meanwhile the rainy season arrived. Then finding the roads were difficult, they divided the district
: :
of Surat into ninety-six parts
and stayed there.
Observing the glory
of
the
autumn season
as described above,
the Kalaka sage, with the desire of fulfilling his

to
own
wish, said
them: "Ho, why are you idling here?" Said they: " Direct us what we should do." The sage said: "Capture Ujjain, for that is the key to the there you will find subsistence in abunMalava country dance." They said " We will do so but we have no supplies, for in this country we have obtained barely enough to eat." Then the sage turned all the potters' stuff into gold by simply sprinkling it with magic powder and said to them
;
:
" Take this as supplies."
So they divided
it
and with
all
their gear set out for Ujjain.
And meantime all summoned and arrived
the kings of the Lata region, these they

at the frontier of the Ujjain country.
of the
Then Gandabhilla, hearing
approach of a hostile army.
144
all complete and reached the frontier. between the two armies swelling with pride,
went out with a great army
Then began a
battle
Ardha-Magadhi.]
Extract No.
19.
Udayana.
[Jacobi No. Ill, Portions.]
(p.
28
tenam kalenain tenam samaenam Sindhu-Soviresu
jaiiavaesu Viyabhae
namam
nagare hottha
'
raya, Pabhaval devi.
tise jetthe
putte Abhii
hottha.
hottha; niyae bhainejje'^ Kesi
nama
Udayane nama nama juvva-raya se nam Udayane
raya Sindhu-Sovira-pamokkhanam^ solasanham janavayanam
Viyabhava-pamokkhanam tinham tevatthinara nayara-sayanam* Mahasena-pamokkhanam dasanham rayanam baddha-
maudanam
raisara-talavara-pabhilnam
evam ca tava eyam.
The tale then switches into Jain Maharastri and tells of Kumaranandi the uxorious (' itthilolo ') goldsmith who collected 500 wives at 500 of gold apiece, and was chosen as their
lord
*****
ahevaccam
scripture language), of his conversion.
tae nani se
sing, in e
sing.
viinna
seya-camara-vaya-viyananam annesini ca
kunamane
viharai.^
by the demi-goddesses of Five-Rock Island.
Eventually
the story comes round to Udayana, and we are told in Ardha-
Magadhl
(p. 32.)
(i.e.
salae
I
Udayane raya annaya kayai posahapakkhiyam posaham sammam padijaposahie ege abie
being a characteristic of this
Viyabhae=F*to6Aa2/o, iiom.
Prakrit,
per.sons
* 3
hottha 3rd
aor.
atm. of ho=bhava, used also of other
and numbers.
'
bhainejja
sister's
son
'
{bhagineya).
niyaya=niya
'
own
'
(nija).
pamokkho (pramukha).
tevatthi
'sixty-three'
.30.3
(also
tosatthi)
saya 'hundred'
/âta
112,
Apparently means " of

6
towns."
seya
'
viinna
'
bestowed'
pi.
(vi-^tr).
'
'
white'
(.weta).
vlyana
rSisara
'
fanning
'
[vlj).
annesim gen.
ahevaccani
of other
.
(M. has annanarn).
princes
(rajeSvara).
A-a."
talavara " chief " talaro in Dei-nama-mala=" na<;ardraA".*a

'
overlordship
'
(ad/iipatyam).
kunamane atm.
pres,
part, of kunai.
145
garamane
pajjittha
^
viharai.'
tao
tassa
puvvaratta'varatta-kala-sa-
mayanisi jagariyam karemanassa eyaruve ajjhattliie samup:
dhanna nam
te crama-nagara, jattha
;
nam samane
Vire viharai,
je
dhammam
kahei
dhanna
nain te ralsara-pabhiio,
samanassa Mahaviraasa antie kevali-pannattani dhammaia
nisamenti,-'
evam panea'nuvvayam sattasikkhavaiyam savagaduvalasa-viham* padivajjanti, evam munda bha-
dhammam
hhagavam
vitta agarao
anagariyam pavvayanti.^
tarn jai
nam samane
ih'
Mahavire
puvvanupuvvim
tae
diiijjamane
eva
Viyabhae agacchejja,'' ta nam aham avi bhagavao antie munde

bhavitta Java pavvaejja.
eyaruvam ajjhatthiyam
viharai.
janitta
nain bhagavam Udayanassa Campao padinikkhamitta, jen'
eva Viyabhae nayare, jen' eva Miyavane ujjane, ten' eva

taoparisa'' niggaya
Udayane
ya.
tae natii
Udayane
vaya--
Mahavirassa antie
si:*
dhammam
3occa liattha-tutthe
evam
jam navaram jettha-puttam rajje ahisiilcami, tao nam tubbham antie pavvayami. sami bhanai ahasuham, ma padibandham karehi tao nam Udayane abhiogiyam hatthi-rayanam
:
!
duruhitta** sae gihe agae.

I
tao
Udayanassa eyaruve
^ 74.
ajjhatthie
kayai
'
kadaoit.'
posaha 'fast' (upavasatha)

'
a-bie 'without
a second.'
pakkhiyam
'
lasting a fortnight.'
sammam
'
(samyak).
padi-
jagaramane
^
keeping
'
vigil.'
'performing religious duty.'

second half of the
'
puvvaratta
first
part of the night, avaratta

pres. part,
night.'
karsmana atm.
cf.
from
karei.
eyaruva
of this form.'
ajjhatthie 'thought'
(adhyatmika).
samuppajjittha.
aorist
(sam+ud
-^pad)
^
hottha
hear
'
'
was.'
kevali
'
'supreme or absolute knowledge.'

(ni
-pannattarn (prajnaptam).
for laymen. Jain duvalasa twelve."
'
nisamenti
+
+ sam).
{anuvrata)
:
aauvvayam 'ordinance'
bhavitta gerund
commands
technicality,
^
sikkhavaiya 'precept' {*siksapadika).

112.
'
agara
'
house.'
puvvanupuvvim
parisa
'
in
succession.'
diiijjamane
'
wandering
'
{du)
agacchejja, opt.
"J
community (parimd).
'
socca 'having heard' (srutva). cf. caccara = ca< vara. hrnta. vayasi spoke.' aorist {vad).
^
'
'^
J.M. hattha =
the heavenly service."

'
abhiogiyam (abhiyogika) sometimes a kind of deity " belonging to Here Jacobi suggests a state elephant, duruliitta having mounted' (*uduruh for ud + ruh). mucchie greedy (murch).
'
10
146
jae
;
jai
nam
Abhiiip kumararn rajje thavitta pavvayami, to
Abhii rajje ya ratthe ya Java janavae ya manussaesu ya kama-
bhogesu
mucchie
anaiyani
tarn
rajje
anavayaggani
samsara-kantaram
anupariyattissai.'
seyam khalu me niyagam bhainejjara

thavitta
pavvaittae.'^
Kesim kumarani
hetta
^
evam sampeya
sobhane
*
tihi-karana-muhutte
vayasi
:
kodumbiya-purise
saddavetta
evam
khippam eva Kesissa kumarassa

^
raya'bhiseyam uvatthaveha!
tao mahiddhle^ abhisitte Kesi
kumare raya jae Java pasasemane viharai. tao Udayane ray a Kesim rayam apucchai ahan-nam, devanuppiya,^ sam:
sara-bha'uvviggo pavvayami.
saddavetta
tao Kesi raya kodumbiya-purise
khippam eva Udayanassa ranno mah'atthani mah'ariham nikkhamana'bhiseyam uvatthaveha! tao mahaya vibhuie abhisitte siviy'ariidhe^ bhagavao samive
:
evam vayaai
gantuna pavvaie Java bahiini eauttha-chatth'-atthama-dasama-duvalasamas'addhamas'aini tavo-kammani kuvvamane*

viharai.
(p. 34).
tao
se
Udayane anagare bahOni vasani samanna'"
pariyagam paunitta satthim bhattaiin anasanae cheetta

'
jass'
anaiyam without beginning.' anavayaggani without end,' lit. having the point not bent.' anupariyattissai will wander through (anu + pari + vrt).
'
'
'
'
seyam
'
better
'
'
(sreyas).
pavvaittae,
infin.
sampehetta
having pondered over' (sam-^pra-k-iks).

is
This treat-
ment
of ks especially in the root iks
common
in
AMg. JM.
anuppeof
hantiânupreksante.
'
dsih\na=daksitia occurs also in M. and Saur.
* kodumbiya belonging to the family.' saddavettS, saddavei caus. of saddei nominal from sadda (âbda).
''
gerund
khippam eva (ksipram

:
eva)
before enclitic eva

caus. (upa-^8tha).
fi
juttani eva
AMg. regularly lengthens a of final am =yuktam eva (Pischel 28). uvatthaveha
iddhi
= rddhi.
sing,
1
^
**
devanuppiya, voc.
siviya
'
deva+anuppiya.
palki
'
{Hbika).
kuvvamSne
:
cf.
karemanas.sa and kunamane above.
'0
saiiianna abstract of
8amana (iframano). pariyaga wandering' means

'
paryaya another form is pariyaya. paryayaka, suggests *pariyava with ga

^'o
Pischel
for
doubts derivation from

-AMg. juvala
va
(cf.
= J/i<(/o/a).
fnl-
also
AMg. JM. pajjava=pan/a!/((
.j6.
pajjaya.
paunitta
havinu
atthae'
kirai
147
nagga-bhave mundabhave, tain atthani patte
javâ dukkha-pahine-tti.
nam Abhil-kumarassa puvvarattavaiatta-kala-samayevam ajjhatthie jae: ahani Udayanassa jetthaputte Pabhavaie attae mam rajje atthavetta Kesim rajje thavetta* pavvaie. imenam manusenam dukkhenam abhibhue samane^ Viyabhayao niggacchitta Campae Koniyara uvasampajjittanam viula-bhoga-samannagae yavi hottha.* se nam Abhil kumare samano'vasae* abhigaya-jivajive Udayanenam ranna samanubaddha-vere yavi hottha. tao Abhii kumare bahuim vasaim
tae
anisi
;
samanoVasaga-pariyagatn paunitta addhamasiyae samlehanae

tisam''
bhattaim cheetta tassa thanassa'naloiya-padikkante

kicca''
kalam
thii'^
Asurakumarattae uvavanno.
sijjhihi-tti.''
egara paliovamam
tassa; Maharidehe
Translation.
Udayana.
At that period and
at that very time there was a city Vita-
bhaya by name in the countries of Sindh and Sauvira. Udayana was the king thereof, and PrabhavatI his queen. Her eldest son was crown prince, Abhijit by name, and she had a nephew named Keî. Now that Udayana the king was wielding the overlordship of sixteen countries whereof Sindh and
filled' {pra-ap).
anasana
'fasting.'
cheetta 'having cut'
cf.
chettum
M. JM. chettiana
'
(*chtittetta chetetta).
atthae
'
on account
of.'
attae
'
son
'
{atmajah).
(stha).
^
^
thavetta, gerund cans.
samSne
'
'
being.'
uvasampajjittanam
gerund
{upa + sam-\-pad).
yavi (ca+api).
samannagaya
'pro-
vided with
<>
(sam-ânu + a + gmn).
'
samanovasaya
sarnlehana
'
lay believer.' mortification

'
<>
final
(before death) samlekhana).
tisam
thirty."
^
anSloiya
(A\r).
'
unrepented
'
(analocita)
padikkante
'
confe.s.sed.'
kicca
gerund
8 "
paliovama =palyopama, a very high number,

sijjhihi
thii
durance
'
^ 12.
will
be
fulfilled,' fut. of sijjhai.
148
of
Sauvira were the chief, of three hundreds

sîxty-three,
townships and
with Vitabhaya as the chief, of ten crowned rajas

the chief, granted the right of fanning
like.
of
whom Mahasena was

so
it
with white chauris, and of other princes, chiefs, and the
And even
was.
in the hall
Now
once upon a time that king Udayana fasted

all
of fasting,
alone, a fast that lasted for a fortnight, duly
performing his sacred duty.
Now
while he was keeping vigil
in the middle of the night there
as this
rich are those villages
came to him such a thought and towns, wherein the ascetic

the
ascetic
Vfra dwells, and declares the law; rich are those princes and
the like,
who
in the presence of
Maliavira
hear
the law perceived by absolute knowledge,
who accept the Five
Ordinances, the Seven Precepts and the Twelvefold Disciples'
Law, and stripped

into the Order.
of all leave their

If
homes, and homeless enter
now the
holy ascetic Mahavira wandering
from place to place should come here to Vitabhaya, then would I before the holy one strip me and enter the Order. Now
the holy one knowing this thought of Udayana's departed from
Campa and took up

and also Udayana.
as follows:
his
abode near that very town
of Vita-
bhaya, where the Deer-park was, and the community came out,
presence of Mahavira was pleased and delighted
"
Then Udayana having heard the law in the and spake

even now consecrate
I
I will
my
eldest son in the
kingship, and then will
enter the Order before thee."
master said: "Please
make no obstacle!"
The Then Udayana
mounted a splendid state elephant and went within his house. Then there came to Udayana such a thought as this: 'If now I put Prince Abhijit on the throne, and enter the Order, then Abhijit on the throne, in the kingdom and the country,
lusting
among
is it
the.
human
joys of
passion will wander along
through the wilderness

end, 80
of rebirth
without beginning, without

Prince Keiî on the
this over,
better to place
I
my nephew
throne before
enter the Order."
Having pondered
,
on an auspicious lunar day, half-day and moment he summoned the men of his household and spake thus: "Quickly prepare
INTRODUCriON TO PRAKRIT.
the coronation of Prince Kesi."
Tlien with trreat
149
pomp
Prince
Kesi became king, and continued reigning.
Then king Udaof the
yana took leave
of
King Kesi
"
now, oh beloved
gods,
disquieted by the fear of rebirth, will enter the Order."
Then
King KeÎ summoned the men

"Quickly prepare a
tion for
of
his
household and said

of initia-
rich
and sumptuous ceremony

eclat,
King Udayana. Then was he consecrated with great
and getting into a
palanquin went into the presence of the holy one and entered
the Order, and continued to perform
many an
act of penance,
those of the fourth, sixth, eighth, tenth and twelfth months,

those of the half-months and the
like.
Then that Udayana having

ascetic's
for
many
years fulfilled the
vow
of homeless
wandering, and in his fasting having
cut
a
off
sixty meals, he attained that end, for the sake of which

pain.
man becomes naked and shorn release from
Now
of
in
the
middle
:
of
the night a thought occurred to
Abhijit as follows
Prabhavatl.
am the eldest Setting me aside,

"
I
son of Udayana, the son
he has set Kesi on the
throne, and entered the Order.

trouble, he left
Overwhelmed by this human Vitabhaya and found his way to Konia in

was provided with plentiful enjoyments.
Campa where
he
Now
that Prince Abhijit was a lay believer with a knowledge
of the
Uving and the dead, and he retained an enmity against
the King Udayana.
Then Prince Abhijit having
for
many
off
years fulfilled the wandering of a lay adherent, having cut
thirty meals in the half- monthly final mortification, confessed

his
unrepented deeds of that stage and met his

prince.
fate, to
become
it
Demon
The duration
thereof
is
one myriad;
will
be
fulfilled in
great Videha.
Ardha-Magadhi.
Extract No.
20.
From
(180).
the Seventh Lecture of the
Uvasagadasao.
ujjaiie.
Polasapure
namam
nayare
Sahassambavane
Jiya-sattii raya.
150
(181).
Tattha nam Polasapure nayare Saddala-putte
'
namam
Ajiviya-saparivasai. kumbhakare Ajiviovasae pucchiy'atthe mayamsi^ laddh'atthe gahiy'atthe
vinicchiy'atthe abhigay'atthe atthi-mimja-pemanuraga-ratte"*
ya " ayara auso,* Ajiviya-samae
atthe
ayam param'atthe, sese anatthe " tti enain appanam bhavemane viharai.
(182).
Ajiviya-sama-
Tassa
nam Saddalaputtassa
nihana-pautta,
Ajiviyovasagassa ekka
hiranna-kodi
ekka
vaddhi-pautta,
ekka pavitthara-pautta, ekke vae dasa-go-sahassie-
nam vaenam.^
(183).
Tassa nain Saddalaputtassa Ajiviyovasagassa Aggimitta
namam
(184).
bhariya hottha.
Tassa
saya
nam
Saddalaputtassa Ajiviyovasagassa Polasa-
purassa nayarassa bahiya panca kumbhakaravanahottha.
Tattha
nam bahave
purisa
dinna-
bhai-bhatta-vejana
kallakallim*
vahave karae
ya
varae ya pihadae ya ghadae ya addha-ghadae ya

'
Ajiviovasae,
'
an adherent, follower (upasaka) of the Ajivikas.'
The
Ajivika sect was founded by GosaJa, the son of Mankhali, a contemporary

of
Mahavira.
Gosala's doctrine was " that there
tion or labour or
is no such thing as exerpower or vigour or manly strength, but all things are
unalterably fixed."
^
Uvasaga-d, VI.
S
160.
(Vide Hoernle's note. 253.)
"
in the doctrine," loc. sing.
92. v.
:
:
3 mimja, 'marrow': Panjabi minjh, mijjh SindhI miju Guj. mij. H, migi (Skt. majja). Hoernles translates " being filled with a passionate
love towards
for the
them as tor the most excellent thing," i.e. as in his note '* marrow of bones." The marrow is rather the physical basis
' '
as
of
passion, not its object.

* auso longlived voc. (Skt. base ayusmat) used as a title of respect. Hoernle, following the commentary on another passage, takes ayamauso
together, this being the form of address used

^
by a teacher
to his pupil.
vae
'
herd
'
(vratah).
6 it
'
bhai 'hire' (bhrti) veyana 'wages, salary' (vetana).
Hoernle takes
"received food
in
lieu
of wage.*;."
Compare however bhrtyannam

*
board and wages.' It would appear that their salary comprised food every morning.' For and wages. Kallakallirn (Skt. kabjam knlyam) ending, compare puvvini (=punnm).
kalasae
karenti,'
151
ya alinjarae ya jambulae
anne ya
se
ya uttiyao ya
jd'va
bahave purisa dinna-bhai-bhatta-
veyana kallakallim tehim bahuhim karaehira ya

uttiyahi ya raya-magwamsi vittitn
ranti.
(185).
kappemana
viha-
Tae nam
se
Saddalaputta Ajiviovasae annaya kayai

gosalassa Matikhaliputtassa
puvvavar'anha-kala-samayarasi jeneva Asoga-vaniya

teneva uvagacchai,
-ttd'''
antiyam
viharai
(186),
dhamma-pannattim
uvasampajjittanam'^
Tae nam tassa Saddalaputtassa Ajiviovasagassa ege deve antiyam paubbhavittha.*
(1
S7).
Tae nam
Java
se
deve antalikkha-padivanne sakhihk hiniyaim
Saddalaputtam Ajiviovasayam evam " Ehii nam, devanuppiya, kallani iham maha-mahane uppanna-nana-damsana-dhare 'tlyaparihie
vayasl.
paocuppanna-m-anagaya-janae^ Araha
Jine
Kevall
savvannu savva-darisi te-lokka-vahiya-mahiya-piiie,

sa-deva-manuyasurassa logassa accanijje vandanijje
sakkaranijje
sammananijje
jdva
kallanam
mangalam
tacca-^'
devayam
1
eeiyam''
pajjuvasanijje,^
karaka " water- vessel, esp. one used by students or ascetics."

*
M.W.
varaka
kind of vessel,' pitharaka 'pot. pan.' ghataka H. gharS, kalasa

alinjara
'pitcher'
("small earthen water jar" M.W.), jambulaka and

Hoernle.
gacchai, -tta
uttiya
^
'
three very large kinds of jars.'
-tta after a
verb stands for the corresponding gerund,

'
gacchai. gacchitta
3
he goes, and having gone.'
*
''
Gerund from uvasampajjai (upa -^ sam + pad). atm. aor. of paubhavai {pradur -^bhii) appeared.'
'
'tiya-
'past' (atlva), paccurpanna.

'
'present' {prati
+ ut
-^-
pad)
-m-
sandhi consonant, anagaya
future.'
Text has padupanna
for
padup-
panna,
6
7
*
i.e.
*
padi
+ uppanna.
'
ceiya
sacred
lit.
=:caitya sacred shrine.
'Worshipful' (prati-ûpa+as).
tacca
'
meritorious."
Comm.
Cf.
sa,y=tatlvja so also
,
Heraacandra
(
II. 21
but Pali has taccha.

*tattva
Otherwise irom
tattva.
Pischel
true.'
281) says rather
through *taUya.
Romani tatcho='
152
lNTROI)UCTION TO PRAKRIT.
kamma-sampaya-sampautte
dejjahi
tarn
nam tumam
padiharienagi
'
vanpi-
jdva
pajjuvasejjahi,
dha-phalaga-sijja-samtharaenarp
Doccaiii pi taccam pi
uvanimantejjahi."
-tta
evam
vayai,
jam eva disam
paubbhile tarn eva disani padigae.
Hearing of the arrival

(190).
of
Mahavira
Tae nam
se Saddalaputte Ajlviovasae imise'^ kahae laddhatthe samane " evam khalu samane bhagavam
Mahavire jdva viharai, tani gacchami nam samanam
bhagavam Mahavlram vandami -ttd nhae evam sampehei

'
;
;a?;a
pajjuvasami,"
payacchitte
"*
jdva
saddhappavesaim
kiya-sarire
jdva appa-mahagghabharanalarisao''
manussa-vaggura''-parigae
-ttd
gihao
padi-nikkhamai,
Polasapuram nayarani majjham

-ttd
majjhenaTp niggacchai,
ujjane jeneva samane
uvagiicchai
karei
ttd -ttd
jeneva Sahassambavane
bhagavam Mahavi'ro teneva

ayahinam
payahinain
-ttd
tikkhutto''
vandal naraamsai
jdva pajjuvasai.
Mahavira addressed the company and accepted

Saddulaputta's hospitahty.
(195)
Tae nani se Saddala-putte Ajlviovasae annaya kayai
pratiharika "a Jain technical term, meaning ready for the use of some one.' " Hoernle.
I
'
what
is
always kept
* 3
imi8e=M.
sampehei
imie, imia J.M. imie,

'reflects'
in
imae
6.
imae.
(sam-^pra + lk/f).
kkh
kh
^
rites.
'
h.
This
change occurs
*
both AMg. and JM.

'
Comm. z=praya.icitta
is
'
expiation,'
\)y
i.e.
prpcautionary
Another
'
interpretation
^
touched
the feet,' chitta from chivai

'
touch
(ksip).
'
Comm. Auddhdtma-vaimkani
'
(clothes)
fit
to adorn a purified person
or Auddha-pravcyf/mii
*
''
clean and
fit
for entering a king's court.'

").
vaggura
sao
'
'
crowd' (vugura "

his
toils
'
from
own
'
(sra), giha
house' (so also JM. commoner geha).

or trikrtvah).
Cf.
tikkhutto
'
'thrice'
(*trii^krtrnh
AMg. dukhutto,
dukkhutto
twice.'
\^f\y n\<'\<nH.\n
i'\'nhinnin
= u-d(tkKina-pradakiiiuam.
INTRODUCTION TO PICAKUIT.
l-'^S
vayahayayam kolala-bhandani anto

ninei, -itd
(196).
salahinito bahiya
ayavamsi dalayai.'
Tae nam samane bbagavam MahavTre Saddalaputtani Ajlviovasayaip evam vayasi. " Saddalaputta, esa ^ nain kolala-bhande kao "
?
(197).
Tae nam se Saddalaputte Ajiviovasaye samanam bbagavam Mahavlram evam vayasi. " Esa nam bhante
puvvim mattiya
ttd
asl,
tao paccha
udaenam
;
nimijjai;
-ttn
charena ya karisena ya egayao misijjai

;
cakke
arohijjai
tao
bahave karaga ya jdva uttiyao ya
kajjanti."
(198).
Tae nam samane bhagavam Mabaviro Saddalaputtam Ajiviovasayam evam vayasi. "Saddalaputta, esa nam kolalabbande kim uttbanenam jdva purisakk<\ra-parakkamenam kajjanti, udahu anuttbanenam jdva " apurisakkara- parakkamenam kajjanti ? Saddalaputta maintains tbat they are made without
effort,
etc.
because
effort
does not exist, but he
is
refuted and convinced.

Translation.
(180).
There was a town called Polasapura.

the garden Sabassambavana.
Near
it
there
mas
Jiya-sattii
was king.
(ISl).
There
in the
town
of Polasapura lived a potter
named
Having
Saddalaputta, a follower of the Ajiviyas.
heard
of,
and acquired a knowledge
of
the tenets
of the Ajiviyas, and having questioned, determined
and mastered the meaning thereof, he became enamoured of these with a passionate love suffusing the verv marrow of hir^ bones and continued to
'
ayavanisi 'in the heat of the sun
'
(atape).
'
dalayai. coram. =dadati,
also dalai (dalami) usual

*
''
form
in
AMg.
foi*
gives.'
kao
'
from what'
(ktttah,i.e. *ka-tah), S.
'
kado. a man."
cf.
p\ivisakkaTa=punisat kara
as can be
made by
balakkara
=balat-kara.
Ordinary Skt. word purum-kara. Pali puri.sa-kara.
154
conduct himself
in
accordance with the doctrine of
the Ajiviyas, considering this to be the truth, the

highest truth, and
(182).
all
the rest to be false.

of the Ajiviyas,
That Saddalaputta, the follower
had
one kror of gold placed in deposit, one kror put out

at interest, one kror invested in estate,
and one herd
with ten thousand head of cattle.

(18S).
That Saddalaputta, the follower

a wife
of the Ajiviyas,
had
named Aggimitta.
tlie
(184).
That Saddalaputta,
follower of the Ajiviyas,
had
five
hundred potter shops outside the town

Therein a large number of
of Polasapura.
men
receiving
wages
in
the form of food and goods, used to

to
make from day
day numerous bowls, pots, pans, pitchers of three sizes and three sizes of water- jars and another large number of men, receiving wages in the form of food
;
and goods, used
to carry
on a trade on the king's
highway with those numerous bowls, pots, pans, pitchers of three sizes and three sizes of water-jars.
(185).
Then that Saddalaputta, the follower

hour used to betake
little
of the Ajiviyas,
at one time or another at the time of the
midday
himself
;
where there was a
grove of a&oka trees
this he did
and he was
living in
conformity with the law which he had

Gosala Mankhaliputta.
received in the presence o

(186).
Then
in the presence of Saddalaputta. the follower of
the Ajiviyas, there appeared a certain deva.

(187).
Then that deva standing

described above,
in raid -air
and decked out
(ow
down
to
"with small bells") spoke

:
thus to Saddalaputta, the follower of the Ajiviysw
" There
will
come
here to-morrow,
<)
beloved of the
devas, a great Maliaiia,
knowledge and
insight,
is
who possesses fully formed who knows the past, present,
and future, who
an Arhat, and Jina. aKevalin,
155
who knows
at,
all
and sees
all,
who
is
rapturously gazed
dwellers in the
adored
and worshipped by the
three worlds,
who
for the world with devas,
men and
asuras is an object of worship, praise, lionour, respect and service as something excellent, auspicious, divine
and sacred [and
so
on),
who
is
furnished with an
abundance
praise
of meritorious
works, him shouldst thou

to
(and as
above,
down
"wait upon") and
hospitably invite to a standing provision of stool, plank and bedding." A second and a third time he
and having done so he returned direction whence he had appeared.

said this,
(190).
Then
*****
that Saddalaputta
,
;
in
that
the follower of the Ajiviyas,
" So being informed of this news thinks to himself:

then the Ascetic, the blessed Mahavira {and so on, down to) is paying a visit here I will go and praise
the Ascetic, the blessed Mahavira, and
I
will
{so on,
dovm
to)
wait upon him."
Thinking thus he bathed
and (as before) performed precautionary rites, put on clean robes, adorned his person with a few costly
jewels,
and surrounded by a crowd of men-servants Having come out, he passed the midst of the town of Polasapura. right through Having passed through he approached the place, where there was the Sahassambavana Garden where
came out of his house.
the blessed Mahavira was, and having approached, he circumambulated him three times from left to
Having done so he praises him, and worships him and (having praised him, and worshipped him, and so on, down to) he stands in waiting upon
right.
him.
(195).
Then that Suddalaputta, the follower of the at some time or other brought out his
potter's ware from within his workshops
:
Ajiviyas,
air-dried
and having
done so placed
it
in the heat of the sun.
156
(196).
Then the
Ascetic, the blessed Mahavira, spoke thus unto Saddalaputta, the follower of the Ajivias, " Saddala-
putta, what
(197).
is
this potter's
ware made
of
"
Then that Saddalaputta,

follows:
it
the follower of the Ajiviyas,
spake unto the Ascetic, the blessed Mahavira, as
"This ware was at first clay, and after kneaded with water; and then it is thoroughly mixed with potash and dung and then it is placed upon the wheel and thence are made many
that
is
;
bowls {and the

(198).
rest
as before).^
Then the
Ascebic, the blessed Mahavira, spake thus unto Saddalaputta, the follower of the Ajiviyas: " Saddalaputta, is tliis potter's ware made with
to)
exertion and (so on, down
manly strength,
or
is it
made without
strength?"
exertion and {so on,
down
to)
manly
Ardha-Magadhi,
Extract No.
Jinacaritra
21.
being
part
of
the
Kalpastitra
ascribed
to
Bhadrabahu.
Edited by Jacobi.
(56).
Tae
'
nam Siddhatthe
khattie pacci5sa-kala-samayamsi
-tta
kodumbiya-purise saddavei,
(57).
evam vayas!
'
"khippam'^ eva,
bho Devanuppiya
*
ajja
savisesam
bahiriyam uvatthana-salam-^ gandhodaya-sittam suiyasammajjiovalittam
sugandha- vara- paiica- vanna-
pupphovayara^-kaliyam kalaguru-pavara-kundurukkaturukka- dajjhanta-dhuva- maghamaghanta-gandh-ud-
J.
reads tate
fil.
in this
and some other
places.
Other MSS. have
tae.
'
Vide page
*
assembly-room, pavilion.'
cleaned
'
'
{ûc)
'
swept (aavi+mri) and

'
'
smeared
'
{upa +
lip).
'
uvayara 'decorations, festoons' (upa + kr).
INTRODUCTION TO PKAKRIT.
157
dhuyabhiramam
'
sugandha-vara-gandhiyaii) gandha-
vatti '^-bhuyani kareha karaveha, karitta
ya karavitta
ya sihasanam rayaveha,''
-tta
'
main eyam anattiyam
khippam eva paccappinaha.*

(58).
Tae nam
te
kodumbiya-purisa
kattu:^
Siddhatthenam ranna
tti
evam vutta samana,

karayalajdva
hattha-tuttha-/ava -haya-hiyaya,
"evam sami!"
-tta
anae
vinaenam vayanam padisunanti.
Siddhatthassa
jen'eva bahi-tta
khattiyassa antiao padinikkhamanti,
-i/a
riya uvatthana-sala, ten'eva uvagacohanti,
khip-
pam eva
jen'eva
-tta
savisesara bahiriyam uvatthana-salam gan-
dhodaya-sittam sum-jdva sihasanam

Siddhatthe khattie, ten'eva
rayavinti,
-tta
uvagacchanti,
karayala- pariggahiy am dasa-naham sirasa vattam
anjalim kattu Siddhatthassa khattiyassa
tam
anat-
tiyam paccapjiinanti.
(59).
Tae riam Siddhatthe khattie

nle,
-
kallain
pau-ppabhayae raya-
phull'uppala kamala- komal'ummilliyammi aha-
pandure pabhae. rattasoga-ppagasa-kimsuya-suya-muha-gunj 'addha

-
raga-sarise
''
(bandhujivaga
"^
parava
na-calana - nayana -parahu3'a-suratta-loyana-jasuyana-
kusuma
aguru
rasi
himgulaya - niyaraireya -rehanta - sarise)
'
'
aloe.'
cf.
maghar.ta
xiddh'ita.
'^
Pb.
'
kundurukka olibanum.' turukka incense.' maghamaghna burn,' H. maghan redolent.' uddhu\-a=

' '
'
'
dhQva
'
incense.'
vatti (varti).
'^
rayaveha
2nd
have prepared
'
caus. {rac).
'
+
^
plur. imperat. of paccappinai

infin.
returns
'
denom. from pratyarpana

'
kattu (kartu) originalh'
used as gerund krtva.

(kitnsuka).
..
ppagasa (prakasa).
{suka).
;
kimsua " Butea frondoaa
suya
.sayasiare,
"parrot"
nijjao
gunjaddha.
with
The
eonstrucfcion
is
Siddhatthe.
abbhutthei
locative
absolutes
rayanie,
pabhae.
dinayare, andhayare, jlvaloe.

"^
handhujlvaka " Pentapetes Phoenicia."
paravana
'
pigeon
rose.'
'
"
(paravata).
parahuya 'cuckoo' (parahhrta).

*
jasuyana 'Chinese
'
hingulaa,
cinnabar.'
nikara
'
mass.'
alireka
excess."
rehanta
shining.'
158
kamalayara-sanda-bohae
'
utthiyammi sure, sahassa-
rassimmi dinayare teyasa jalante, (ahakkamena uie

divayare, tassa ya kara-paharaparaddhammi andhayare,
balayava-kunkumenam
khaciya
vva
jlva-loe)^
sayanijjao abbhutthei.
(60).
-ltd
paya-pidhao paccoruhai,* -Ud jen' eva attana-sala,*

uvagacchai,
-ttd
ten'eva
-ltd
attana-salam
anupavisai,
anega-vayama jogga-vaggana-vamaddana-mallasante
parissante
juddha-karanehim,^
hassa-pagehim "
saya-paga-sapinanijje-
sugandha-tilla-m-aiehim
him divanijjehim mayanijjehim vimhanijjehiin dappaniijehira

gie,"
savv'indiya-gaya-palhayanijjehijii
abbhari-
tilla-cammamsi niunehim padipunna-pani-paya-
sukumala-komala-talehim purisehim abbhangana-pari-
maddan-uvvalana-karanaguna-nimmaehini
"
cheehitn
jiya-
dakkhehim patthehim
kusalehini
mehavihim"
"' parissamehim atthi-suhae manisa-suhae taya suhae roma-suhae cauvvihae suha-parikammanae samva-
hanae samvahie samane avagaya-parissame attanasalao padinikkhamai.

(61).
-ttd
jen'eva
majjana-ghare, ten'eva
uvagacchai,
-ttd
bohae
'
awakening' (bodhakab).
'
aha-kkamena aparaddha hara).

i
"^
in
'
due time
'
{yatha-krameua).
paliaia
'
blows' (pra.sun."
driven away' (apa
+ radh).
balayava 'young
khaciye, text has khaciya.
descends (prati-âva + ruh).

attana-sala
'
gymnasium
'
meaning shown by context.
Kadambaii
mallajuddha,
has vyaySma-6ala.
^
vaggana 'jumping.'
saya-pagaabbhaiigie
'
vamaddana (ui-t-a+mordona).
hundred times
'
wrestling.
<
1
refined a
'
'
(âta-pakor),
anointed
oldgf.
(Skt. abhyakta vân/).
Mg. abbhahgide JM. abbhahgio retain the prlnaniya soothing.' madanlya invigorat'
'
ing.*
8
"
brmhanlya
nirmata
cheka
*
'
'
nourishing.'
-prahladaniya refreshing.
'
experienced.'
udvalana
'
stretching.'
clever.'
praHha
pre-eminent.'
medhavi
'
intelligent.'
10
tayS 'skin'
{*ii:aca
= tvak).
INTBODUCTION TO PRAKRIT.
majjana-gharam anupavisai,
-tta
159
sa-mutta-]alakula-
vicitta-mani-rayana-kottima-tale* ramabhirame' nhana-mandavaipsi, nana-mani-rayana-hhattinijje cittamsi'^ nhana-piclhamsi suha-nisanne pupphodaehi
ya gandhodaehi ya usinodaehi ya suddhodaehi ya

kallana-karana-pavara-majjana-vihie
majjie,
tattha
kouya-saehim* bahu-vihehiin kallanaga-pavara-majjapamhala-sukumala-gandha-kasaiya-luhiy'navasane

ange
^
ahaya-sumah'aggha-dusa-rayana-susamvude
''
sarasa-surabhi-gosisa-candananulitta-gatte
sui-mala-
vannaga-vilevane"*
aviddha-mani-suvanne
"^
kappiyaka-
har'-addhahara ^ -tisaraya-palamba-palambamane
di-suttaya-kaya-sobhe
piniddha-gevijje " angulijjaga-
laliya-kayabharane
''
vara-kadaga-tudiya-thambhiya-
bhue'âhiya-ruva-sassirie kundala-ujjoviyanane'* mauda-ditta-sirae har'otthaya-sukaya-raiya-vacche

'^
mud-
diya-pingal'-angulie
palamba-palambamaria-sukaya-
pada-uttarijjenana-mani-kanaga-rayana-vimala-mah'ariha-niunoviya-misimisinta- viraiya-susilittha- visittha-
naddha-aviddha-vlra-valae;
1
"^
kim bahuna:
kappa-
jala
lattice
'
windows
'
of stone work.
'
2
'^
kottima
'
mosaic pavement
{kuttima).
bhatti (hhakti),
variegated decoration, arabesques.'

'
*
5>
kouya pleasure (kautuka). pamhala long-haired -downy

'
'
(paksmala).
kasaiya
'
dyed
red.'
lii-
hiya
6
1 *
**
'
dried'
(luifita ?).
ahaya 'new'
gosisa
'
(ahata).
dma
'robe'
'
(cf.
dusya
'
tent, cotton').
cow's-head
a rich sandal
(varnaka).
vannaga
kadi
'
sandal
'
hara " necklace
of eighteen strings."
tisaraya ' of three strings."
'0
hip' (kati).
suttaya,
belt
'
(sutraka).
'
" piniddha 'put on' (pinaddha).

12
15
graiveya
collar.'
kaya
'
pair
'
'
{kaca).
kadaga bracelet'
ujjoviya
(kataka).
tudiya
'
bangle'
(trutika).
'* 16
16
lighted up' (nd-^dyut but Pischel

'
243 refers to ^dyu).
otthaya
covered with'
(ava->r8tr), cf.
M. otthaia (ava + sthoe).

onomatopceif
oviya 'decorated.'
mieimisinta 'shining brightly,'
denominative, taken into Sanskrit as mifjamisayate.
Pischel
588.
160
rukkhae ceva alamkiya-vibhiisie nar'inde sa-korinta-
malla-damenam
vara-camarahim
sadda-kayaloe
chattenam
dharijjatnanenam
'
seya-
uddhuvvamanihim
raangala-jaya-
anega-gananayaga-dandanayaga-raisa
ra-talavara-madambiya-kodurabiya-manti -mahamauti-ganaga-dovariya-amacca-ceda-pidhamadda - nagaranigama-sitthi-senavai-aatthavaha-duya-sandhipala

^-
saddliim samparivude dhavala-mahameha-niggae iva gaha-gana-dippanta-rikkha-tara-ganana majjhe sasi
sihe abbhahiya-raya-teya-lacchie
vva piya damsane nara-vai nar'inde nara-vasahe naradippamane majjana-
gliarao padinikkhamai.
(62).
a jen'eva
-ttd
bahiriyauvatthana-sala, ten'eva uvagacchai,

^
slhasanamsi puratthabhimuhe
nisiyati.
(63).
-ttd
appano uttara purattbime disi-bhae attha bhaddaseya-vattha-paccutthuyaim*

-ttd
sanaim
siddh'atthaya-
kaya-maugalovayaraiin rayavei,
appano a-durasanha-
samante nana-mani-rayana-mandiyain ahiya-pecchanijjara
inah'aggha - vara -pattan'

-
uggayarp
patta-bhatti-saya-citta
-
tanam ^ iharaiya - usabha

-
tu-
raya nara magara-vihaga-valaga-kininara -ruru-sara-
bha -camara kunjara vanalaya paiima -laya - bhatticittam'* abhintariyam javaniyam aiichavei,^ -ttd na-
na-raani-rayana-bhatti-cittani
attharaya-miu-masu-
'
uddhuvvaraana 'shaken" {ud + dhu), dhuvvai

This
list
!;
l.'i.").
of
personages
may
be
interpreted
variously,
ralsvara
(raje^vara)
Comm. z=ijuvaraid.
'
Jacobi S.B.E.
'kings,
princes'
danda-
nayaka 'judges.'
Jacobi 'satraps,' talavara 'bodyguards,'
J. 'knights.'
'
madambiya
masters.'
^
sheriffs.'
ptthamanda
'
parasites, companions,' J.
dancinsi;
purattha
'
ea.st
'
(purastat).
'
*
^
pacciitthuya=paecutthaya 'covered
(prati
'
+ava+str).
sanha
'
smooth
"
(alaksna).
i'i/ala(ka)
tana
'
thread
'
(tana).
*
T
ihamrna
wolf.'
'
'snake
-lava laya
= /a/a.
amchavei
has drawn.'
rag'
161
-otthayam
'
seya - vattha - paccutthuyarp

visittham
-tin
su-
mauyam
anga-suha-pharisagam"'^
Tisalae
khattiyanie bhaddasanain
purise saddavei
(64).
,
rayavei,
vayasi.
kodumbiya-
-ttd
evam
"khippam
eva, bho Devanuppiya! atth'atiga-mahani-
mitta-sutt-attha-dharae
viviha-sattha-kusale suvina-
-lakkhana-padhae saddaveha.
Translation.^
(56).
Then the Kshatriya Siddhartha

called his family servants
at the
time of daybreak
:
and spoke thus
(57).
" Now, beloved of the gods, quickly to-day

or
make ready
have made ready in

(see
all
particulars the outer hall of
audience,
that
it
be)
sprinkled
with scented
water, cleaned, swept and newly smeared, furnished
with
offerings
of
fragrant,
excellent
flowers
of all
five colours,
made
highly delightful through curling,
scented fumes of black aloe, the finest kundurukka
and
into
turushka,
and
burning
incense,
exquisitely
as
it
scented with fine perfumes,

a scent-box
;
and turned and having done all
were
this arrange
my
(58).
throne, and having done this report to
me
quickly
the execution of these orders."
Then the family servants, on being thus addressed by the King Siddhartha, with glad, pleased and {so on down to) enraptured hearts, saluted (as before down to
'
on their heads
'
and
'
:
.politely
accepted the words of

1
the
command
saying
Yes master
'
Then they
left
the presence of the Kshatriya Siddhartha, and went
'
attharaka
'
coverlet.'
{a-^str).
masi?ra{fca)
'
pillow.'
^ ^
mauya
'soft' (mrduka), pharisaga (sparsaka).
translation
The Kalpasutra was translated by Dr. J. Stevenson, 1848. That however is not accurate. The standard translation is that of Hermann Jacobi's Sacred Books of the East Series, vol. XXII, p. 241ff.
This has been modified here only to
make
the text clearer to the student.
11
162
to the outer hall of audience and quickly they
(made
ready) in
all
particulars the outer hall of audience,
sprinkled with scented water, cleared {and so on) and
prepared the throne.
Having done
this they repaired
to the place where the Kshatriya Siddhartha was,
and
joining the palms of their hands so as to bring the ten

nails together, laid the folded
hands on their heads

of
and
reported
the
execution
that
order to the
Kshatriya Siddhartha.
(59).
Then on the morrow wlien the night was growing light, when the pale morning disclosed the soft flowers of the
full-blown lotuses, and the sun arose
;
in
hue
like the
bill
red a&oJai, the open rottlesia kimsuka, a parrot's

or the
gufijdrdha, intensely bright like the bandhu-
jlvaka, like the eyes

.
and
feet of a turtle-dove, the
cuckoo's scarlet eyes, a mass of China roses or a lump

of vermilion, the
waker
of the lotus pools
and the
in his
maker
risen
of the
;
day thousand-rayed was shining

in
radiance
due time the maker of the day had the blows of his hands the darkness was and by
when
driven away, and while the inhabited world was, as

it
were, dipped in saffron by the morning sun,

his bed,
the
it.
Kshatriya Siddhartha rose from

(60).
and having
risen he
descended from the footstool, went
to the hall for gymnastic exercises
and
entei'ed
And
with
many
lie
strenuous exercises such as leaping,

'
massage and wrestling
he became thoroughly tired,

of
and then
fragrant
was anointed with various kinds
oil, distilled
a hundred or a thousand times,
which nourished, beautified, invigorated, exhilarated,

strengthened and increased
all
senses and limbs.
On
an oiled hide he was shampooed with soft and tender
palms
of the
hand and
soles of the feet,
by clever men
who were
1
well acquainted with the best qualities of
Jacobi renders: "jumped, wrestled, fenced and fought."
anointing, kneading and stretching
ful,
;
163
well trained, skil-
excellent,
expert,
intelligent
and never
tiring.
When by
fited,
this fourfold agreeable
treatment of the body
the kino's bones, flesh, skin and hair had been bene-
and
his
fatigues banished he left the hall for

(61).
gymnastic exercises and

entered therein.
ful
having taken his way towards the

In
a
bathing house, he
pleasant
bath-room delightpearls,
its
with
many windows adorned with
floor
decorated with a mosaic of jewels and
gems,
he sat
comfortably on a bathing-stool inlaid with
arabesques of various jewels and precious stones, and
bathed himself with water scented with flowers and perfumes, with tepid water and pure water, according
to
an excellent metliod
of
bathing, combined with
healthy exercises.
ing with
When
this healthy excellent bath-
many hundredfold pleasures was over, his body was dried with a long-haired soft scented and coloured towel, he was clad in a new and costly excellent robe, his limbs rubbed with fresh and fragrant
go&irsha
and sandal and adorned
witii
line garlands
and sandal-ointment.
He
put on jewels and gold,
and and one with a pendant and adorned himself with a zone. He put on a necklet, rings and ciiarming ornaments for the hair, and encumbered his arms with splendid bracelets and bangles. He was
three strings
hung (round
his neck) necklaces of eighteen, nine
His face was illuminated by head with a diadem. His breast was covered, decked and adorned vîth necklaces, his fingers
of
exceeding beauty.
his
earrings,
were gilded with his rings.

swinging with pearl
His
fine cloth
toga was
as
pendants.
He put on
an
emblem
of his
undefeated knighthood, glittering, well-
made, strong, excellent, beautiful armlets, made by

clever artists of flawless
and costly jewels, gold and

kinds.
precious stones of
many
In short, the kin
164
was
like a
Wishing Tree, decorated and adorned.
An
umbrella, hung with wreaths and garlands of korinia

flowers,
was held above him.
He was
fanned with
excellent
white chauries, while his appearance was
greeted with auspicious shouts of victory.
Surrounded
sheriffs,
by many
logers,
chiefs, judges, princes,
bodyguards,
heads of famiUes, ministers, chief ministers, astrodoorkeepers,

counsellors,
servants,
dancing
masters, citizens, traders, merchants, heads of guilds,

generals, leaders of caravans, messengers
and
frontier-
guards, he
the lord and chief of men,
a bull and lion
among men,
shining with excellent lustre and glory,
lovely to behold like the
moon emerging from

and
stars
a great
white cloud in the midst of the flock of the planets
and
of brilliant asterisms
left
the bathing
house,
(62).
entered the outer hall of audience and sat
down on
his
throne with his face towards the east.

(63).
On
the north-eastern side he ordered eight state chairs,
covered with cloth and auspiciously decorated with
white mustard to be set down.

,
Not too
It
far
from and
of the
not too near to himself, towards the interior

palace he had a curtain
drawn
was adorned with

in
various jewels and precious stones, extremely worth

seeing,
very costly and manufactured

its
a famous
town
soft cloth
was covered
all
over with hun-
dreds of devices and decorated with pictures of wolves,

bulls, horses,
men, crocodiles,
birds, snakes, kinnaras,

plants.
deer, ârabhas, yaks, elephants, shrubs and
Behind
Trisala,
it
he ordered to be placed for the K.shatriyani

witli
fur-
an excellent chair of state decorated
arabesques of various jewels and precious stones,
nished with a coverlet and a soft pillow, covered with
a white cloth, very soft and agreeable to the touch.
Then he
called the family servants
and spoke thus
INTKODUCTION TO PRAKRIT.
(64).
165
"Quickly,
of
beloved of the gods,
call the interpreters
dreams who know well the science

its
!
of prognostics
with
eight branches, and are well versed in

'
many
sciences besides
Magadhi.]
Extract No.
22.
S'akuntala.
Interlude at the beginning of Act VI.
p. 216).
(Pischel p. 113
M.W.
maha-
City -superintendent, two policemen and a fisherman.
Pohcemen.
Hande kurabhilaa kadhehi

!
kahini tae eê
ladana-bhaûle ukkinna-nam'-akkhale laakie anguliae sa-
masadide
Fisherman.
'
(Nervously) Pasidantu bhavamiSa! na hage idi-
sasa akayyas4a kalake."^

First Policeman.
laiina
Kiin nu kkhu ôhane bamhane

? ^
si tti
kadua
dhl-
de paliggahe dinne
Fisher.
S'unudha dava.
Hage kkhu S'akkavadala-vaî

kini
vale.*
Sec. Pol.
Hande padaccala
?
^
tumam amhehirn yadim
va-
sadim ca puScide
[Superintendent.
padibandhedha].*'
Suaa
kadhedu savvam kamena.
Ma nam
hande
'
cf.
hanta
'
go to
'
!
only used to inferiors,
kumbhilaa
thief
'
orig.
crocodile.'
ladana=6aur. radana (M. raana)

a6kala
or
57.
-bhaûla=
bhasura.
ukkmna,=:utklrna.
akkhh\a=âksara, according to
Gramma-
rians should
be
(Hemacandra) ahkala.
[h=jihvamuliya].
laakiye
'
royal.'
Pischel thought
we should read
laa-kelake.
samasSdide
(sam-â-^sad).
^ akayya [akdrya) crime.' MSS. akajjassa which is Saur. ^ lanna by the king.'
'
'
Pischel's text has akajja^â,

kei]ake
most
of his
= karakah.
*
'
Sakravatara, dhlvarah.
pataccara or pataccara
'
thief.'
yadim
text has jadirn like the
MSS.
Pischel Gr.
236 shows that
should be read in every case.
pucide=
(sue).
=laur. pucchido.
The Superintendent does not speak Magadhi.
Suaa
'
spy
'
166
Both.
Fisher.
INTRODUCTION lO PRAKRIT.
Yam
S'e
lautte anavedi.
Lavehi,
le
lavehi.!
'
hage
yala-badiâ-ppahudihim
raa^ca-bandhano
vaehim kudumba-bhalanani kalemi.^

[Supdt.
Fisher.
(Laughinq) Visuddho danim de ajlvo
!]
Bhattake
kila
ma evam bhana
vi
Sahaye
[Supdt.
Fisher.
ye
nindide na hu ê
kamma
vivajjaniake
paûmali kaledi kalana chakkamma-vidule
vi Lottie.
Tado, tado
?]
Adha
ekkadiaiâni
mae
lohida-inascake
khandaSo
kappide.*
yava tasâ udala-bbhantale edam maha-ladanapa4ca idha vikkaa'ttham
bhaûlam aiigullaam peskami.
nam damâante yyeva

dava edaSâ agame.
[Supdt.
natthi
{Sniffing the ring)
gahide
bhavami^Sehim.
Ettike
Adhuna maledha kuttedha

se
va.^
ti
Janua, macchodara-samthidam
vissagandho.
saradeho.
Tadha aam
Agamo
jjeva
danini
edassa
vimarisidawo.
Ta edha
le
raaiilani
gacchamha].''
Policemen.
[Supdt.
{To
the
Fisherman) Ga^ca
Go-ura-duare
ganthi-chedaa ga4ca.
Siiaa!
idha
appamatta
padivaledha
mam
Both.
[Supdt.
I
Java raaiilam pavisia nikkamarai].
Pavisadu lautte 4ami-ppaâd'attham.

Tadha].
{Exit),
lautte contracted from laautte
= Saur.
'
raautto (rajapufrah). or = Apa.
raauttu, Bihari raut (rajaduta). vide Grierson, Phonology.

^
*
ySla
'
net.'
baliâ
hook.'
raaica
fish.'
kalemi=Saur.
(in
karerai.
âhaya
(so/!a;a).
rivarjanlya mB.\\ = '^maraiiam.^'
kalana = A*arar!a/
six
kainma long
Lottie =irotriy ah
*
for
metre, vidule
'
skilled
'
the
occupations).
lohida-
'
Roh
'
Saur. rohido,
'
M. rohio
(?),
Apa. rohiu, Hindi rohu.

324).
khandaô kappide (kalp)

candra and others this
to another authority
is
cut into pieces."
peskami, according to Hema(Pischel Gr.

!j
the correct form.
.According
and the Lalitavicraharaja-natakani it should be pe4kami. Text has pekkhami. vikkaattham in order to sell' maledha imperat. of m8ledi = marf''
'
yati.
kuttedha imperat. of kuttedi (kartayati).
Januka
'
Policeman's
*
name.
vissa=tnsra
'
raw
''
flesh.'
vimarisid&yvo=i^marstavyah
cut-purse.'
'musty'; Comm. amisa must be investigated.'
ganthi-chedaB
Spy.
IB?
Janua
cilaadi lautte.'
Januka.
Spy.
Nam
avaiSalovasappania khu laane honti.^

(Pointing
to the fisher-
Janua! sphulanti me agscahasta.
Fisher.
man) imam ganthichedaam vavadedum.'^ Nalihadi bhave akalana-malake bhodum.*

(Looking round) FAe amhanaip
i4ale
Jan.
patte genhia laa-
saSanam.
(To the fisherman) S'aiilanam muharn peskasi,

ball bhavii^âsî.^
adhava giddha-sialanam
[Supdt.
Fisher.
(Entering)
Siggham siggham edain (drops

(in distress).
his voice)].
He hade mhi
Muiioedha
re
[Supdt.
kila
muficedha jalovayivanatn, uvavanno se
anguhaassa agamo.. amha-samina jjeva
me kadhidam].
Spy.
Yadha anavedi lautte. Yama-va4adim gadua padiniutte khu eie. (Releases the fisherman).
(Saluting the Supdt.)
(falls at
Fisher.
Bhattake tava
kelake
mama
ylvide!
his
feet).'^
!
[Supdt.
Utthehi, utthehi
Eso bhattina aiiguliaa-mulia
sam(Gives
mido paridosio de pasadikido.

the
Ta genha edam]
fisherman a bracelet).
(Receiving
it
Fisher.
with delight)
Anugahide mhi.
Jan.
Eê khu
lanfia
tadha name anugahide
yam 6ulado,
odalia
hasti-skandham âmalovide.^
Spy.
Lautte! paHdoîe kadhedi mahahha-Iadanena teni ahguliaena Samino
bahumadena hodavvam
ti."^
cilaadi
'
'
is
a long time.
offers
"
^
5
Kings must be approached as occasion
(upa+srp).
Similarly
(vi-\-a+pad).
sphulanti 'quiver.'
Text phulanti but see Pischel31l.
*i
310 for -hasta (text hattha).

*
5
vavadedura
fish.
infin. caus.
na+alihadi
âiila
(arhati).
(" sakula")
kind of
Thet-e
are
various readings here.
Pischel aays=^svakulanafp,.
6
kelake = kerako the prototype of genitival affixes like -kero -ker- er.
'
yivide
^
life."
odalia
(of.
odara
'
75)=avatarya.
âmalovide
past
'
part.
caus.
(aam+a+ruh).
tion to
S
Mounted on the withers of an elephant denotes high dignity (M W.). Text has hatthi-kkhandham.
eleva-
mahaliha=ma^dr?/a.
168
[Supdt.
Nain tassim bhattino mahariha-radanani
ti
na paridoso.
Ettikam una
Both.
[Supdt.
].
Kim nam a 1
Takkemi
vi
tassa
ti,
damsanena ko
asi].'
vi
hiaa-tthido
jano
bhattina sumarido
jado tain pekkhia rauhuttaain paidi-
gambhiro
Spy.
Jan.
pajjussua-niano
Toîde danim bhatta lauttena.
Nain bhanami ima^â ma^cali-sattuno kide

jealously at the fisherman).'^
tti
{looks
Fisher.
Bhattaka
ido
addham
tumhanam
pi
sula-mullain
bhodu.
Jan.
Dhlvala
vutte'î
mahattale âmpadam
kadambali-saddhike kkhu
me piavaas^âke 4ampadhamam amhanam

i
6ohide i^cladi.
Ta
4unclikagalain
yyeva ga^camha.^
{Exeunt omnes).
Magadhi.
Extract No.
23.
Sthavaraka
(Mrcch. Act X).
Enters along the roof and in chains.

{Listens to the proclamation in distress).
Kadhani apave Caludatte vavadiadi

bandliide.
Hage
nialena ;amina
Bhodu! akkandami. S'unadha, ayyasunadha. Asti danim mae pavena pavahana-padivattena Puspa-kalandaayinnuyyanaiii Vasantasena nida. Tado mama isamina main na kameî' tti kadua, bahu-pasâ-balakkalena malida, na una edina ay yena. Kadham ? Viduladae na ko vi sunadi. Ta kirn kalemi ? Attanaatp paclemi. (Reflecting) Yai evvam kalemi, tada ayya-Caludatte na vavadiadi. Bhodu. Imado panada
'
balagga-padoli kado edina yinna-gavakkhena attanaain nikkhi-
'
p&i(ii=.prakrti.
pajjussiia (paryutsuka)
cf.
cf.
41.
;
ma^cali
'fish,"
Hindi machli
Sindhi
raachdi
MarSthi masli
from a popular diminutive

3
of maccha=matjj/a
56.
'
mahattale t-ompar. of mahat-.

'feast
kadainbali, kadamba
toddy.'
dad-
dhike
enjoyment'
(sagdhi).
ôhide z=sauhrdam
or
sauhityani.
dundikagala 'grog-shop.'
vami.
169
Balani hage uvalade, na una eie kula-putta-vihaganaiii
vAâpadave
ayya-Caludatte.
Evvara yai vivayyami laddhe

!
mae
hi na uvalade rahi. Bhagge me danda-niale. Ta candala-ghosam ilamanneSami. apave sinless.' vavadiadi, pass. caus. (vi + d + pad), iiialena
palaloe.
(Throws himself down) Hi
'
'
with a fetter
'
'
(nigada).
malida
S'.
marida.
-balagga-
'
dove-
cot
(?)
[vdldgra).
padoUka
{pratoli)
'gateway'
(vide Vogel,
J.R.A
S.,
July,
cf.
190(5).
gav'akkha
'
bull's-eye,'
round window
or loophole,
i.e.
'
French
(Ace.
oeil
de
hoeuf meaning 'bull's-eye,'
window.'
gavahka).
Grammarians should be gava4ka or uvalade 'done for' (upa ratah). padave 'tree.'
vivayyami
world.'
(text
vivajjami)
(vi
+ pad),
pala-loe
'
the
other
Magadhi.]
Extract No.
24.
S'akarah (Mrcch. Act X).

{Entering in great
glee).
Mamsena tikkhamilikena bhatte

âkena upena sa-maseakena bhuttam mae attanaa^â sehe
sali^â
kulena gulodanena.'
Candalavaae
âla-
(Listening)
Bhinna-kamâ-khankhanae
Samyoe.''
Yadha
a eê ukkhalide vaj^â-dindima-âdde pada-
hanam a
sunladi, tadha takkemi, dalidda-Caludattake vajjhatti.^
tjhanam niadi
Ta
peskiîam.
S'attuvinase
nama mama
bhuttam mae
oi
'
'
have dined'
imll).
cf.
(bhuj).
tikkha
'
pungent' =tlksna.
*
(Possibly tihkha
tilkha would be better Mg. ).
amilika
acid,'
cf.
'
tama-
rind
(amlika
cf.
H.
bhatte 'food,'
ruva.
'rice.'
bhakta
H. bhat.
SiTpa,
would expect
kula
' '
îiva
attanaaâ a
'
later
form than attano,

intonation.'
36.
2
food, boiled
rice.'
guJodana
of
treacle porridge' (H. gur).

(svara)
'
Sala-samyoa
combination
'
accents.'
'
vsa
'
speech.'
^
kamia
goblet, gong' (kanisya
brass,' etc.).
ukkhalide 'raised.'
khal
'move
or shake.'
vajjha 'of execution.'
vadhya.
Proper Mg. said to be vayyha.

-ttana ace.
The combination yyha suggests

-stana.
that Mg. y differed from the usual pronunciation of "^ in the direction
of zh.
Hemacandra should be
170
INTROOUCTION TO PRAKKIT.
hodi.'
mahante hajakkassa palidoSe

sattuni
S'udain a inae, ye vi kila
vavadaantatn
na
hodi.
pi
peskadi,
tas4a
anna^sim jammantale
ahkhi-roge
via
Mae khu visa-ganthi-gabbha-pavistena

antalam maggaraanena uppadide taha
kidaena
kiin
dalidda-Carudattaha vinaê.^
da- balagga-padolikae
Sampadaiu attanakelikae pana-
ahiluhia attano
look) Hi,
!il,
palakkamam peskami.^
{Does
so,
vajjham
and has a niamanaha
edaha dalidda-Caludattaha
evaddhe
yana-samraadde,
ESe 6e
yam
velain
amhaliSe pavale vala-raanuA'ie vajjham niadi tarn velam keliSe
bhave
via
? *
{Looking again)
Kadharn
disani
nava-baladdake
kiraniraittain
mandide dakkhinam
? ^
niadi. ^
Adha
mama-kelikae pa4ada-balagga-padolikae samlve ghosana nivadida, nivalida a

vi natthi idha.^
bhavi^Sadi.'*
{Looking round) Kadham Stavalake cede Ma nama tena ido gadua raantabhede kade Ta yava nam annesami. {Descends and comes
!
forward)
Servant.
{Catching sight of him) Bliattalaka, eê 6e agade
Executioners.
Oâladha, dedha maggain, dalam dhakkedha,
hodha tunhia,
avinaa-tikkiia-viâne du^ta- bailie ido
edi.'*
This character
is
supposed to speak a dialect Sakari
(see
'
^
^ +
hadakka is the usual form also halaa. halaka (in verse) *hrdaka. Textakkhi (Pischel 24). Uidaa insect (Al(aA:a). viâganthi ? a plant.
;
'
ahiluhia (abhi-^rtih).
balagga {vide Ex. 23

e-
evaddhe 'so great' (JM. evaida ovaddaga)
'
not from evain. but
trom *ayat (Pisch.

yanarSarnraadda
kidr.ô.
^
*>
149, cf. *ayat
+ tya
-*ayattia
6ttia) vaddha = vrddha.

keliê
press
of
people.'
pavale = Saur. pavaro.
baladdake
nivadida
'
bull'
(cf.
balivarda).
'!
dahkinam.
caus.).
(ni
+pat).
nivalida
(m + y.r
'
^
^ ^
Stavalake (text thavalake) {Sthavaraka).
raantabhede
'
breach of counsel,'
betrayal."
kade
= krto.
dhakkedha
I.
'
oSaladlia (apa or ouo+r).
dalam 'door'
cf.
(Saur. duaram).
'shut'
from ilhakkedi
'shuts,'
Pali
thaketi
from
-vidana
an O.
'
root
bailie
like *8thak, cf.
H. dhaknS, tlhaknS 'cover
shut.'
is
horn
"
bull," Apa. baillu,
modern.
bail.'
Candali
sometimes spoken
of as a
separate dialect, and classed
aij
an Apabhramâ.
next extract).
This passage however appears to be in
171
much
the same kind of Masadhi as spoken by other characters.
Mag-adhi.]
Dialect.
Extract No.
Sakari.
25.
Mrcchakatikam.
(a)
Act
I, V. 18.
cyistha Vaântaênie, cyistha,

kini yaî, dhavatî, palaaSi
paskhalanti
vasu pa^lda na
niali4ai, cyistha
hit
dava
kamena
cyisthn, = tistha,
dajjhadi
me hadake
raaniiâ
tavaSÎ
angala laî-padide via

Pischel
khande
and
ii
Grammar
weak y
c
24,
217 quotes
the commentator Prthvidhara as the authority for the form
ycistha,
and
in
general a
before c: he
j
also quotes
Markandeya
cyistha
for a
weak y
before
and
in
Mg. and Vracada
Apabhraraâ: Mg. ycilain
= c^>am,
yjaa = jaya.
The
spelling
may
be explained as the substitution of the familiar cy
^
but
for the strange yc ^"^.
At the same time

'
it
may
be noted
that no one knows
cannot be
if
how 'ycistha should be pronounced. We positive how "^ was pronounced in old Magadha
;
it
resembled any modern pronunciation, or any sort of
palatal stop with an ofif-glide, one could
stand a weak y being heard

to a distinct
after
it.
Very probably the
more readily under^ was

it.
used to mark a peculiar way of pronouncing ^, not amounting
sound either before or after
(So the h
in
English
wh does not
represent a separate sound either after w,
or before
as written in old English hiv, but the surd equi-
valent of the sonant w).

(Cowell,
p.
The reading
of V'âraruci's rule
XI, 5
179)
is
doubtful, but
it evidently refers to a
method
of pronouncing
not to the addition of a distinct sound.

f skhal).
paskhalanti (pra
should remain.
According to the grammarians .sÂ

mali4aSi
S'aur.
Text pakkhalanti.
has cittha, which
is
= S'aur.
'
marissasi.
H. and
(?
P. text
dajjhadi
is
burned.'
dayyhadi).
hadake 'heart,'
the
prose
form
is
hadakke
172
INTRODUCTION TO RRAKRIT.
194
ta.vsbm
(*^rrfaA;a) Pise liel
= tapasir.
Iaî
=rdH.
mamâ
= mdmsa.
Verse 21.
Mama maana-raanangam
nisi
vammaha'ii vaddhaanti
askivanti
i
a aanake
me niddaam
pasalaiî
bhaa-bhida paskhalanti skhalanti
mama vaâm
Vammaha so in
has
anuyada Lavana^êva kunti

Saur.
II
M. and Mg. verses.

niddaa 'sleep,' skh remains.
'
mammalia),
sk.
askivanti
is
mammadha. (Text = aA;stpaw/t. Ks

impossible),
becomes
form).
(Text has akkfiivanti, the a
paâ-
\a,&i = prasarasi
(Text has anujada the Saur.
LavanaiSsa
of
Ravana.'
The student
will
probably
find the characteristic

in reading
change
for r the
most baulking feature
Magadhi
or its dialects.
Verse 23.
Esa nanakamiisi kama-kasika ma^casika lasika

ninnaâ kula-naSika avasika kamassa manjiiîka
e4a vesavahii suvesa-nilaa ve^ângana vesia
ese 6e dasa
'
i
namake mai
'
kale ayyavi
mam
kaîka
lasika.
ne^cadi
'
ndnaka coin.' milî, stealing.' mosi masca + aîka fish-eating.' (Text maccha).
'
whip.'
'
dancer.'
ninnaSa 'snub-nosed'
(nir
+ ndsa)
i.e.
'
of
low
caste.
(Text
kamassa = Saur.).
'of her.'
se = Saur. se these.' eê nom. pi. raasc. mai 'by me.' kala Mg. has also kada and (like
Saur.) kada.
Saur.).
(Text, like Northern
nescadi (na + icchati).
MSS. kale) (ajja Text has necchadi.
in
Text
is
Magadhi.
Dialect, Dhakki.
Extract No.
26.
Mathura and
Mathurah.
pallnu
paditto
the Gambler (Mrcch. Act
II).
Ale bhatta, daâ-suvannaha luddhu jiidakaru papapalinu.

si.'
Ta
genlia genha, cittha
cittha diila-
'
Gren. sing, in -aha
is
common
/
in
Mg.
stand.
cf.
dhah.
judakaru,
;
standard Magadhi yOdakaro.
nothing about
becomes //, the
may
hiddhu = rudAs Prthvidhara says The MSS. uive ; for Magadhi

aha
in .\pa.
INTRODTCTION TO PRAKKIT.
Gambler.
Jai vajjasi Padalam
jasi,
173
Indam salanam
vi
ca
sampadam
taladi.'
sahiam vajjia ekkam Luddo

M.
na lakkhidum
Kahim kahim su-sahia-vippalambhaa

palasi
le
bhaa-palivevid' angaa
pade pade sama-visamam khalantaa
kulam jasam adi-kasanam kalentaaii

G.
{Looking at his
foot)
Esu
vajjadi.
lam panatta
padavi.^
M.
{Looking doubtfully) Ale, vippadivu padu.
Padima-sunnu
deulu!
(Reflecting)
Dhuttu judakaru vippadivehim pa-
dehini deulu pavitthu.*
G.
Ta anusaremha.
M.
Evvam
bhodu.
to
{Both pretend
enter a temple.
Looking at one another
with comprehension).
G.
Kadharp kattamayi padima

Ale,
M.
nahu nahu, êla-padima.
Evvam
bhodu.
Ehi,
Notes.
yudam kalemha.
classes this dialect
Prthvidhara
in
Dhakkl
r),
as
an Apa/
bhramâ, with the phonetic peculiarities of prevalence of

(presumably as
standard Magadhi excluding
as well as palatal sibilant.
itself,
and dental
whether
S.
It is not quite clear
it
papalinu means prapalayitah

cittha, this
is
cf.
JM. palana.
cf.
M. has pallia
Mg.
palaida-.
(p. 171).
the same as in Saur.

in
cyistha.
yeistha above
genha cittha do not end
u like pasalu.
dulat-pa as in H.P.
text
I
is
impossible.
This verse as printed in the editions looks
much
like
M. except
for
'
âlanarp {^âranam) and one has salanam.
'Ruddo,
rakkliidurp, tarai
have been corrected. (Pischel Gr. 25). i khalantaa (skhal), no evidence whether Dhakkl followed Mg. in the treatment of skh. Text jasam the wrong sibilant, kalentaa pres. part.
;
kaledi = Saur. karedi.

8
Text
eso,
but esu
is
established elsewhere.
Mg. would be
eê.
vippadlvu
= vipratlpah.
:
seems to be a quotation
editions, beginning with
6
devakulam 82. The last sentence hence perhaps the mixture of forms in the
deulu
in Sauraseni.
Dhakki and ending

'
:
katthamayl
'
wooden
here y has been retained.
174
Features pointing to Apa-
followed Mg. in any other respects.
bhrarnâ stage are nom. sing, in u (masc. and neuter), imperative
2nd
it
sing, in u.
The MSS.
as usual fluctuate considerably
and
is
not always possible to determine the correct form
(assuming that the author wrote the dialect consistently),
Magadhi.
Extract No.
27.
Lalita-Vigraharaja nataka (Act
IV).
(Edited Kielhorn, Indian Antiquary, vol. xx, 1891).
Two Turushka prisoners meet

man.
a spy
who
is
a fellow-country-
Vandinau
sini
Ese
6e
S'ayambhalisala-!îvila-nive6e.'
kadhaiii
Edasyani*
alaskiyyamana-jaayyande
[laj-ulam
davvam.^
diSadi
?
{Purovalokya) Vaya^sa ese
ke
vi
*
chale
vva
Ta imado eda^sa
sivilasâ saliivam
laularn ca
yanisamha.
Carah A'^caliyam a^caliyam Alio Viggahala3-nalesala-;iilinam avayyandada.^ {Purovalokya) Amha-desiya vva kevi puliâ pc^kiyyandi. Yane vandihim edehim huvidavvam.
: !
Vandinau Bhadda, amhanam Tuluskauam deîye vva tumam peSkiyyasi. Ta kadhehi Cahamana-îvila-âlilvarii
:
laulam ca.
Carah
S'unadha
le
vandino
sunadha.
Hage Tuluskalaena
Tani ca d lisanivi
âambhalisala^â 6ivilani pe^kidurii peîde,

calain
vi
;
yado tatthastehim
tti
''
idale
puscande
ni[li^kan]de
kiinpi kiiiipi
a palakiye
yaniyyadi.^
Tadhavi raae
paccakkhikadam
'
SakambharUvara
chale
*
divila
= Sibira
=
S.
^
'
alakyamana- par y ante.

spy' (carah).
YSnidavvani
janidawani.
*
'''
Inscription has 65aluvatn (svarupain).
'boundlessness' (aparyantata).
idale
sill
nam
'
of glories
'
6.
idaro;
puscande
S.
pucchanto.
(ntr-fifc^).
ySniyyadi
should be
ySniadi.
"T
niliSkande
= 8.
nirikkhanto
cf.
pralyaknkrtam but
bhiSkain la^kidam below.
INTRODUCTION TO PRAKEIT.
175
Vandinau
Charah
A^caliam asscaliam
Kadham bhadda,
tattha uva-
stidanam cadulide anuam

:
pi tae la^kidam.'
daiu.
Sunadha le vandino yadha mae tarn Sivilam niluviHage khu sili-Sbmeâla evam peSkidum vannanda^â
sa^taâ milide, inilia a ettha paviiiuna bhi^katn paStidum

lagge.'^
Tado yam yam yanidam tam

'^
tarn
tumhanam
yahastam
kadhiyadu.
Maavali-ni;?^Za-kalala-kada8tala-
Tulunganam una laskam. Nalanam una ?/M;;Aa-!5kamanain daha la^kaim ti.' Kim vahuna yampidena ? Tasu kadaasâ pasu-stide aale vi suske bhodi.*^ (Bahum utksipya) Edam ca tam laulum.''
(iti
nam
kalindanain dava sahassam.*
dar&ayati).
:
Vandinau
Charah
:
Sahu
le
le
cala sahu
Ale
vandino cilam khu
me
Ta hage
vafifiami.'*
nia-stanado niâli-da^sa."
Vandinau
Vandinau
Gasca
le
cala ga^ca.
{iti
caro niskrdntah).
(Purato gatvdvalokya)
Tam nidam
laula-duvalam
ta idha stida eva nia-laa-ppahavam payaêmha.
{Punar
avalokya
sanandam) Ese
se
âambhalfâle
astana-stide
pulado disadi.
The Magadhi in this inscription is interesting because it follows more closely than any MS. the rules given by HemaAs the author Somadeva was a contemporary of candra.
cadulide
(?)
*caturite
from catura 'in
their cleverness."
la^kidam
= 6.
^
lakkhidarn.
Sotnesvaradeva
may
be the
name
of a prince -paviiiiana a
M. JM. or
,
AMg. ending,
>
*
pa^tidum
prarthayitum.
yathartham.
According to the rules should be yadhastain.
mada-vari-nirjhara nijjhala
M. nijjhara
should be niyyhala.
for
">
yujjha
is
=
'
yuddha
is
against the dialect,
daha
daâ according to
Pischel
"
?
wrong.
host.'
kadaa
(kataka).
Saale
'
ocean.'
niSâlida p. part
from
niiâladi {nih-^sr).
in class
!).
">
wander.'
*vrajnami
176
it
Hemacandra,
has been suggested that he
may have
been
acquainted with that grammarian, or at least with his grammar.
Some
errors
have been corrected
in the inscription itself, never-
theless there
remain forms which are not correct according to

e.g. nij jhala, j'ujjha,
Hemacandra,
is
yahastaip, paviîilna.
There
of
no reason to suppose that the stage kept up the correct form Magadhi down to the twelfth century, and this probably
represents an attempt to carry out the rules for
M agadhi
that
were traditional among the grammarians, more consistently

than usual in order to
,
make
of
the speech of the Turki prisoners

It is
and spies sound very foreign.

latest recorded
a curious accident that the

is
fragment
Magadhi
the most archaic in form
that has been found.
"Avanti."]
Extract No,
28.
and Ddksinntya.
Viraka and Caadanaka (Mrcch. Act

Virakah.
Are
re
VI).
are jaa-jaamana-candanaa-mahgala-phulla-
bhadda-ppamuha kim acchadha visaddhii jo so govala-darao baddho, bhettunasamain vaccai naravai-hiaam a bandhanam cavi
Ale, puratthime padoli-duare.
ii
Cittha
tumam.
Tumam
Jo
vi
pi
pacchime,
tumam
pi
dakkhine,
Ido
tumain
dava.'
pi uttare.
eso paara-khando, edatn ahiruhia can-
danena samaiii gadua avaloemi.
Ehi Candanaa,
ehi.
Candauakah.
Are
re
Viraa-visalla-Bhimahgaa-dandakalaa-
danda-sura-ppamuha
aacchadha visaddha turiain jatteha lahu karejjaha
Lacchi jena na ranno pahavai gottantaram gantuniH^
'
âur. acchadlia.
M. bliettuna. vaccai.
is
These
latter
however occur
in
a verse
of
gadua below
of tlie 6aur. type.
Ale seems to be a frag-
ment
i
Mg. out of place here.
visalla=ri-â/)/a.
avi a,
177
ujjanesu sahasu a
tain tain
magge naarla avane ghose
johaha turiam sanka va jaae jatthall

*
Re
re
Vlraa kirn kim darisesi bhanahi dava visaddham

haraiin
bhettuna a bandhanaam ko so govala-daraam

kass'
atthamo dinaaro, kassa caiittho a vattae cando,

^
ehattho a bhaggava-gaho, bhumisuo pancamo kassa?
bbana kassa jamma-chattho jivo navamo tabea surasuo jiante Candanae ko so govala-daraam harai ? *
Virakah. Bhada Candanaa Avaharai kovi turiain, Candanaa, savami tujjha hiaena
jaha addh-uida-dinaare govalaa-darao khudido.^
[Servant.
Yadhagona,
yadha.]''
Candanakah. Are re, pekkha pekkha. Ohario pavahano vaccai majjhena raa-maggassa edam dava viaraha kassa kahira pavasio pavahano
Virakah.
vahehi.
tti.''
Are pavahana-vahaa
Kassa-kerakam edam pavahanam

1
ma dava edam pavahanam Ko va idha

1
arudho
1
Kahim va
turidarn.
vajjai
turiam
6.
jatteha
in forml
6.
jattedha (yatadhvam).
loc. sing,
karejjaha
opt., pahavai, are all

-ia is
naarla
oblique fem. sing, in

?
common
)
in
M.
verses,
johaha (" yojayata" " anveâyata")

or
fut. of
(Apa.
joedi 'sees.'
{dyu)
Vyudh
to
"go
for."
jaae
= JS.
is
jayade.
used.
jattha relat. of attha

'^
= atra.
In other dialects generally jahirn

ehattho
sixth
darisesi " seest."
caiittho
'
fourth,' S. caduttho.
'
'
(of.
H. chata).
for
ggaho
'
'
planet.'
bhaggava
'
'
belonging to Bhpgu's daughter.'
gaho bhumi-
suo
*
son of the earth
= Mars.
surasuo
'
tahe&^tathaiva.
son of the Sun
'
= Saturn.
6aur. udida
:
5>
savami 'I swear.'

khudido
'
addh'uida 'half
risen,'
M. udia(?
removed' (" khanditah ") ? from a root khut. Not the same as S. khudida broken,' = *ksudita for ksumia. (Pischel S 568). 6 The servant speaks Mg. gono bull is the masc. form usual in AMg., Mg. For derivation Pischel suggests *gavana or *gurna. The first seems
read udia).
'
'
'
the
7
'
more probable.
oharia' covered' (opa
'
+ vr). pavah ana

viaraha
'
'
carriage.'
'
(pra + vah).
vaccai
'
goes
(of.
JM.
p. 123, n. 4).
ascertain
(vi
+ car).
pavasio
set
out' {pra-\-vas-=propita).
12
178
[Servant.
E6e kkhu pavahane
ayya-Caludattaha kelake.
Puspha-kalandaani
Idha
ayyaa
Vaântaêna
aludha.
yinnuyyanam kllidum Caludattas4a
niadi.]
Virakah
'
(going
wp
to
Candana).
ajja-Carudattassa
Eso pavahana-vahao bhanadi pavahanam Vasantasena arudha;

;
Puppha-karandaam jinnujjanam
C.
niadi 'tti,"*^
Ta gacchadu.
Anavaloido jjeva.
V.
C.
Adha im
V.
C.
Kassa paccaena
Ajja-Carudattassa.
V.
Ko
ajja-Carudatto
vajjai?
Ka
va Vasantasena, jena anavalo-
idam
C.
Are, ajja-Carudattara na janasi, na va Vasantaseniam
jai
ajja-Carudattam Vasantaseniam va na janasi, ta gaane
jonha-sahidam candain na janasi.^
Ko tam gunaravindam sila-miankam jano na janadi avanna-dukkha-mokkhara caii-saara-saraam raanani,

do jeva piiania iha naarie tilaa-bhOda a ajja Vasantasena, dhamma-nihi Carudatto
Notes.
of
a.*
Prthvldhara
s,
makes both characters speak Avanti,

it
which he gives only the jejune information that
possesses
the dental
and m, and
it
is
rich in proverbial sayings.
Mar-
kandeya describes
as a mixture of S'auraseni and Maharastri.
Such indeed appears to be the character of the dialect as given by the MSS. Candanaka however speaks of himself as a Southerner " vaam dakkhinattha avvatta-bhasino " 'We Southerners
MSS. and Editions have ja and jja for Mg. ya yya. Mg. kelake kerako. puspha (following Homacandra), MSS. vary. Usual reatling puppha. yinnuyyanam old garden.' Here we have the two Mg. genitives side by side.
1
=A
'
=2
There
is
no point
in
supposing V. mimics the
servant's dialect
especially aa he does not repeat his exact

C. in his usual language.
3
words
naturally he reports to
jonha
'
moonlight.'
'
cau-sSara-saraam
'
containing the essence of the four oceans.'
-nilii
treasury.'
speak indistinctly.
179
So Pischel thought
it
unlikely that Can-
danaka spoke AvantI, but more probable that he spoke Dakeinatya (Bharata 17. 48. Sahityadarpana, p. 173. 5). It would
appear that
this
was not very
different
from Avanti, and that

'
both were nearly related to Sauraseni.
vaam dakkhinattha
'
however would be
'
amhe dakkhinacca
Extract No.
'
in Sauraseni.
Jain S'auraseni]
29.
Pravacanasara.
(Portions of this were printed with Sanskrit version by R.
Bhandarkar
in
Appendix
III,
(p.
379
f.)
of
Report on the
Presidency
a complete
Search for Sanskrit Manuscripts in the
Bombay
There
is
during the year 1883-84.
Published 1887.
edition with several Sanskrit commentaries published at
Bom-
bay.
I.
Vira
(69).
Samvat
2438).
Deva-jadi-guru-piijasu veva
danammi va
susilesu
||
uvavasadisu ratto suhovaog'appago appa

(70).
Jutto suhena ada tiriyo va manuso ya devo va bhiido tavadakalam lahadi suham indiyam viviham
i
ii
(74).
Jadi santi hi punnani ya parinama-samubbhavani

vivihani
i
janayanti visaya-tanham jivanam devadantanam

(75).
Te puna udinnatanha duhida tanhahim

sokkhani
i
visaya-
III.
(13).
ya amaranam dukkha-santatta H Caradi nibaddho niccara samano nanammi damsaicchanti anuhavanti
namuhammi
(18).
pay ado mula-gunesu ya ajo so padipunna-samanno Havadi va na havadi bandho made hi(m) jive'dha kayacetthammi bandho dhuvam uvadhido idi savana chaddiya
ii
i
savvain
(19).
Na
hi niravekkho caii
i
na havadi bhikkhussa asaya-
visuddhi
avisuddhassa ya citte
vihiu
11
kaham nu kamma-kkhayo
180
cerebral w
is
The
scripts
used
initially
whereas AMg. JM. manuletter
prefer initial
(dental).
The
ya
is
used as in
other Jain MSS.
This Prakrit contains words and forms that are quite foreign
to ordinary
Sauraseni
bub
of
Magadhl.
Perhaps some
found in Maharastri or Ardhathe Sauraseni forms which are
allowed by Hemacandra, but never found in the dramas, are

derived from Digambara Texts.
(69).
(Pischel 21).
veva.
Editor suggests ye va.
Sanskrit version co/w.

in the use of
The MS. seems to have fluctuated ya and va. danammi loc. as in

dtmako.
(70).
a,dei
'
M. upayoga-
= dtmd,
'
i.e.
*dtd,
cf.
AMg. aya JM.

;
atta.
tiriyo
animal
{tiryak).
(74).
(75).
devaddntdndm.
tanha = tanha.
peculiarity
;
This
so
is
is
merely an orthographical
the spelling khk for kkh.
III. (13).
(18).
nanammi
uvadhido
'in knowledge.'
savana idi = iti. abl. of uvadhi (MpadA^). = sramandh, chaddiya should be chaddida (Piscliel vicchaddida, M. vicchad^ 291) = chardita cf.
S'.
dia,
(19).
cdiVi
AMg. JM. vicchaddiya.

cayo.
tydgo JM.
The ending
cf.
vihiu
is
exceptional and probably wrong, the mistake
being due to the influence of later vernacular.
Bombay
Edition has cayo and vihio.
Bhasa.]
Extract No.
30.
Svapna -Vasavadattam
Enter the Jester.
Jester.
{Oleefully) Ditthia taitahodo
(Act IV, p. 29).
Praveâkah.
Vaccha-raassa abhippedadittho.
vivahamangala-ramaniy/o
jaiiadi
kalo
Ko
nfuua edaiii
tildise
vayam
anattha-saji] avatte pakkhitta
una
ummajjissamo
tti.'
181
vasiadi,
Idanim pasadesu
andeura-
digghiasu hndiadi, palama-maiira-suumardni niodaa-khaj-
jmni
khajjianti
tti
an-Acchara-saravaso Utturakuru-vaso
mae
anubhaviadi.'^
Ekko khu mahanto doso,maraa

tti
aliaro
ria
sutthu na parinamadi, suppacchadanae sayyde niddaiii

labharai, jaha
vada-sonidam abhido via vattadi
pek-
khami.^
ca.*
Bho suhain ??amflt/a-paribhudam akallavattam

Enter a Maidservant.
Maid,
Kahim nu khu gado
ayâ- Vasantao
{Stepping round)
tattahodo should be tattha.

This
45. is
throughout for the dental.

Cf.
man gala. Cerebral common in MSS. written
is
written
in S. India.
(also
ramanlam,
p. 36.
allowed in
Saur.
vayam Saur. has amhe, Daksinatya vaam by Vararuci and Markandeya), AMg. vayam,
'
Pali
vayam.
2
ummajjinamo
we
shall emerge.'
andeura.
for-nt, so
influence
nhaiadi.
anteura is correct (as on p. 24) but MSS. often give -nd "Saundala" for Sauntala. This was probably due to the of Apabhramâ in which the change is common, hnaladi. Saur. The MS. has regularly hn and hm for )ih, mh. At first sight
;
this looks like a sign of antiquity
for h here represents s
and hna seems

in texts,
nearer sna than nha.
The
spelling
hm, hn however
is
is
found
where nh,
difference
mh
is
well estabUshed as correct.
Pali forms like ancient.
amhe, nahais
tako {=snatako)
show that the inversion

(as in
^Moreover the
between eg bamhano and

So hna,
Bhasa) bahmano
not very
great to the ear.
hma
vaa,y
be only orthographical variations,
palama =paramo. No apparent reason for I or Zhere. maiira for mahura (=madhura). This appears to be a mistake, p. 6 has mahura. suumarani = rairn. Neut. Plural in -arii occurs in AMg. JM. .j6. not in M. or
Saur.
3
In Pali
it
can be -ani as in Skt.
sayyae (:=sayyayam) M. AMg. JM. sejjae, Mg. êyyae.

//,
Here again
antiis
double yy for double

quity.
as in ayyaiitta,
might be taken as a sign of
Hemacandra
allows yya for rya in Saur.
The
spelling
occa-
sionally found in South
Indian MSS.
]\Iost
write only a circle
^c^
aa which, says Pischel, either allows a choice between yya and
jja, or is
intended to express a sound between the two.

case of Skt. yya there
is
(Pischel
284).
In the
jja.
no authority
for Saur.
having anything but
jaha
*
is
regular in M. (6aur. jadha).

' '
mistake,
namaya- amaya indigestion should be amaa in 6aur. it is an archaism, kalla-vatta breakfast.'

'
If
it
is
not a
182
.4/imo eso Vasantao.
(Approaches) Ayya\
Vasantaa!
annesasi
Ko
?
kalo
Jester.
tnmara annesami.'
!
(Looking) Kirn nimittaiu, bhadde
mam
Maid.
Jester.
Maid.
Jester.
Ahmanam bhattim bhanadi-avi hnddo jamaduo Kim nimittam bhodi, pucchadi ? Kim annam ? sumana-vannaain anemi tti.
Hnado
toWabhavam.
tti.'^
Savvam
?
anedu
bhodi vajjia
bhoanani.
Maid.
Jester.
Kiin nimittaiu varesi bhoanam
Adhannassa
mama
koilanam akkhi-parivatto via kuk-
khi-parivatto samvutto.^
Maid.
Jester.
Idiso evva hohi.
Gacchadu bhodi.
Java aham
Exeunt.
vi
tattahodo.
Saasam
gacchami.*
(Enter
Padmavati
with
retinue
and Vasavadatta
wearing
Avanti
Maid.
dress.)
Kimnimittam
va na
vetti.^
!
bhatti-daria Pamada-vanani aada
Padma.
ddyii
Haja, tani dava seh^lisi-guhmadni pekkhami kusamikusumidaru'
Maid.
Bhatti-darie
tani
nama,
paval '-antari-
dehiip via mottia-lambaehini aidant kusumehini.
Padma.
Maid.
Hala jadi evvam, kira danim vilambesi ? Tena hi imassim sila-vattae muhuttaam upavisadu bhatti-daria. Java aham vi kusumavacaam karemi.^
!
'
ayya, see note on sayyae above.
Ahmo
is
usual spelling
ammo,
ammo.
see
note on hnaladi above.

the spelling ahmo.
^
^
Telang's edition of the Malati-madhavam has
Another reading here
amme,
p. 10 htis
jamaduo
kukkhi
Java
is
CO.
belly.'
the ordinary form.
Ya does not appear
here,
ahampi would
be better.
6
guhmaa
for
reason
gulmaka") AMg. 6. Mg. yurama ^ 4S. There seems no " the spelling with hm. In the previous Act " guhmadu
{''
represents gumphadu, where the inversion
is
not archaic.
sil5-pattaka).
Hlapattaka 'stone
slab.'
(On
p.
3<i,
uvavisadu
is
correct 6aur.
So correctly uvarada,
p. 40.
a\aoaani, no ya appears here.
183
Padma.
Vasava.
Ayyel
Kim
ettha.
Mpavisamo
Evvam
hodu.
(They both
sit
down).
[The words in
italics
are not normal S'auraseni].
Translation.
Jester.
Hurrah
We
must congratulate His Highness King

But who knows that
chucked out
all
Vatsa on this happy occasion graced by the good auspices

of his intended marriage.
affair
in an
like
this
after being
?
in the sink,
we
shall
come up again
At present
through the palaces
they are dressing themselves, bathing themselves in the

private baths, and eating the sweetest, tenderest sweet-
meats
while
is
Nymph
to keep
may enjoy the arctic regions, without me company There's one thing about
!
a
it
that's very
bad
my food doesn't digest well, and

I
though
a
my
couch
piled with quilts
can't sleep, for seing the
Wind and Blood

Maid.
disease circling all around.

illness
Bah
to
?
it's
bad business, prostrate with
and
no
breakfast
Wherever
is.
has
worthy
Vasantaka got
Why
I
here he
My
good Vasantaka, how are you

lady, were
was
looking for you.

Jester.
And why, good
you looking
for
me
Maid.
Jester.
Maid.
Our mistress says Why do you ask lady What do you think ?
Surely son-in-law has bathed.

?
am
bringing the wedding paint
of course.
Jester.
Bring anything except food.
Maid.
Jester.
Why
do you bar food
I've got a twist in
my
poor belly like the squint
of
cuckoo.
Maid.
Jester.
May you keep

Fare you
so.
well.
I will just
go to His Highness.
Maid.
Why
has
my
mistress
come
to Cupid's grove
184
Ah,
I
Padmavati.
Maid.
am
looking to see
if
these vitex bushes are
in flower or not.
They are
in flower,
madam, with
young
leaves.
flowers like strings
of pearls hidden in the
Padma.
Maid.
Ah If that is so, why do you delay ? Wont your ladyship sit on this stone
!
seat
while
gather some flowers
Padma.
Vasava.
Pali.]
My
good
girl
so.
Why
should we
sit
here
Let us do
Extract No.
31.
Jataka
Vol. Ill, p. 17).
308.
(Fausboll. Edn., Vol. Ill, p. 25.
Trans. Francis and Neile,
Java-sakuna-jatakam.
Atite Baranasiyam Brahmadatte rajjam karente Bodhisatto
Himavanta-padeserukkha-kottha-sakuno hutva nibbatti.

'ekassa sihassa
Athgalo
mamsam
khadantassa atthi gale
laggi,
uddhumayi, gocaram ganhitum

vattanti.
Notes.
na
sakkoti,
khara
vedana
Fara?m5?/a?n = A Mg. Vanarasle. Brahma-Pkt. bamkarente causal participle, S'. karente is active, rukkha " woodpecker " rukkha so in M. S'., etc. ruksa Vedic "tree" doubtless related to vrksa whence M. JM. vaccha(Pischel 320). hutva = S'. bhavia, AMg. hotta. nibbatti " was born again" aor. (nir + vri) from nibbatti = 8'. nivvattadi.
ha.
,
Atha=S'. adha.
from laggadi.
pass, aor:
siha so in M. (65).
laggi "stuck" aor.

up,'
ud-dhumayi
S'.
'was blown up, swelled
from uddhumi\ya,t'\ ûddhnynayate.
ganhitum = S'.
sakkei.
genhidum.
sakkoti =
sakkunoti.
JM. sakkai,
vat-
tanti =S. vattanti.
Atha nani so sakuno gocara-pasuto disva sakhaya nilino samma dukkhatiti " pucchi. So tarn atthaiii acikkhi " Ahan te samma etarn atthiiii apaneyyaiii, bhayena te
'*
kin te
mukham
pavisitum na visahami, khsideyyasi

tarii
pi
man "
ti
" nia
bhayi samma, nalian
khadami,
jlvitani
medehiti."
Notes.
prasita.
185
seekincr (food)
i\a,m
him.'
pasuto 'intent on'
M.
of
loc.
S'.
disva = drsiva, AMg. dissti, dissa, dissani. Sakhaya cf. nialaa. nilliio " perched" past part. pas.s. of niifyati
nillamana.
samma
'"
friend,
good sir"
from sninyak.
"told" acikkhati {a + khyd redupUcated) = Amg. apaneyyam "I would remove" S'. would be avaneam, AMg. avanejja. visahami (vi + sah) "dare."
acikkhi
aikkhai.
So
"sadhu"
ti
tarn
passena nipajjapetva " ko janati
kiiii
p'esa karissatiti" eintetva yatha

koti tatha
mukham
pidahitum na sakAtthi
tassa adharotthe ca uttarotthe ca dandakara tha-
petva mukhani pavisitva atthikotini tundena pahari.

patitva gatam.
So atthiin patetva sihassa mukhato nikkha-
manto dandakam tundena paharitva patento nikkhamitva

sakhagge
Notes.
niliyi.
S'.
passa =
pasa.
nipajjapetva gerund
infin.
of causal
'
from
'
nipajjati
{ni + pad).
pidahitum
'
from pidahati
shuts
{{0)^1 dha).
niliyi 'perched
see nilino above.
dati.
Siho nirogo hutva ekadivasam vana-mahisam vadhitva khaSakuno " vimamsissami nan" ti tassa uparibhage sa:
khaya niliyitva tena saddhim sallapanto pathamam gatham aha
Akaramhase
migaraja
te
kiccam
yam
balani ahuvamhase,
namo ty-atthu, api kifici labhamase. Notes. vimamsissami fut. of vimamsati "examine, try" (mimamsate). pathama = Pkt. padhama. akaramhase imperfect (or aorist) atm. ahuvamhase the same from bhavati. try-athu = (t7i -i-asiw). labhamase imperative atm.
Tarn sutva siho dutiyam gatham aha
:
Mama
lohita-bhakkhassa niccam luddani kubbato
dant'antara-gato santo
tam bahum
yani hi jivasiti
Tarn sutva sakuno itara dve gatha abhasi
akatannum akattaram katassa appatikarakam yasmim kataiinuta n' atthi nirattha tassa sevana. Yassa sammukha-cinnena mittadhammo na labbhati anusuyyam anakkosam sanikam tamha apakkame ti.
Evara vatva so sakuno pakkami.
186
Notes.
karoti.
bhakkha
luddani
'
'feeding on.'
kubbanto
abhasi
pres. part, of
'
cruelties.'
'
(lubdha).
'
spoke
'
aor.
'
of bbasati.
kataniiu
so,
grateful
(krtajna).
-cinna
'
performed
(*clrna) used as p.p.p. to carati
"a deed done
in a person's
'
presence,
personal
kindness."
like
is
sanikam
quickly.'
Sometimes
means
'slowly'
sanaih: original meaning
'gently, softly.'
tamha
(tasmdt)
used adverbially in
S'.
Pali].
Extract No.
32.
Jataka
(Fausboll. Vol. Ill, p. 126.
339.
Trans. Vol. Ill, p. 83).
Bdveru jataka.
Atite Baranasiyain Brahmadatte rajjam karente Bodhisatto iiiora-yoniyam
arailne vicari.
nibattitva
vuddliim
anvaya sobbagga-patto
kira kale
Tada ekacce vanija disa-kakam gabetva navaya
Baverurattharn agamamsu.
Tasmim
Baveruratthe
sakuna nama n'attbi.
Agatagata rattha-vasino tam kup'agge
nisinnani disva " passath' imassa cbavivannam gala-pariyosanam mukhatundakani mani-gulaka-sadisani akkhiniti " kakam ev'â pasamsitva te vanijake ahatnsu "imam ayyo sakunam amhakani detha, amhakam bi imina attbo, tumhe attano
:
rattbe aiinam labhissatba

ti.
'
'
ti.
" Tena bi miilena ganbatba "

ti.
' '
" Kabapanena no detbii "
"Nadema"
ti
ti.
Anupub-
bena vaddhetva " satena detba

pakaro,
vutte
'
ambtikara esa babu-
tumbebi pana saddbim raetti botu " ti kabapanasatam gabetva adanisu. vuddhim anvaya " attaining full growtb " geruud {ami + i)
formed by analogy witb maya from mi, instead
of
*anvetva.
ekacce
'
certain
3,
'
{*eka-tya-) disa
aor.
kakam
'
foreign crow.'
kila.
mamsu,
plur.
"went."
Kira =
aga Tbe Baveru
kingdom was evidently on the

agagag'ata
'
sea, in a
country where birds
were supposed to be scarce, probably up the Persian Gulf,
"passers
'
by,
spectators."
kupa
'mast.'
ni-
sinnam perched passatha, 2nd plur. imperat. "look at." -pariyosanam "at the end of" {paryavasdna)
= JM. nisinna.
" termination.
'
187
' '
'
ayyo, perhaps we should read ayya.

a coin, here probably of
silver,
Sirs
'
= S'.
Te
-ajja.
Kahapana
gahetva
metti
"friendship."
tarn
adamsu, adv. " they gave."

suvanna-panjare
pakkhipitva
nanappa-
karena macchamamsena c'eva phalaphalena ca patijaggimsu.
Annesam sakunanam avijjamanatthane dasahi asaddhammehi

samannagato kako labhagga-yasagga-ppatto ahosi. Punavare te vanija ekain may ura-rajanam gahetva yatha accharasaddena
vassati panippaharasaddena naccati
evam sikkhapetva Baveru

nacci.
rattharp
agamamsu.
So mahajane sannipatite navaya dhure
thatvapakkhe vidhunitva madhura-ssaram niccharetva
phalaphala "wild fruits." Pali often lengthens a vowel when a word is repeated in a compound, so khandakhandam " in
pieces," kiccakiccani "all sorts of duties."
aor.
patijaggimsu,
{prati
pati-jaggati
'
"watch
'
over,
'
'
look
after"
+ jagr)
:
samannagato
endowed with
is
{sam + anu + a + gam)
the
equivalent of this
found
in
Buddhist Sanskrit,
yasagga
"height of glory." puna-vare "the next time." acchara " snapping of the fingers." vassati " screams " x^'va&. They
had trained
it
to
scream at the snapping of the

thicca.
car).
dance at the clapping of the hands,
fingers and to dhure "on the prow."
-utter
thatva M. JM. thaiiina AMg. JS'. causal of niccharati (nU +

'
nicchareti "emit,
'
Manussa tam disva somanassa-jata " etam ayyo sobhaggapattam susikkhita-sakuna-rajanam amhakam detha " ti aham" Amhehi pathamam kako anito, tarn ganhittha, idani su.
etam mora-rajanara anayimha, etam pi yacatha, tumhakam ratthe sakunanam nama gahetva agantuni na sakka " ti " Hotu ayyo, attano ratthe afinarn labhissatha, imam no detha" ti
mulam vaddhetva
ratana-vicitte
sahassena
ganhirpsu.
Atha nam
satta-
panjare
thapetva
macchamamsa-phalaphalehi
Tassagatakalato pat'
c'eva madhu-laja-sakkhara-panakadihi ca patijaggimsu, Mayuraraja
labhagga-yasagga-ppatto
jato.
thaya kakassa labhasakkaro parihayi, koci
na
ti
icchati.
nam oloketura pi Kako khadaniya-bhojaniyani alabhamano kaka

'
vassanto gantva ukkarabhumiyam otari.
188
'\vou
is
took."
ahamsu aor. "they said." ganhittha 2, plur. anayimha " we have brought." sakka "it
Sometimes
{
pos-
sible."
this can
be explained as the plural of sakko,

often indeclinable,
'able'
= iakyah),
but
it
is
and Pischel
derived from iakyal
13'J.
" It will be impossible to
come and
thaS'.
even mention the name
of
any bird in your country."
petva = AMg.
thavia, thavia.
thavetta,
JM.
thavitta, thaviilna, thaviya,
laja " fried corn."
patthaya
" from
"
lit.,
"
setting out from
"
{'pra-'r
stha), so
ajjapatthaya
"from
this
day forth."
parihayi "
fell
off."
khadaniyam " what
can
be chewed, hard food."
we
find
kajjabhojjam.
bhojaniyam " soft food." In verse 'kaka' ti vassanto "crying caw,

dunghill."
caw."
ukkarabhumi "
otari " settled on."
Palil
Extract No.
33.
Mahavamsa, Bk.
VII.
Conquest of Ceylon.
(Dines Anderson's Reader, p. 110.
Geiger's trans, p. 55).
of
The Buddha at his decease informed Indra that Vijaya son King Sihabahu had gone to Lanka with seven hundred
and asked that he and
his followers
followers,
should be care-
fully protected.
Indra handed over the guardianship of Lanka
to Visnu.
V.
6.
Sakkena vuttamatto so Lankam agamma sajjukam paribbajaka-vesena rukkhamiilam upavisi.

Vijaya-ppanuikha sabbe tain upecca apucchisum " Ayani bho ko nu dipo ? " ti. " Lankadipo " ti abruvi.
;
7.
V.
6.
"
vutta
p.p. p.
from
vatti " he speaks
" so
in
JM. AMg.
matta AMg. -mitta.
{matra),
Pkts. have
more commonly -metta.
kam
V.
7.
agamma gerund of Jigacchati. sajju" quickly " derived from sadyah. vesena " in
"
(of
the disguise
a parivrdjaka, wandering ascetic).
-ppamukha
followers.'
'
with
at their head,'
i.e.
'V. and his
INTRODUCTION TO PRAKRIT,
V.
8.
189
" na
iti
manuja ettha, na ca vatva kundikayam te jalena

saflti
hessati vo
bhayam "
nisinciya
9.
suttan ca tesam hatthesu laggetva nabhasagama,

dasaesi sonirupena paricarika-yakkhini.
10.
Eko
*'
tarn variyanto pi rajaputtena
anvaga
iti.
gaaiamhi vijjamanamhi bhavanti sunakha "
11.
Tassa ca samini tattha Kuveni

nisldi rukkha-miilainhi
nama yakkhini
kantanti tapasi viya.
12.
Disvana so pokkharanirn nisinnam tan ca tapasi m

tattha nahatva pivitva c'adaya ca muilalayo
13.
Varifi ca
pokkhare heva so vutthasi, tana abruvi

si
14.
mama, tittha " ti, alhabaddho va Parittasuttatejena bhakkhetum sa na sakkuni

" bhakkho
so naro.
yaciyanto pi tam suttani nada yakkhiniya naro.

15.
Tam
gahetva surungayara rudantatp yakkhini khipi,

pi.
is
evatn ekekaso tattha khipi sattasatani

V.
S.
hessati,
also
fut.
from bhavati (*havissati) bhavissadi
common.
V.
9.
suttam, e.g. as a protection against evil sprits, agama, aor. " vanished"; also agami, agacchi, agamasi, etc.
dassesi
iayati.
"there appeared,"
soni " bitch."
aor.
cf.
dasseti
= dar-
V. 10.
variyanto, partic. of variyati pass, of vareti "forbid,"

caus.
of
vunati.
" dogs
"
{iunakdh)
" only
shoots"
it
anvaga
"followed."
sunakha
a village."
where there
is
V.ll.
V. 12.
Kantanti " spinning."

disvana, gerund
= disva,
also passitvana.
mulalayo,
ace. plur. "lotus
{mrndli).
of
V. 13.
So Reader has
the
sa but
was the man who came out
tank
not
the
is
yakkhini.
alhabaddho "fast
also
bound."
V. 14.
alhaka
a tethering post (drdhaka).

'is able.'
sakkuni
aor.
sakkunati
asakkhi from
thread,"
i.e.
sakkati.
paritta-sutta
"protection
V.15.
"thread charm" or "magic thread." ada " he did not give." khipi " hurled."
nada = na
190
V. 16.
Anayantesu sabbesu vijayo bhayasankito
raddhapaficayudho gantva disva pokkharanim subbani
17.
apassa-m-uttinnapadam basantin c'eva tapasim,

"ituaya khalu bbacca
" kim na passasi bbacce
18.
"kim
19.
rajaputta
me gahita nil " ti cintiya me bboti tuam " iti aba tain, bbaccebi, piva nabaya " ty-aba aa.
:
" Yakkhini tava janati
mama
jatin
"
ti
niccbito
sigbam sanamarp savetva

20.
dhanum sandbay'
so
upagato.
Yakkbim adaya givaya naraca-valayena
21.
vamabattbena kesesu gabetva dakkbinena tu ukkbipitva asira aba: "bbacce me debi dasi, tam maremiti," bbayuttba sa jivitam yaci yakkbini:
*'
22.
Jivitam debi
me
sami,
raj jam
dassami
te
abam,
" karissam' ittbikiccaii ca aniiam kinca yatbiccliitam

23.
24.
Adubbattbaya sapatbam so tam yakkbim akarayi, " Anebi bbacce sigban " ti vuttamatta va sa nayi. " Ime cbata " ti vutta sa tanduladi viniddisi
bhakkbitanam vanijanam navattbam vividbam babuni
Bbacca
te
25.
sadbayitvana bbattani vyafijanani ca
rajaputtam bbojayitva sabbe capi abbunjisuin.

V. 16.
anayanta " not coming." naddha " fastened, equipped witb." apassa " wbere be saw no footstep of
any man coming fortb," -mbhacca "servants" (hhrtyah).

V. 19.
is
a sandbi consonant.
bhoti "Lady."
sa-namam "bis name." savetva, gerund, caus. of sunoti. sandhaya "making ready-drawing" also
sandbetva,
sandabitva,
.
from
sandabati,
sandbeti
{sam + dha)
V.20.
V. 21
.
naraca " a weapon."
valaya- " noose."
bhayattha = bhaya-sthd.
-kiccam
{Icrtyam) so in S.
V. 22.
V.23.
adubhatthaya.
chata " bungry "
(vi
"tbat be migbt not be betrayed."

{psdta) 39.
sapatbam " oatb."

V. 24.
viniddisi
"sbowed"
+ nir +
di6)
191
Old Prakrit
Extract No.
34.
Hathigumpha
This Inscription
is
Inscription.
in
one
of the
Udayagiri caves 19 miles
from Cuttack.
corrected text was published by Bhagwanlal
Indraji in the Proceedings of the Sixth International Congress

of Orientalists at Leiden, 1883, Part III, p. 135.
in
It
is
written
Old Brahml characters and has been assigned to the 2nd
cent. B.C.'
reign
The inscription gave a summary of Kharavela's Unfortunately it is very fragmentary. year by year.
the case with Asoka's inscriptions, double consonants
As
are
is
written single,
but
tliey
have been rendered as double

tiiat
consonants in this extract in order

be more familiar
"
the
forms should
is
to
it
the
student.
The
difference
only
orthographic, once
intended.
(1)
has been determined what words were
Namo Arahantanam
Namo savva-Siddhanam
Verena
maharajena maha-megha-vahanena.
tena Kalingadhipatina
verena, = virena.
Ceta-raja-vamsa-vaddhapandarasa-vassani
nena pasattha-subha-lakkhanena catur-antala-thana-gunopagasiri-Kharavelena

siri-kumara-sarlravata kidita kumara-kidaka.
pandarasa = Pali
pannarasa.
It
is
Pali,
AMg.
JM. pannarasa, Apa. pannaraha, H. pandrah.

that the d should occur so early.
Translation.'^
remarkable
Salutation to the Arhats.

fifteen years princely sports
Salutation to
all
Siddhas.
For
were played with an auspicious

(elephant)
as
his
princely body by the heroic Maharaja the illustrious Kharavela,
the lord of Kalinga, with a mighty cloud

vehicle, propagator of the
Chaitra royal dynasty,
bearing
lauded and auspicious marks, and endowed with the four internal virtues.
pages 38, 40, 187

2
Early History of India,' 2nd Edition. Xotes on and 196. Fleet, J.R.A.S. 1910, p. 242 and p. 824. Follows that of Bhagwanlal Indraji, with some slight modifications.
Vincent Smith,
'
102
(2)
Tato lekha-rijpa-ganana-vavahara-vidhi-visaradena sav-
va-vijjSvadatena nava-vassani yovvarajain pasasitani.
yovvarajam {yauva-rdjyam) Pali
raj jam.
Then
for nine years
he enjoyed
power
as
heir-apparent,
being proficient in writing, painting

of procedure,
(?)
arithmetic and the rules
and excellent at
all
learning.'
(3)
Sanipuiina-catuvisati-vasso
ca
dwaua-dharamena
sesa-
yovvanabhivijaj'a- vattiye Kalinga- raja- vamsa-purisa-yuge
maharajabhisecanarn papunati.
Danava. In his Sanskrit version Bh. gives danena ca and he translates " hy peace and religious policy," but he records
no doubt about the reading given as above, except that he
leaves a space in the plate
between na and
va.
papunati, Pali
papunati.
And wiien he had completed twenty-four years, according to Danava law (?) in a generation of the Kalinga royal family,^ that he might pass the rest of his manhood in conquests, he
was
installed as
Maharaja.
(4)
Abhisitta-matto ca padhama-vasse vata-vihata-gopura-
pakara-nivesanam
patisamkharayati
Kalinga-nagarim
khibi-
ra(m) ca sitala-tarlaga-padiyo ca bandhapayati savv-uyyanapatisaip-thapanain ca karayati panatisahi sata-sahassehi pakatiye rafijayati.
padhama.
'royal
'tanks.'
Palipathama.
sitala
S*.
etc.
padhama.
padi
Pali
khibira(i{6j>a).
camp.'
read
sitala.
(pali)
'dike'
Bh.
panatlsa JM.
panatisa,
paiicatinisam.
pakashould
tiye Bh. renders
by prakftlh and " the people."
We
expect pakatiye.
Compare Biihler. Indian Studies N'o. Ill, p. 13. Bh. "in the i/oke of the (previous) personages of the royal dynasty The meaning of this is not clear. If the reading is correct, of Kalinga." it would appoar that a Kalinga prince could not become MaharSja until he was 24.
'
INTRODUCTION TO PEAK BIT

In his
193
first year being barely installed he repaired Kalinga and the cantonment with the gates, walls and dwellings injured by the wind, had built cool tanks and dikes, and had
city
all
the gardens put in order for
thirty-five
lakhs, artd
thus
pleased the people.

(5)
Ditiye ca vasse abhittayitta Satakanni pacchima-disam
haya-gaja-nara-radha-bahulam dandam patthapayati.
KusamKusam-
banam khattiyanam ca
abhittayitta,
sahayavata pattam Masikanagaram(?).

abhi +
ira.
gerund
Reading
from
banam not
numerous
Masika(?).
(6)
quite certain.
In the second year, S'atakarni protecting the west sent a
army
of
horses,
elephants,
(he)
men and
chariots.
Assisted by the
Kusamba Kshatriyas
obtained the city of
Tatiye ca puna vasse gandhavva-veda-buddho dampa

ca
natta-gita-vaditta-samdassanahi ussava-samaja-karapanahi
kldapayati nagarim. natta = wr/to.
karapana as in Pali
'
a causing to be made.'
In the third year again, he learnt the science of music, and
amused the
city
by exhibitions
of
dampa
(?)
dancing, music,
and musical instruments, and by holding festive parties.
The
reign.
inscription continues
up
to the thirteenth year of the

it is
There are however so many gaps in the text that
often difficult to interpret the remaining words or letters.
In
the eighth year he gave trouble to the king of Rajagrha
(Raja-gaha-napam pidapayati) army and made off to Mathura.

great consternation
who
apparently deserted
hi-s
In the twelfth year he caused
among the people of Magadha Magadhanam ca vipulam bhayam janeto) made his elephants drink
having severely punished the king of Magadha made him bow at his ieet{Magadham ca, rajanam
the Ganges, and
patisasitta
of
bahu
pade va(n)dapayati).
13
/
/
194
Old Magadhi.]
Extract No.
35.
S'utanuka nama devadaîkkyi
Kamayittha Balanaêye Devadinne nama lupaddakkhe.

tarn
The long vowels and double consonants are not shown in the The inscriporiginal in the Jogimara cave on Ramgarh Hill. The dialect appears to be tion is in Old Brahmi characters. Old Magadhi. The meaning of lijpadakkhe {rupadakso) is doubtful: " skilled in painting " "sculptor" ci. {rupakrt) ha,ve
been suggested.
Balanaeye
'
belonging to Benares.'
'
Ka-
mayittha, 3 sing. aor. as in AMg.
Liiders.
For another explanation see Bloch.
Annual Report Arch.
Survey
of India, 1903-4, p. 124.
INDEX OF EXAMPLES.
[This index comprises moat of the examples given in Part I,
and
of the
words explained
in Part
11]
anavayagga,
146, n.
1.
AMg.,
'
'
endless,'
p.
a,
'
and,'
3.
anavaraya, JM.,
incessant,' p. 129,
aam,
'this,' 110.
(AMg.
125. 64.
ajâm).
n. 2.
ainia, 'led beyond,' amsi, AMg., I am,'

'
cf.
mhi.
anasana, fasting,' p. 146, n. 10. anahiaa, heartless,' p. 117, v. 64.

* *
ainsu,
'
tear,' 49, 64.
Also assu.
p. 120,
H.
asu.
anahii3.na, ignorant,' 36. anaiya, AMg., without beginning,'

*
'
akaannua,
V. 83.
'
'ungrateful,'
p. 146, n.
1.
aniada,
53.
'
uncertain,' p. 87, n. 6.
6.,
*
akanda, unexpected,' p. 93, n. 5. akayya, Mg. (akarya), p. 165, n. 2. akarimsu, aor., they did,' 133. akasi, AMg., he did,' 133. akkhala, Mg. letter,' p. 165, n. 1. akkhi, eye,' 40 Pb. akkh. H.
'
anU2;ejjha,
to be
favoured,'
27.
anudiahaijl,
'
day by day,'
'
anuraa,
'
affection,' 9.
p.
'
anuvvaya, AMg., ordinance,'

145, n. 4.
'
akh. cf. acchi. agada, a well,' p. 123, n. 2. anguliaa, rmg,' p. 90, n. 6. aggala, ' bolt,' p. 136, v. 19. aggahattha, finger,' p. 101, v. 4. aggi, 'fire,' 36, 62, 88. Pb. agg.
' ' '
anena, by this,' anna, other,' 48,

'
110. 111.
'
annunna=annonna
73.
one another,'
annesana,
annesidum,
atta,
'
H.
ag.
'
* search,' 48. p. 82, n. 5. ' attae, AMg., son,' p. 147, n. 2.
aggha,
valuable,' 56.
'
accanta, excessive,' acchai, 'stays,' 60, acchara, nymph,'

'
44.
attia,
p. 123, n. 9.
39.
cf. appa. mother,' p. 110 (c). attha, (1) here,' 45 (atra).
self,' 36, 100.
'
'
(2) -artha, 45.
acchariam,
aechi,
wonderful,' Also accharlarn.

'
(3)
weapon,'
bone,'
cf.
56 (astra).
58.
atthi,
(1) 'is; (asti),
38, 132.
atthi.
' eye,' cf. akkhi 39. acchiim, acchi ni, M. plur. , i acchera, M. =accharia, 76.
(2)
(3) -arthi,
JM.
adidhi,
addhii,
'
ajja (1) to-day,' 44. Apa. jju. Pb. ajj. Old H. aju. H. aj.
'
adda, *wet,'
'guest,' 11, 14. p. 122, n. 3. anxiety,' p. 128, n.

14.
'
3.
urya, 50. (2) ajjaa, 'lady,' p. 97, n.

ajjhatthiya, ajjhavasida,
n. 8.
adha,
n. 2."
'
then,'
6.,
7.
adhannada,
:'.
misfortune,' p. 88,
'
ajjaiifcta, 'gentleman,'
AMg.
{-adhyatmika).
p. 83,
of,'
antakkarana,
'
conscience,'
82.
51.
'determined,'
andharia, darkened,'
apavagga, JM.,
'final
beatitude,'
atthae,
atithi,
AMg.,
1.
'on
account
p. 135, n.
1.
p. 147, n.
bone,' 38. ' not anajjanto, being p. 123, n. 9.
appa, appa,
known,'
cf.
'small,'
'
37.
self,'
36,
100.
H. 5p.
3.
atta.
'
appatta,
unobtained,' p. 114, v.
196
appia
(1)
'
not dear,' 6.
sent,'
auso,
136, V. 23.
AMg.
JM.
*
,
'
long-lived one,' p. 15Q,

'
(2)
JM.,p.
n. 4.
abie. AMg., ' without p. 145, n. 1.
second,'
Sojja,
aohana,
p. 109(e).
2.
drum T p 130, n. battle,' p. 142, n.
7.
abbhantara,
'
interior,' 43.
,
agada, 6.=aftda,
agantum,
2.
abbhahia (=:abhy-adhika)
JM.
'
'
having
come,'
5.
amiam,
107.'
nectar,' p. 102, v. amejjha, 'impure,' p. 130, n.

'
p. 123, n. 9.
9.
amham,
'of us,' M.,

76.
AMg., JM.,
agara, AMg., house," p. 145, n. agasa. AMg., JM. aasa, 11.
acaria,
'
teacher,"
'
amhakera, 'our,'
amhe,
ariha,
alasi,
'
'we,' 47, 106.

'
adhatta, begun pp. from adhai.
applied,"
58.
125,.
worth,'
57.
cf.
anatta,
ania,
anida,
'
ordered,"
*
125
wandering mendicant.'
23.
anavedi,
S.
'
orders,'
36.
vedic atasl, alia,

'
brought,'
, '
125.
Ji
in vain,' 67. alihadi, Mg. =arhati.
brought,'
'
125.
anesu,
125.
bring,'
avanida,
'
taken away,'
'
ane, (na
'p.
ane)
(c).'
116. I (don't)
know,'
avattha,
condition,'
17.
38.
108
avara,* other,' an i {w)aver.

avarajjhai,
125.
H.
aur.
Rom-
adhappai, caus. pass, adha, 135(c). abhioia, abhiogiya, AMg.. -of the
state ?' p. 145, n.
9. 57.
.
passive.
'
apa + radh,
52.
amarisa,
afternoon,'
'
'
impatience,
'
avaranha,
avaratta,
AMg.,
'
araddha,
of
begun,'
12
'
latter
half
1.
arabbhai.
125.
'
arambhadi.
is
begun,'
night,' p. 145, n. 2. avaricida, stranger,' p. 91, n.
avassam,
avahga,
v. 61.
'
'
necessarily,' 49. corner (of eye),' p.

'
aruhai, mounts,' 125. aliddha, ' embraced,' p. 116, v. 61.
116,
alekkha,
avajjia,
'
JM.
'
avi, also,' 17. asamatthaa, unable,"
avatta,
p.
picture,' p. 84, n. 3. ' poured out,' a orj. , turned roimd,' p. 114.

p. 125, n. 5.
112
(o).
V. 6.
asesa,
asoga,
'all,' 20.
11.
aveia,
'
announced,'
'
asa,
110.
cf.
assa,
assu,
'
(1)
(2)
'of liim,'
'
horse, asa, ace. plur.

'
'
= assa.
,
AMg.,
92.
horse,'
49.
cf.
M. asa.
asi,
was,'
'
133.
tear,' 04.
Hha, 'then,' 14. ahara, lower,' p.

ahigliaa,
'
6.
amsu. adha.
asiadi, 6.
sits
ahamsu, AMg..
down,' 125. they said,'

'
'
133.
116, v. 63. smitten,' p. 116. v. 61.

' '
Also ahu. ahevacca, AMg.,

p. 144, n. 5.
overlordship,'
abinava,
ahinnana.
new,' token,'
13.
p. 90. n. 3.
=ili, p. 136, v. 10.

'
aada,
'
a(y)ava,
arrived,' 2. ' heat,' p. 153, n.

'
ia =iti, p. Ill (e). iaip, this,' 110,

1.
ikkhu,
7.
sugar-cane,'
40.
cf.
aai>a, (I)
trouble,' p. 101, n. (2) 'sky,' p. 113(6).

'
ucchu.
icchai,
n. 4.
'
promi.ses,'
JM.,
p.
128,
aaredi, invites,' p. 101, n. aittha, JM., commanded,'

'
9.
p. 130,
li.
1.
'
icehe, iddhi,
'
I desire,' atiu., 115.

'
AMg.,
'
increase,' p. 146, n.
6.
aihl, Apa.,
in
the beginning.'
93.
iijiarp,
this,'
71.
woman,' p. 84, n. 1. idha. here,' 28. the rainbow, in indaalammi,
itthi,
'
197
umtnuha,
'
'
looking up,' 46. ure, on the breast,' p. 117, v. 76. ullavida, 'shouted out,' p. 93,
p. 113(b).
n. 12.
'
imise,
AMg. =imie.
of this,' fern.
uvaarana,
n. 16.
'
aid,' 17.
'
110. ificaê, Mg.,

isi,
'
uvacchandido,
desirest,' 116.
60.

coaxed,'
p.
90,
sage,'
'
UVajjhaa,
'
teacher,'
17, 44.
iha,
here,'
28.
=idha.
uvatthavei AMg. ,' prepares,' p. 146,

,
n.' 5.
uvaraa,
'
colouring,' p. 101, n. 4.
'
idisa,
isisi,
'
'
like this,' 70.

6.
above,' 17. uvalevana, smearing,' p. 100, n. 4. uvasappissam, I will creep up,'

'
uvari,
'
gently,' p. 107 (o). Thamiya, ' wolf,' p. 160, n.
p. 99, n.
4.'
U
Uia,
uvasampajjai, AMg., 'gets to,' -ittanam, abôl. , p 147, n. 4. uvahara, oblation,' p. 100, n. 5. uvaiya, JM. 'offering' p. 128,
'
,
n. 4.
ua, 'lo!,' M.,p. 103, v. 4. water,' 10. iiatthia {=upa-sthita), p. 118, v. 78. uaroa. ill-will,' p. 136, v. 10. ocean.' p. 114, v. 56. tiahi, uahiu.M., abl., 93. uida, fitting.' p. 95, n. 2. ukkara, multitude,' p. 94, 10.
' ' ' '
'
uvalahissam,
p. 83, n. 9.
'
will
reproach,'
p.
UVvatta, 'turned
V. 56
over,'
114,
uvvigga,
usu, AMg.,
'
'
anxious,' 42. arrow,' 70.

'
ukkinna, scattered,' ukkhaa, rooted up,'

'
'
ukkhitta,
thrown
'
p. 165, n. 1. p. 121, v. 85. up,' p. 116, v. 63.
ussasa (M. usasa) sigh,' uhaa, both,' p. 101, n. 5.

'
41.
Uggama,
' '
rising,' 34.
'
U
usava,
'
uggahihi, will sing,' p. 120, v. 84. uccoda, withering ? p. HO (a). ucehii, M., ' sugar-cane,' 40, 70 H. ikh. E.H. ukh. cf. 6. ikkhu. Mar. us. Bg. akh.
festival,'
41, 63.
usasa = ussasa.
E
in this,' 47. ' in this state,' p. 1 10 (c). e(y)aruva, AMg., ' of this form,' p. 145, n. 2.
'
ujjala,
ujjaij.a,
'
blazing,' 42.
'
garden,' p. 97, n. 11.

'
eassim,
eavattham,
ujjua,
'
straight,' 15, 68.
ujjoviya, lighted up,' p. 159, n. 14. ujjhida, (JM., ujjhiya). 'left behind,' p. 129, n. 11.
ei,
'
goes,'
'
)2.
15, 112.
una, but,' 3. unha, 'hot.'

'
ekka,
one,'
JM.
ega.
ettahe, M.,p. 119, v. 80.

47.
Guj.
unhu.
Mar. un.
utta, spoken,' 125. uttinna, traversed,' 125. utthahgia, M., supported,' p. 114,
'
'
ettha, here,' edi,' goes,'

'
70.
cf. ei.
61.
12, 132.
132.
edihasia,
enti,
'
'
legendary,'
'
they go,' eravana, 61.

'
V. 56.
utthedu,
n. 8.
'
let
him stand
up,' p. 97,
erisa, like this," 24, 70. evaddhe, Mg., so great,' (evadda, JM.). n. 4.
'
p.
170,
uppala,
'
'
lotus,' 34.
v. 3.
'
uppida, bursting out,' p. 114, ubbheiya, erect,* p. 130, n. 2.
evvam,
eso,
'
'
thus,' 68.
this,'
110.
198
kadharp,
kaham.
6..
how?'
14.
M.
oSsa, M., space," p. 114, v. 3. oinna, ' descended,' 125. Also odinna. onavia, bent down,' 25. otthaya, covered with." p. 159,
' '
'
kadhida, told,' 11. kadhidura, to tell,' 136.

'
'
kadhedu,
75.
' '
'
let
him
tell.' 11.
14.
n. 15.
odaria,
'
having descended,' JM.,

'
122.
Mg.
odalia.
olagga,
n. 9.
followed,'
p.
124,
16.
kadhesu. tell,' 116. kanta, gone,' 125 (kram). kappa, age, etc.,' 37. kappadiya, JM., 'pilgrim,'
'
p.
123,
n. 10.
'
oviya,
osaria,
'
decorated,' p. 159, n. gone off,' p. 108 (6).

' '
kamala,
(l) (2)
'
'
lotus,' p. 84, n. 9. rice,' p. 102, n. 9.

(/t).
osaha,
oharia,
herb,' AMg., osadha, lopped,' p. 116, v. 61.
20.
karaala,=.E'afcwz, p. 112
karamagara,
p. 127, n. 5.
JM..
'workman,'
(karmagneh),
?
'
kammaggino,
93.
JM.
'
i
kaa,
S.
done,'
'
125.
JM., kaya,
p.
60.
kammi, M.
V. 76.
what
p.
117,
kada and kida.

hair-seizing,'
kaa-ggaha,
V. 64.
117,
karanijia
done,'
(S.
'
karania),
'
to
be
137.
Kaanta,
n._6.
'
kaall-hara,
Fate,' p. 99. n. 10. ' plantain-house,' p. 82,
karandaa.
karidurn,
karitta,
'
basket,' p. 97. n. 11. to do,' 112.

'
AMg.,
' '
having done,'
122.
kayai kvaâvi, AMg., 'sometime,'

p. 145,
'
karissam,
I will do,' 134.

is
1.
kariadi,
kariadu,
69.
'
ki, poet,' p. 103, V. 3. kaima, M., (=katama),
let it
done,' 135. be done,' p. 96, n.
5.
karedi,
kado,
kae,
'
for the sake of 'p. 110 (a).

6.
kao, J. AMg., 'whence,'

p. 153, n.
2.
'does,' 128. karenta, doing,' 102. karemana. AMg., doing,' p.

'
'
145,
n. 2.
16.
kakkola =kankota,
kahkamaa, JM.,
bill,' p.
'like
heron's
124, n. 11. kankhia, 'desired,' p. 112 (a) (kan-
karesu, -do,' 116. kalemi, Mg.. I do,' p. 166, n. 2. kalevara, body,' 18. kallakallim,' everv morning,' p. 150,
' '
knla).
n. 6.
'
kacchabha, AMg., tortoise,' kajja, to be done,' 50, 137.

'
19.
kajjai,
AMg.,
' '
'
is
done,'
135.
Note.
kavala, mouthful,' 18, p. 108 kavala, Apa., lotus,' 25. kavalia, eaten,' p. Ill (/). kavada, door-panel,' p. 101, n.
'
' ' *
(b).
6.
kflt;tkkha, side glance,' p. 1 12 (g). kadaa, JM., fetter,' p. 129, n. 7. kadua, bitter,' p. 87, n. 5. kadhia, boiled,' 6. kadhida, 42.
'
kavva,
kasana,
'
'
poetry,' 50. dark,' p. 116, v. 63.

'
'
kaha,
kaham, how
' '
'
p. 102, V. 2,
14.
'na,
'
gold,' p. 101, n. 6.
p.
1 1 1
kahS.
(d).
story,' p. 120, v. 84.
kanakkania,' resounding,'
kantha, neck,' 3J. kaQna, ear,' 48. kanha, =krma, 47. knda, see kaa.
' '
kabiqi
kaatthaa
kaiirp,
where,' p. 81, n.
'
1.
knhissam,
(1) (2)
?
"
I will tell,' 1.34. =kayasthaka, 38.
M.,
136.
'
to do,'
'
121.
AMg.,
having done.'
122.
kadama, kadara,
111.
'
which
69,
knuna, M.,
'
having done,'
kadhaissnip,
will relate,' 134.
kaduip,6. Mg..'
136.
to do,' 63, 121,
Also kadhissam, M. kahis.sam.
kamae =kamyaya,
'
199
'
48. 128.
komudi (M. komul),

61.
moonlight,'
karedi, cans., has done,' kSredum, infin., 136.
kfilake, Mg., 'door,' p, 165, n. 2. kSlana, Mg. =karanat, p. 166, n. 3. kaham, ' I will do,' 134.
khaa,
(l)
-hurt khada,
KH a
wound.'
^.
125, p. 110(6).
kim una,
'
what then
?,' 3.
(2)
'dug,' 125.
S.khanida'inlaid,'
kinkini, 'bell,' p. Ill (d). kicca, AMg., ' having done,' p. 147,
n. 7.
khaia,
(^
'
khacida),
p.
109 (a).
khagga,
'
buys,' klida, 'done,'

kinai,
131. 11.
57.
khajjai,
'
is
khanna,
sword,' 34. dug,' 135. dug,' 125. AMg., JM.,
kilanta,
'
weary,'
khatta.
kilittha, 'afflicted,' 125. kilinna, ' moistened,' 57.

kilitta,
kilissai,
'
Khattia,= Ksatriya,
40.
14.
khammai,
khavia.
125.
'
M
' '
prepared,'
,
'
i9.
dug,' 135 {d). exhau.sted,' p. 115, v.

'
is
is afflicted,'
khai, Apa.=khaai,
kivina,
kirai,
'
wretched,'
of
?
60.
?
'
khama,
70.
kidlsa,
kisa,
'
what
'
sort
khara,
khijjai,
'
eats,' 127. ' thin,' p. 97, n. 2. alkali,' p. 110 (6).

'
is
done,'
'
135.
'
is
'
why
kuo, JM.,
p. 85, n. 2. whence,' p. 139, n.

'
khinna,
1.
wasted,' 125. wasted,' 125. cf. khina.
khitta,
khippai,
n. 7.
'
kukkhi, 6 kucchi, M.
'
'
40. kucchio, AMg., kucchi rnsi, loc. , 93. kujja, AMg., he may do,' 133. kuttedi, Mg. has cut,' p. 166, n. kudila, crooked,' 16. kudumba, household,' 16.
, '
belly,' abl., 93.
thrown,' 40, 125. is thrown,' 135, p. 130,

eva,
'
khippam
khividum,
AMg.,
'quickly,'
136.
p. 146, n. 5.
5.
to throw,'
40.
'
khina,
'
wasted,'
H. chin,
'
khu,
'
particle,'
'
74. 6, 34.
6, 22.
kunai,
n. 5.
'
does,'
kunamane, AMg., 'doing,'

kuddho, J.M.,
'
131, p. 112 (o). p. 144,

p. 12S, n. 8.
khujja,
hump-back,'
(
khel. khel
play
'),
angry,
G
gaa (6. gada) gaana, 'sky'
n.
i.
'
kuppadi,
n. 5.
'
is
'
kumbhanda,
kumbhilaa,
n.
1.
'
angry,' 125. white gourd,' p. 93,

, '
gone,' 11, 125.
{gagana),
92.
'
p.
101,
Mg.
thief,'
p.
165,
gaammi= grafe.
V. 14.
kulta,
canal,' p. 110 (a). kuvia, JM. , ' angry,' p. 129, n. 11.
ga(y)ava(y)a, JM.,
aged,' p. 136,
81.
kuvida,
gainda,
'
lord of elephants,'
(l)
kuwam,
'
angry,' 125. AMg., doing,'

*
'
kuvvamane atm.
'
103. p. 146, n. 9.
gaccha,
'go,' gats.
116.
Kash.
kera, to be done,' 76. keria, belonging to,' p. 99, n. 8. kerisa=kidisa, 24, 70. Mg.,
keliê.
(2)
JM.,
"school-sect,"
p. 136, V. 23. gacchahi, AMg., ' go,' 116. gacchittae, AMg., inf., 136. ganthi, ' knot,' 55.
kelake, Mg.
n. 6.
'
belonging
to,' p. 167f
gando,
n."3.
'
night-watchman
'
'
p. 122,
kevali, AMg., ' absolute ledge,' p. 145, n. 3. kesesu, (Mg. keieSu), 21.
know-
ganta, AMg.,
having gone,'
go,'
122.
136.
gantum,
'to
'
121,
Also gacchidum, gamidum.
ko, who,' 110. koila, cuckoo,'

'
konca,
'
p. 112 {g). crane,' 35.
gamissadi, will go,' 134. gamiadi. 6. passive, is gone,' M. gammai, 119, 125. 119.
'
200
garala.
'
poison,' p. 110
*
(6).
cakka,
p.
13fi,
wheel,'
45.
garua,
V. 13.
heavy,'
71.
'
garukkha, JM.,
full
of,'
Pb. cakk. cakkamai, JM., goes in

'
Sindhi caku.
p. 122, n. 4.
Apa. cakku. H. cak.

circles,'
13.
Garuda, 6.=Garula, M.
Mg.,'22
gallakka, gavittha, gahavai,
n. 8.
' '
Galuda,
cakkavatti,
cakkhusa,
'
emperor,' p. 93, n. with the eye,' 104.

'
crystal,' 50.
'
eanga,
'
'
beautiful,' p. Ill
'
(c).
sought,' 125 (gaveaai). house-holder,' 99, p.
caccara, square,' p. 124, n. 10. cadavia, increased,' p. 123, n. catta, abandoned,' 119.
'
12.
gahia (6. gahida), seized,' gahium, M. inf., 136, note.

'
125.
cattari,
'
four,' 112.
cadukka, ^.
38.
(caiikkaM.),' square',
'
gai,
'
sings,' il27.
*
gam a,
village,' 45.
cf.
garavia, JM., 'highly

p. 135, V. 5,
25 end. esteemed,'
H. cauk. cadussamudda, four
oceans,' 61.
cammaraa,
cai,
'
leather- worker,' 82.

p. 135, v.
.5.
from M., AMg., JM., garava=M.S. gorava =âMroro.

'
gijjai,
is
sung,'
ginhium, AMg.,
note.
135, p. 130, n. 6. 'to seize,' 136,

60.
H. camar. JM., 'generous,' Canakka, 43. Caunda, 25.
giddha,
giddh.
'
vulture,'
47.
Pb.
gimha,
giha,
gia,
'
H. gidh. summer,'
cava, ' bow,' p. 109 (e). cia, 'like,'p. 114,v. 3; p. 117, v. 75. ciiicaia, ' adorned,' p. 130, n. 4.
Citthni,
Mar. dia7.
M.
(6.
citthadi).
Mg.
lect, glm.
' house,' p. 152, n. sung,' 125. guttha, ' strung,' p. Ill {/). '
AMg.,
cisthadi, 'stands,' 7. citthittae, AMg., inf., 130. cinai, ' collects,' 131. cinijjai, pass., 135.
gumma,
'
bunch,'
48.
einedi,
cf.
'
6.
'collects,'
128,
13
1.
gejjha =grahya, 70, 137. seizes,' genhai, (6 genhadi)

52, 131.
cinai (cinoti).
'
einha,
genhia, gerund., p. 95,
mark,' 52. Citta(l) 'bright,' 45.
n.
4.
inf., 136.'
, '
'
genhiura (S. genhidum), genhidavva. 137.

7.
(2) ' heart,' p. Ill (e). cittaaro, 'painter,' p. Ill (e).
house,' p. 152. n. geha, JM goccha, M., bush,' 71. gotthi, JM., society,' p. 136,
'
cittaphalaam,
'
picture tablet,'
135.
5.
v. 23.
cindha=cinha, 52. cimmai, passive ci,

cilaadi,
'
GH
ghadanta,
v.' 6.
'
Mg., delays,' civvai = cimmai.

ciadi, passive ci,
115,
135.
p. 167, n.
I.
joining with,' p.
CUUna,
n. 8.
'lime,' p.
102, n.
3.
H.
ghadavehi, have fashioned,' p. 100,

'
cuna, (cur7ia) 'powder,' p. 141,
n.'3.
ghara, M.AMg., abl. 'from home,' 92.

gharini,
'
CUmbia, kissed,' p. 107 (o). CUa (6. cuda), 'mango,' p.
101.
6.
wife,' p. 93, n. 13.

'
n. 5.
ghettum,M.
V. 14.
cf.
'
ghettuna M.,' having seized,'

genhia.
seized,' 135.
to seize,' 19, 136. p. 121,
ceiya, AMg., ' sacred,' p. !51, n. coria ca?irâ, 58.
gheppai,
is
CH
Cha, M. AMg.,
* '
caai, M.,
112.
abandons,' 125. caiira, 'four,' 112. causu.

'
loo.
chaccarana, six footed,' chattha, sixth,' 6. chuna. 'festival,' p. 119, v.

'
six,' 6. 112. 34.
81.
chai;ii;La,
'
hidden,' p. 91, n. 5.
chammuha,
chaa,
'
201
six- faced,' 46.
'colour,' etc., p. 97, n. 6; p. 102, n. 2. chane (?), p. 119, v. 81. chava, AMg., 'child, etc' Pali
jivvai, is conquered,' 135. jiha, ' tongue,' 54. juai, ' young women,' p. 109 (e). juarao, heir apparent,' 99, note,
'
juala,
'
pair,'
'
9.
-AMg.
juvala,
chapa=.â6a, S G. chaha, 'shadow,' p. 102, n,

chijjai,
'
p. 146, n. 10.
2.
juguccha,
jugga,
'
jealousy.'
39.
is split,' p.
*
109
(a).
pair,' 36.
'
ehinna,
chindai,
130.
cut,' 125, 130.
jujjadi,
'
is
joined,'
119,
129,
(6
,
'
chindadi),
cuts,'
135.
jujjha,
jujjh.
'
battle,' p. 128. n. 7.
Pb.
chuhai, JM. throws,' p. 124, n. 6. chuha, M., hunger,' 39. chea, a cut,' p. 116, v. 62. cheetta, AMg.. ' having cut,' p. 146,
'
H. jujh.
'
junjai,
joins,'
125.
.34,
jutta,
'
'
joined,'
'
125.
10.
judiaro,
gamester,' p. 97, n.
n. 10.
chettum, to cut,' 136. chettuna, M. JM., 'having

'
cut,'
jeum, to win,' 136. jeva, jevva, 68.

jo,
'
p. 146, n. 10.
who,'
'
110.
joisara, ' magician,' p. 93, n. 10. joehi, harness,' p. 97, n. 12.
jai, (6. abso. jadi),
if,'
S 1-
J auna= Yamuna,
25.
jakkha. =yaksa, p. 128, n. 4. jaccana, gen. "genuine,' plur., p. iii(c).
}ogi=yogl, 1. jogga, fit,' 43. jonha, 'moonlight,' dat. jonhaa, 94.

'
p.
110(6).
jovvana,
'
youth,' 15, 61, 68.
janna,
'
sacrifice,' 36.
jadha
Mg. yadha), (M. jaha. 'a3,'l, 14. jappia, babbled,' 37. jampia, JM., 'said,' p. 129, n. 9. jampimo, we speak,' 69.
'
JH
jhanajhananta,' jingling,' p.
jhai,
'
HI (d).
6.
reflects,' 127.
'
jhana,
meditation,' p. 96, n.
40.
'
jhma=khina,
Jambu.
jalai,
35.
'
jammai, is born,' 135 (a). jammantara, another birth,'

'
'
TH
80.
blazes,' p. 110 (6).
thai,
jaladda,
'
'running
with
water,'
stands,' 127. thadurp, ' to stand,' 136.

'
p. Ill (b).
thavetta, AMg., 'having

stand,' p. 147, n. 2. thahihi, ' will stand,'
made
to
jalana, flames,' p. 113 (6). jasa, glory,' p. 113 (6).

'
134.
jaha =jadha,
14, i8.
'
thia
(6.
thida),
thidi), Also thii.
'
stood,' 12, 38,

'
jaa
(6.
ja(y)a,
n. 5.
jada), born-child,' JM.. 'quantity,'

'
125.
also thia.
p.
122,
thii
(6.
standing-state,'
38.
is
jaadi,
bom,'
' '
125. 115.
janae. atm.
knows,'
jada, 6. jamadua,
jalaula,
V. 17.
'
child,' p. 90, n. 7=jaa. son-in-law,' 60. mass of flames,' p. 136,

'
dakka, bitten,' 125. dajjhamana, JM.,' burning,'

' *
p. 129,
n. 8.
'
'
dasai,
jia (6. jida), 'conquered,' Also jitta.

jinai,
125.
doya,
dapper
bites,' 125. ? p. 130, n. 3.

'
, wines,' 125, 131. old,' p. 97, n. 11. jibbha, AMg., tongue,' 54.
'
M.
'
jinna,
DH
H.
dhakkedi,
'
'
shuts,' p. 170, n.
7.
9.
jibh.
dhanka,
'
crow,'
202
nitthavana,
V. 11.
'inflection,'
p.
136.
naa,
'
bent,'
S.
125.
(6.
nada).
20.
naHna,
nain.
'eye,' 7,
H. Pb.
ninna,
nidittha,
'
low,'
'
46.
nenu.
informed,' p. 93, n.
'
13.
niddaa,
naara,
'city,' 9. p. 122, n. 1.
'
nayara, JM.,
116, v. 63. sleeps,' p. 102, n. 8. niddha=siniddha, 47.

'
pitiless,' p.
niddnati,
naia, ' having led,' 122. nalssadi, will lead,' 134.
nipphala,
nibbanda
n. 11."
'
'
fruitless,' 38.
nam,
(l)
(2)
'him,' 110. now,' p. 85, n.

'
perseverance,' 45. nibbhinna, burst open,' p.

'
94,
5.
nakkha,
naccana,
najjai,
'
'
'
nail,' 15.
dancing,' p. 108 (b). (*nrtyana).
nilada, 'forehead,' H. hlar.

niruvaissam,
p. 84, n. 8.
'
p.
117, v. 64.
will
investigate,'
p.
9.
is
'
nattaa,
known,' drama,'
'
'
135, n.
43.
2.
nivadanta,
n. 10.
'
falling
down,'
84,
nattha
(1)
(2)
lost.' 125.
placed,' p. 123, n.
nivanna,
'
entered,' p. 123, n.
p. 101,
natthi,
naraejja.
'
'
isn't,' 83.
'
namayam,
' '
meekness,' p. 135,
nivaha, 'multitude,'
v. 7.
14.
4.
may
bend,' p. 115, v.
nivuttT, 'returned,'
nivuttu. nivesavia,
n. 13.
60.
Apa.
narinda, king,' 81. navara, only,' p. 121, v. 8?'. navari, ' thereupon,' p. 120, v. 82. navahl, Apa. = (namanli) 25.
H
'
'
made
laut. to enter,' p. 124,

it
naha = nakkha, 13. naa, known,' 125. , naagu, Apa. (=nayakah),

'
nivvavijjjaii, let p. 118, V. 76.
be poured out,'
niv-vavedi,
niwiggha,
10.
p. 96, n.
'
pours out,' 120. without hindrance,' 6 (mrvighna).

' '
na'iip,
'
nauna, to know,' 136. [Jain MSS., absol., p. 139, n. 1. vary in the use of initial n and
'
nivvinna, disgusted,' p. 87, n. 2. nivvuo, 'finished, etc' p. 108 (d). nivvudha, 'accomplished,' p. 116.
v.
(52.
'
n].
nadha
naham,
Ilia,
(M. naha).
'
'
protector,'
14.
nisagga,
nisamenti,
nisiara,
'
nature.' p. Ill
(c).
(1)
not I,' 'own,'
83.
AMg.
nihada),
'
AMg.,
niyaya,
fiend,' p. 117, v. 64.
(2)
p. 95, n. 3 {nija-ka). ' led,'=nia, 125. AMg.
nihfla
(6.
struck down.'
p.
p. 121, V. 85.
niya. niatta, ' returned,' =nivutta. niattaissadi, fut. caus. 134. niattSidurn, caus., inf 136. niattihihi, fut. caus , p. 120. v. 84. niala, ' fetter.' p. 169. nikkam ' go out,' 38.
,
nihanium, JM., "to bury.'

n. 3.
'
124,
nihasa, M.. rubbing,' 19. nihaa, 'smashed,' p. 121, v. 85. nihuda, (M. nihua) secret, etc.* 00.
'
nikkiva,
nikkhitta,
p. 81,
'
cruel,' p. 108
^la
(6.
nida),
'
'
led.'
125.
cf.
(c).
riia.
'
placed,' p. 101. n. 5.
nisasa,
nisesa,
nikkhivirt,* having thrown down,'
sigh.' 110 (a) (niMvasa). nisasiuna, 'sighing,' p. 129. n. 9.
2.
'entire,' p. 135, v.
'
I.
nikkhividum,
inf.,
40.
niccalH,
nijja,
'
' still,' Mg. niScala. 38. to be blamed,' p. 136, v. 13. '
nuâ^l, now,'
7, 20.
n9, 'thoy,' 110. ne(y)a = na vci, p.

Iêaip,
'
136, v. 13.
136.
(ti).
nijjida.
vanquished,' p. 84, n. 1. nijjhaida, looked at.' p. 98. n. 1. nijjhaanti, tliey look at,' p. 102,
' '
to load,'
êura,
'anklet,' p. 109
'
n. 7.
Ijlgochadi,
does not wiBh,'
83.
nena,
nedi,
' '
203
6.
by
this,' 110.
neda,m=nu + etad,
neha,
'
83, p. 94, n.
47.
8.
tisam, thirty,' p. 147, n. tise, AMg., 'of her,' 109.

*
leads,' 127.
tisu,
'
in three,' 112.
affection ,'=sineha
'
nehihi,
will lead,' 134.

*
tui, 'in thee,' 107. tue, ' with thee,' 106.
nomalia, fresh nhaa, bathed,'

'
jasmine,'
75.
tujjha,
V.
125.
nhai,
'
bathes,'
'
125.
to, or of thee,' 107, p. 117, 76 ( *tuhyam for tvbhyam). H. tujh (ko).

'
nhana,
bathing,' 30, 47.
tutta, 'broken,'
tuttai,
'
125.
is
'
broken,'
pleased,'
125.
T
tar, loc.
'
tuttha,
p.'
125.
tunnao, tunnago, JM., 'beggar?'

122, n.'2.
'
in thee,' 107.
tal, rae,
Apa. 'thee,'
'
107.
by
(1)
thee,'
106.
tubbhe, AMg., 'you,' 107. tumammi, M., in thee,' 106,
107.
tao,
=tado.
'
tume, AMg.,
(2)
three,'
'
AMg.,
112.
tumma, M.,
tumhakera,
'
'
tam,
(1)
him, her,
it,'
108.
107. of thee,' 107. your,' 76.

'
thou,'
(2) 'thou,' M., 107. tamsi, loc. AMg., 109. takkissadi, fut., 134.
tumharisa,
'
like you,' 24.
tnmhe,
'
'
you,'
106.
1.
takkemi,
'
I guess,' 45.
'
Pb. takk-.
H. tak-, gaze.' takkhanam, 'at that

n. 14."
'
turukka, incense,' p. 157, n. tuUa, 'equal,' p. 110 (a), tuvara, hasten,' 57.
'
time,' p. 90,
,
tacca, meritorious,' p. 151 n. tada, edge,' p. 124, n. 5. tanua, ' small, p. 121, v. 86. tanhiae, abl., 94.
'
8.
tuvatto, from thee,' 107. tussadi, is pleased,' 125. tuha, of thee,' 106. tuharn, thee,' 107. tuhu,'Apa. 'thou,' 107. musical instrument,' tura, JM.,
'
'
'
'
'
tatta,
tatto,
'
(1)
heated,' 125. (2) =tattva, p. 103, v.

'
p. 128, n.
2.
1.
teyasa,
AMg.
^tejasa,
'
from
'
thee,' 107.
tebbho, AMg.,
telia,
tevatthi,
'
from
104. that,' 109.
tattha,
there,' 45.
109.
'oil,' 15, 61, 68.
tado, 'then,' 11,
sixty-three,' p. 144, n. 4.
tadha,
'so,' 14.
'
tamhola =tambula, 71. tammi, loc. in that,' 109.

talavara,
'
Also tesatthi. tti=ti, 74. ttha, ye are,' 132.

'
'
chief,' p. 144, n. 5.
tavana, heating,' p. 110 (6). tavida=tatta, 'hot,' 125. tassa, of him, 45. tahim=tassirn, 27.
'
TH
thana, breast,' 38. thala, -surface,' p. 101, n. 6. thavai, architect,' p. 127, n.
'
'
3.
ta, 'so,' 109, p. 81, n.
4.
tae,
tava,
'
of,
'
tSo, abl.
by her,' 108. AMg., 109.
stood,' =thia, thia, (thida).

'
38.
6.
thii (6. thidi),
=thii.
135.
fever,' 17. tasa, M. tassa, 109.
thuvvai,
'
is
praised,'
ti,
thus,'
74.
theo=thevo, JM., 'little,' n. 8; p 135, v. 7.

p.
p.
127,
tikhutto,
n. 8.
AMg.,
'thrice,'
152,
thero, thora,
'
'
elder,' 82. large,' 71.
tinni, 'three,'
tiriccha,
tirai,
'
112.
Pb. tinn.
oblique,' tissa, M., ' of her,'

'is
74. 109.
H. tefhS.

1
p. 123, n.
accomplished,' 7. Also tirae.
135,
15.
having given,' 127. damsaissam, I will show,'

daia,
' '
127.
204
damsadi, damsanta,
'
bites," 125.
dimmuha,
'
'
facing
the
19.
quarters,'
damsanijja,
137.
worth
35, 46.
showing,'
dihi, M.,
'
firmness,'
it
daipsida,
(I)
'shown,'
diadu,
'let
be given,'
p.
93,
damsedum,
dakkhina,
134.'
'
(2) 'bitten,' 125. inf., 136.
n 1. diva, 'lamp,'
dlsai,
dihaurn,
17.
H. diya.
p.
dakkhina,
right-south,' 40. fee,' p. 93, n. 10

'
'appears,'
'
115.
103.
v.
14.
dacchara, M.
AMg.
'I will see,'
6. disadi, 125.
dacchami, p. 118, v. 77. dacchimi, dacchimmi, p. 121,

V. 85.
long-lived,'
duara,
'
door,'
'
'
57.
dukkha,
see,' 136, p.
datthuip, 'to
v."80.
'
119,
duggada,
trouble,' 51. poor,' p. 101, n.

'
7.
'
dadha, firm,' 60. dadiha, burnt,' 125. daddhavva, 'to be seen,'

'
duccarida, wickedness,' duttha gando, JM.,

p."
38.
'
rascal
p.
122, n.
3.
'
p.
119,
dunnimitta,
n. 2
bad omen,'
84,
v.'Sl.
dalayai, dalai, AMg., gives,' p. 153,

n.
1.
duttara,
'
invincible,'
'
38.
duddha,
'poor,'
'
milk,'
34.
Pb. duddh.
dalidda,
davavia,
n. 4.
'
26
125,
made
to give,' p.
H. dudh. dubbhai, is injured,'

'
134.
p.
dubbhejja,
n. 6.
'
'impervious,'
101,
dahi, curd,' p. 102, n. 9. dahidum, to burn,' 136.

daissaro, ' I will give,' 134. daum, ' to give,' 136. dadha, ' tusk,' 65, p. 116, v. 63.
duria, ' sin,' p. 135, v. 1. duruhitta. AMg., 'having mounted,' p. 145,
9.
dull aha,
dulaha.
'
difficult,'
50.
Also
'now,' 74. dadavva, to be given,' 137. dabai, 'heats,' p. 108 (c).

'
danim,
79.
duvara,
'
door,'
57.
damaguna,
darao,
'
festoon,' p. 101, n. boy,' p. 99, n. 5. dalarn, Mg., door,' p. 170, n. 9.

' '
2.
duvario, door-keeper,' p. 102, n. 8. duvalasa, AMg., 'twelve.' p. 145,

n. 4.
dava=<5uo<,
davaggi.
davijjau,
'
3.
duve, two,' 112. duvvinida. ill conducted,'

'
'
125.
forest fire.' p. 112 (h). 'let it be demanded,'
dussaha,
n. 11.
'
intolerable,'
'
51.
duha kaum,
having
split.' p. 124,
p. 113(6). daham, ' I will give,'
134.
p.
dahini,
dia,
'
= dakkhina,
112(a),
p.
dua, messenger,' p. 145, n. 6. duijjamane, AMg., 'wandering,'

p. 145, n. 6.
p. 146, n. 3.
twice-born,'
42.
136,
dusa,
'
robe,' p. 157, n. 6.
V. 11.
dusah.a= dussaha.
72.
61, 63, 79.
dia,r8i= devara,
de,=ê,
deula.
9.
3.
diaha, 'day,'
dikkhS,
'
9.
temple,'
82.
consecration,' p. 93, n.
'
dejja,
'
he might give,' AMg.,

6., -gives,' 125. 127.
'
13S.
dijjadi,
is
given,'
119.
dedi,
ditttia, 'seen,'
125.
devattae=de?'nff'5v.
92,
ii.
ditthi, 'sight,' 38, 60. Sindhi diti. Pb. ditth. H.-dlth.

ditthia.=di/ftffa,
devSnuppiya, AMg.,
'
beloved
of
95.
of.
the gods,' p. 146. n. 7. dovi, declension, 91. devvannaa 'soothsayer.'

n. 13.' desi, 'givest,' 127.
p.
93,
didha,
firm,'' 60.
dadha.
dina,
'
day,' p. 97, n.
5.
dilÎjia, 'given,' p. 109 (e).
126, p. 97,
5,
do,
'
two,'
112.
donha(m),
ins.
Also donni, gen. doloc. dohira

:
8u(m), doggacca,
106," V. 76.
'
205
city,'
poverty,'
p.
(2)
'
of the
.JM.
=S.
1, 2.
1.
pora, p. 136, vv,
dohala,
'
longing.'
23.
paottha,
'
courtj'ard,'
102, n.
pakka,
'
cooked,'
'
42.
DH
dhaya, JM., 'flag,' p. 130, n. dhQ.minai, = dharma, 48. dhamraia, juggler,' p. 82, n.
'
'
pakkhalanti, stunibling,' p. 171. pakkhiyarn, AMg., 'lasting a fortnight,' p. 145, n.

2.
' '
1.
1.
pagSra, JM., kind,' p. 125, n. 4. pagasa. AMg., clear,' p. 156, n. 6. pagasento, JM., revealing,' p. 122,
'
dharia, 'waited,' p. 129, n. 13 dhai, dhaai, places,' S 127. dharidutp, to support,' 136.
'
n. 2.
paecaa,
JM.,
trust,' p. 91, n. 6.
'
dhida,
dhiya.
S.
'daughter,'
cf.
74.
paccakkha,
n. 11.
'
vi.sible,' p.
98, n.
2.
dhuda.
paccacakkhldum,' to repulse,'
paccanida, restored,' AMg., paccutthuya.
p. 160,
li.
p. 89,
dhua, 'agitated,'
dhuam,
'
p. 115, v. 20. certainly,' p. 105, v. 42.

'
125.
'covered,'
'present,'
8.
dhunai, 'shakes,' 131. dhunijjai, is shaken,' 135. dhuvai, washes,' 129. Also dhu'
4.
paccupanna,
p. 155, n. 5.
AMg.,
vei
128.
'
dhuvvai,
is
shaken,'
135.
paccuse,
'
at dawn," p. 87, n.
'
dhuda
JM., dhuya), (M. dhua. 'daughter,' 19. p. 129, n. 12. Also S. duhida. dhumai, smokes,' p. 104, v. 13.
'
paecha,
'
afterwards,'
38.
pajjatti, 'sufficiency,' p. 141, n. 6. Also pajjattia, p. 110 (c). pajjalai, blazes,' p. 104, v. 13.
Pajjunna=Prad^?<ina,
pajjussua, 'excited.'
n.
1.
46.
dhuva,
'
incense,' p. 157, n.
1.
41, p.
168,
dhoadi, 'washes,' dhovai, dhovei.
129.
AMg.,
pajjharavedi, 'makes ooze,'

p. 94, n. 10.
40,
pataa,
patta,
'
'
flag,' p. 101
bandage
'
n. " putty "=padaa. p. 122,

,
4.
'
paada, (M.)
p."
'
'
evident,'
JM. payada,
,
n. 3.
136, V. 17. setout,' 125. paatta, p." 118, V. 76. payatta, 124, n.
'
pattha, eminent,' p. 159, n. patthavei, sends,' p. 140, n.

'
9. 3.
paatta,
JM.,
p.
1.
pada, cloth,' padaa, M.6.

'
15.
'
paavl, 'path,' p. 106, v. 107. payai, foot-soldier,' p. 129, n.

p. 136, v. 20.
tUka),
1
;
16.
cf
paasa, reveals,' 2. pal, 'towards,' p. 141,

'
padSga. JM pataka. Pischel 218." read padaa for pataa.

pad'\.=prciti,
flag ' (patakapaAMg. JM., 20. al-o padaya. Pai^.
On p.
101,
n.
9.
cf.
20.
padi.
padia
painna, 'scattered,'
paidi,
n.
1.
'
125.
padida), ' fallen,' 20. 'confessed,' pad'ikkante, 'AMg.,

(S.
AMg., 'beginning,'
husband,' p. 118, v.
'
p.
78.
168,
paiiyngaramane, AMg.,
vigil,' p. 145, n. 1.
p. 147, n. 7^
'
keeping
p. 93,
pai,
paiinjai,
uses,' 125.
paditthavida
125,
p.
= pratisthapita,
pautta
(1)
(2)
'used'
'
90,
1
n.'8.
paiittha,
'
n. 2 {prayukta). set forth,' p. 85, n. {pravrlta). exiled,' 125.
paditthia,,
'
padivajjadi
'
padivanna.
V. 83.
'
established,' 113 (b). attains,' 125. attained,' 125, p. 126,
paiima,
'
lotus,' 36, 57.
padivesia,
9
(pro-
'
paiira, (1)
'abundant,'
cur a).
padihai
127.
(6.
neighbour,' p. 99, n. 8. padihaadi), 'seems,'
206
p. 135,
padihara, JM.,' door-keeper,'

V. 2.
parisa,
n. 7.
AMg.,
'
'
community,'
p. 145,
padhana,
'
reading,'
'
16.
parissauli,
'
embraces,'
49.
padhama,
padhium,
padhiadi,
' '
first,' 20.
2.
is
to read,' p. 103, v. road,' 58.
pariharia, 'avoiding,' p. 84, n. 8. parunna, cried out,' p. 119, v. 76. parokkha, invisible,' p. 94, n. 3.
'
panaa,
'
'
confidence,' p. 91, n.
3.
palattam, 'cried,' p. 119, v. 79. palaa, M., JM., 'fled,' 125. M.

palaia. 6. palaida, p. JM. , also palSna.
172, n.
1.
panai, 'beloved,' p. 106, attached,' p. 136, v. 15.
v. 76;
1.
panamami, panamaha,
panasa,
^(6.
'
I salute,' p. 95, n.
paliovama, AMg.,
n. 8.
'
'
revere,' p. 113
'
'
myriad,' p. 147,
1.
(6).
phanasa),
bread-fruit,'
'
palobheum,
'
'
to allure,' p. 123, n.
[pannattam,
p. 145, n. 3.]
AMg.,
.> perceived,
panha,
pataria,
'
'
question,' 47. seduced,' p. 89, n.
palohida, 'greedy,' p. 102, n. 9. pallattha, .surrounded, etc.,' 60. hamlet,' p. 136, v. 17. palli, palhatta, brought to nought,' 52,
* '
10.
p. 121, v. 85.
cf.
H. palta.
'
Mar.
patta
45. 125. (2) patteya, 'alone,' p. 130, n. 11. ' severally,' p. 141, n. 11.
(1)
'
wing- leaf,' 'obtained,'
palat.
palhayanijja,
p. 158,' n. 7.
AMg.,
refreshing,'
37.
pavarnga, 'monkey,'
patthana,
'
request,' p. 83, n.
'
2.
patthara,
patthia, 'set out,' p.

'
stone,' p. 91, n. 6. 114, v.
57.
6. patthida, p. 82, n. 4. padolika, gateway,' p. 169. panti or pamti, row,' 35, p. 102,
display,' 111 (e). pavattai, occur,' 125. pavasanta, ' living abroad,' p. 106, V. 94. pavittha, 'entered,' p. 88, n. 2;
' '
pavanca,
pavutta,
n. 5.
p. 93, n. 9. ' arisen,' 125. pavvaa, ' mountain,' p. 115, v. 94.
papalinu,
n. 10.
'
fled
'
pabodhiami,
pabbhattha,
n. 8.
am
'
away,' p. 172, n. 1. awakened,' p. 87,

off,'
pavvaia,
'
entered the Order,' JM.,
slipped
p.
90,
p. 130, n. 12 (pravrajita). pavvaittae, inf. AMg., p. 146, n. 2. pasammai, ' is soothed,' p. 115, n. 6.
pabhada,
'
morning,
p. 97, n. 8, 9.
4.
pamada,
n. 5.
Mg., [paala6i, p. 172, v. 21].

pasadikida,
'
'
goest
forward,"
7.
'
pleasure,' p. 94,
presented,' p. 98, n.
,
pamhala, AMg., 'downy,'

'
p.
159,
pasida,
n. 2.
paramatthado, really,' p. 90, n. 2. parassim = parasmin, 111. parahua, cuckoo,' p. 157, n. 7. pariynga, AMg.,' wandering,' p. 146.
'
be quiet,' p. 83, n. 1. to request,' p. 175, [patidum, Mg.

'
'
paha, path,' p. Ill (/). paharanta, attacking,' pahavanahirn, loc. Mg.

'
,
p. 84, n. 92.
1.
n." 10.
parikamma,
pariggaha,
p. 83,
V. 20.
'
toilet,' p. 88, n. 5. wife,' p. 90, n. 2.

'
pahada = pabhada,
'
parlccaia,
n. 6.
'
having abandoned,'
p.
pahava, power,' p. pahui (6. pahudi),

12.
p. 88, n. 4. 94, n. 3.
cf.
AMg., paidi and

'
'beginning," pabhii.
n. 10.
pariccatta,
'abandoned,'
'
115,
pahuttanain, power,' p. 90, paa, foot,' p. 122, n. 4.

'
parinaidavva, marry,' p. 03,

p. 93, n. 14.
to
n. 4.
be made to pariaedavva,
125.
'
payacchitto,
n. 4.
'
expiation,'
p.
152,
pSikka.
'
foot-soldier,' 82.
parinlda,
'
married,'
paiia
(6.
puuda).
'
'
Prakrit,'
12,
pariluppamana, JM.,
'
being des
p. 103, v. 2.
troyed,' p. 130, n. 9. mendicant,' peurivvnjaa, p. 109(6).
50,
pBuin, to drink (t>. padurn), pauiiiuna, 'putting on,' p.

'
136.
''''*
123,
n.'S.
paunitttl, 'fulfilling,'
207
102; fut. puloissam,
*
AMg.,p.
146,
puloanto,
134.
n.lO.
paubbhavittha, 'appeared, AMg.,

p. 151, n. 4.
puvvaratta, AMg.,
first
2.
'
part of
the night,' p. 145, n.
pausa, JM., rains,' p. 139, n. 7. pnga, AMg., refined,' p. 158, n. 6. thief,' p. 1G5, n. 5. padaccale, Mg.
' ' , '
puvvanupuvvim, AMg.,
in succes'
sion,' p. 145, n. 6. puficide. Mg. =pucchido

p. 165, n. 5.
asked,'
earth,'
padava, tree,' p. 87, n. 3. parnvana, pigeon,' p. 157, n. 7. pariyaya, JM., 'coral tree,' p. 128,
'
'
puhavi
p.
' '
(S.
!
pudhavl),
'
118, V. 78.
n. 5.
paridosia, 'reward,'
doSia.
ll.Mg.,pali 125.
pavai, pavedi, 'obtains,'
peccha, see ', 40. pecchai, sees,' p. 114, v. 57. pecchae, atm., 115. pecchissarn, M., I will see,' 118.
'
pasa,
'
side,' 49.
pekkhacii,
pokkhissam,
khihimi.
'
panada,
n. 4.
pahunaya,
'palace,' p. 102, n. 6. 'guest,' p. 124,
sees,' 40, 81. Apa. fut., 134.
pek-
JM
pemma,
74.
'
pi=api,
'
pia, dear,' 9. piaana, lover,' p. 112

piussia,
'
declension, V. 86.
(a),
'affection,' 15, 68; pema, p. 121, 98.
peranta,
'
limit,' 76.
paternal aunt,'
74.
pikka,
*
'
ripe,'
69=pakka.
pittei, crams,' p. 107, v. 171. piniddha, 'put on,' p. 159, n. 11.
pida,
6.
father,' (M. pia), declen;
gen. piduno, piuno. sion, 97 pivai, pivadi, 'drinks.' 125. pidhamadda, ' parasite,' p. 160,
n. 2.
sent,' p. 82, n. 3. sends,' p. 128, n. 6. peskami, Mg. , ' I see,' p. 168, n. pokkhara, ' lotus,' 38, 71. pokhar, ' tank.' pottha, ' belly,' p. 107, v. 171. popphall, ' areca nut,' 74.
'
pesida,
'
pesei,
4.
H.
pomnna,
p. 145, n.
'lotus,'
36,
82,
cf.
pinanijja,
AMg.,
'
'pleasing,' p. 158,
paiima. posaha, AMg.,

1.
n. 7. pisei, pisedi,
'fast-day,' Pali uposatha.
74,
crushes,' 65.
'
pucehai, pucchadi,
puttlia
(1)
'
asks,' 60.
PH
phamsa,
phagguna,
' '
asked,' 125 {prsta). (2) 'touched,' AMg., 125

(sprsta).
(3)
'
touch,' 38, 49, 64. the month,' 37.

crystal.'
6.
back,'
JM.
Gfij.
thi.
puth.
(prstha). Sindlii pu-
phadiha,
'
Alsophaliha,
i9, 38, p. 101, n. 5.
puijna
'
(1) 'full,'
phanasa=panasa, pharisaga, AMg.,

48. 86.
'soft,'
p.
161,
(2)
'
meritorious,'
n. 2 (*sparsaka).
puttSi, son,' 2; declension, puttakidao, ' fosterchild,' p.

n. 14.
phSsa, AMg., =pharnsa, 63. phurantaa, manifest,' p. 112

'
(g).
90,
phusai, AMg.,
'
touches,'
38.
puttalia,
'
statue,' p. 94, n. 10.
puppha,
puhup.
purattha,
'
'flower,'
38.
3.
O.H.
bailie,
H. phup.
East,' p. 160, n.
71.
Mg.,
'
'bull,'
p.
170,
n.
9.
Apa.
badifia,
baiilu.
is
,
purisa, 'man,'
purisakkara,
strength,'
'
bajjhai,
H., etc., bail, bound,' 135.

'
with
man's
Mg
'
hook,' p. 166, n.
2.
AMg.,
104.
'
p. 153, n. 3.
92.
baddha,
bandhai,
'bound,'
binds,'
125.
10.
PururuvS, puliâ, Mg.

,
125.
man,'
bappha,
pros. past.
'
steam,' p. 84, n.
puloedi,
looks
at,'
69
bainbana=brahmana,
52.
208
'
bhavissam,
n. 5.
(c).
'
balakkara, violence,' 34. baladdaka, Mg., ' bull,' p. 170,

perforce,' p. 101, n. 9. baliarn, ' more strongly,' p. 108 bahinia, 'sister,' p. 98, n. 5.
I will be,' 134.
bal,
bhaveam,
'
'
'
might
be,' 129.
bhaa, part,' p 100, n. 5. bhaadi. fears, 125, 132.

bhai,
S
shines,' p. 112
'sister's
(g^).
6.
bhadi.
144,
bahini. sister," s 19. bahuphala fruitful,' 5. barasa, twelve.' p. 130, Apa baraha. H. barah.
'
127.
'
bhainejja,
n.
2.
son,'
p.
'
M.
n. 2.
cf. 24.
bhadusaa.
bhiudi,
baha,
'
bihei, ' bla, biya,

'
tear,' p. 84, n. 10. fears.' 125, 132.
100 brothers,' 60. 'frown,' p. 117, v. AMg., bhigudi.

'is
'
'
64.
AMg.
JM.
'second,'
p. 136, V. 19.
bhijjai, V. 56.
split,"
135,
p.
114,
bujjhai, is wakened,' Pb. bujjh.
125.
133.
cf.
bhinna,
split,' 125.
'
buya, AMg.,
'
'
might
say,'
bola, speech,' p. 124. n. 8. cf. H. bolna. ' bolanti, they pass,' p. 114, v. 57. bolina, ' passed.' p. 120. v. 83.
bhindai, splits,' 1_'5, 130. bhia, bhida, frightened,' 125. bhujjai, is enjoyed,' 135. bhunjiadi. bhunjadi, enjoys,' 125. 130. bhutta. 'enjoyed,' 125. bhumaa, brow.' p. 117, v. 64.
'
"
S.
BH
bhaavam,
103.
'
bhua, bhuda. bhettum, to

'
become,'
125.
split.' 136.
blessed,'
declension,
bhoana,
bhottum,
'
'
meal,' 9. to enjoy,' 136.

75. 127.
bhai,
'
hire,' p. 150, n. H.
'
bhodi, becomes,' 4.11,

9.
bhakkanti, they eat,' p. 102, n. Rather bhakkhanti, vide 40. bhagga, broken,' p. 129, n. 6.
'
M.
hoi.
M
maa,
(l)
broken,' 135. bhajjanta, 'being broken.'

bhajjai,
n. 62.
'
is
p.
116,
'dear,' p. 112
'
p.
{<7).
87,
n.
."J;
(mvrga).
bhajia,
bhanjai,
'
'
wife,' p. 135, V. 3. breaks,' 130.

'
Also mia.
(2)
intoxication, etc' p. 97,

n. 2.
{mada).
bhatta,
lord,'
'
declension.
'
97
60.
(3) (4)
dead,'
125.
{mrta).
p.
gen. bhattino.
bhattidaraa, crown prince bhattha, dropped,' 125.

'
Also mua, muda.
'
mode of {=maya),
105, V. 11.
bhanaii,
bhanedi,
niadi,
'
'
128,
speaks,' 132. Also 132; passive bha-,

1.
Also maia. maagala, JM., 'elephant,' p. 128.

n. 9.
bhatta,
135, n. food-rice,' p. 169, n.

'
raaanijja, p. 158, n.
AMg..
1.
'
'invigorating,'
p. 120, n. 9.
bhatta,
97
;
husband,'
blessed,' 45.
declension,
maarahara,
V. 83.
sharks' home,'
'
gon. bhattuno.
'
bhadda,
through.
H. bhalS
cf.
Apa. *bhallau.
alia,
M.,
AMg..
{ardra).
'wet,'
p.
=6.
107 (a).
adda
H.
bhamara,
'
'
bee,'
maalaiichana, moon,' p. 94, mai, loc, in me,' 106. mai, Apa., by me,' 107. -maia = ma i/a. mai, doe,' p. 108 (6).
'
'
bha lira. bhamaida, agitated,' Bharaha, 19.
maiia, 'tender,' p. 112 (a), p. 114,

V. 3.
p. 101
n. 2,
maiila, 'bud,'
maiilanta,
'
71.
v. 62.
bhavam = 6/tauan
103.
'
declension,
budding,' p. 116, maiili, 'head,' 61.
bhavitta, bhavitt&narn, AMg., having been,' 122.
maura = mora,
82.
mao, by
'
nie,' 106.
mamsuim, mamsuni,
AM<j;.,
209
festival,' 81.
mous-
taches,' 93. iiiakkada, 'ape,' p. 107, v. 171.
mahusava, groat mada, S. maa,

'
M.
'
mother,'
declension,
97.
magga,
road,'
'
45.
maridum,
'
to strike,' 136.
tj
inagganta,
demanding,' p. 09, n. 9. H. mag-na. selfish,' 39. p. 13G, maccara, S

'
mala,
'
garland,' declension,
'
91.
maliâî, with strike,' 134. miaa, ' hunting,' p. 87, n. 2.
V.
10.
'
maocha,
majjara,
jara.
fish,' 56, p.
'
114, v. 56.
miahka, moon,' p. 94, n. 10. mimja, AMg., 'marrow,' j) ISO,

'
S.
fat,' 67.
M. mam4.
n".
3.
midhuna,
S.
'
pair.s,'
ij
92.
majjida,
swept,' p. 100, n.
'
mittca =niaitreya,
72.
jj
majjha
p.
(1)
(2)
middle,'
'
44.
milana,
16.
'
M. 'of me,' S 107. majjhaaranimi, in the middle,'

10.3, V. 3.
'
misimisinta,
faded,' 57. shining,'

'
p.
159,
n.
missa
'
(M. misa),
'
mixed,'
125.
1.30,
49.
majjhanna, midday,'
jhamdine,
n. 3; also
at
74, majmidday, p. 87,

52. 69.
mua, muda,
muai,
'
dead,'
majjhanha,
releases,'
'
p.
170,
v. 115.
majjhima,
mattia,
mitti.
middle,'
muinga,
inuccai,
'
drum,'
'
p. 130, n. 7.
'earth,'
55.
H. matti,
mukka,
mucchia,
manasa, manina,
manlsi.
'
ins., 104.
'
of gems,' p. Ill (c). clever,' p. 112 (A).
AMg.,
mujjhai,
'
released,' 125. is released,' 135. stunned,' p. 114, v. 56. greedy,' p. 145, n. 9.
'
is
perplexed,'
125.
'
manussa, 'man,'
maniisa,
63.
49.
36.
AMg.
muncai, muncadi,
S 125, 130.
'
releases.'
1 ;
manojja,
"
charming,'
S.
'
manoradha,
manairaha.
naandalagga.
V."
wish,'
14.
M.
116,
scimetar,'
p.
Also muncedi. 28 passive munciadi, 135, n. mutthi, handful,' p. 102, n. 3. JM.. mutthiga, p. 1.30, n. 12. munai, knows,' Pali munati.
'
61.
manne, '.I think,' 115. -matta= -metta, p. 119, v. 81. madda, crushing,' p. 88, n. 6. mamam, M., AMg., JM.. me,'
'
munala, mutta,
'
lotus fibre,'
60.
urine,' p. 130, n. 9. muddha, 'foolish' (niugdha).

*
muddha,
mulla,
'
'head,' declension,' value,' 50.

face,' S 13. noisy,' 26.
92.
'
98.
107".
muha,
6.
'
mammadha,
maha),
'love' (M. vam-
muhala,
25.
'
marai, maradi,
dies,' 125.
(6.
mulahi, M.=mulat, will moavaissasi,

134.
make
release,'
maragaa, M.
moragada),
p.
emerald,'
12,
93,
n.
2.
p. 115, V. 6.
raoavia, "having p. 109 {&).
made
to release,'
mallia,
jasmine,' p. 101, n.
'
masana, cemetery,' maSca, ma^âti, Mg.

n. 2; p. 168, n.
9.
47.
, '
fish,' p. 166,
moavedi, moggara, mugur.
'
makes
'hammer,'
release,' 128. Bg. 71.

'
moccham, mocchihimi,
'
will
re-
mahara,
'
of me,' p. 118, v. 77.
mahao, AMg., ^=mahatah,

mahasi, 'desirest,' 113
(c).
103.
lease, '" 134, p. 118, V. 76. motta, pearl,' p. 115, n. 6. mottura, to release,' 136.
'
maharao,
great king,' declension,

'
,
mora,
'
'
peacock,'
are,'
82, p. 108
(b).
99, n.
mblla, 'price,'
precious,' p. 167, p. 117, v. 75.
8.
71.
H. mol.
30,
132.
mahalika, Mg.
raahila,
'woman,'
'
mha, we mho.
Also
mahuara,
14
bee,' p. 109 (d).
mhi,
'
am,'
S 30, 132.
210
B
raa
,
laddha,
25.
4.
'
gratified
'
,'
'taken,' 34, 125: inf. laddhurn, S 136: passive labbha, labbliadi, S 1.34. Also lambhiadi.
raia,
formed,' p. 129, n.
'
135.
'
ralsara,
prince,' p. 144, n. />. rakkhaghara, 'prison,' p. i)r, n. 7.
lahai,
raccha, highroad,' 44. ranna, ' jungle,' 74. Alii.

'
AMg.
rannau, 92. ranna, by the king,' 99. rattim, during the night.'
'
'
p.
87,
n. 7.
ramai, rassi,
ravai,
'
'
delights,'
'
j?
125.
9.
rasSala.
'
lower world,'
S
takes,' 125. take.' p. 95. n. 2. lahua, 'light,' S 13. lahum, 'quickly,' p. 91, n. 2. lahe, 1 take.' atm.. 115. lahearn, opt., p. 88, n. 7. laaklya, Mg. , ' royal,' 165, n. 1. laiile, Mg., palace," 82. lautte. Mg. , :=rajapiUrnh, p. 160. n. 1.
lahetsu,
' ' '
47. weeps,' 125.

'
ray,'
lia,
'
litta,
1 1
attached to,' 12.5. smeared,' p. 122.

'
Also Una.
n. 3 (Up).
rahasa,
force' (rabhasa), p.
(/).
libbhai,
lihai, (1) (2)
'
is
'
licked,'
135.
rahassa, secret,' 49. raa, king,' declension,

. '
licks,' 125.
'
writes,'
'
p.p.
lihida.
S.
Jj
99.
raia, 'mustard,' p. 107, v. 128. ral, road,' p. 87, n. 4. raesi, royal sage,' 80.
'
riecha, bear,' 39, 60. rittattana, 'emptiness, p. 112 (h).

'
painted,' p. 100, n. 5. lukka, sticking to,' p. 105, v. 49. luddha, hunter,' p. 87, n. 8. luppai, is robbed,' 125. lekkha, list,' p. 125, n. 5.
' '
'
'
16a, M.
world,'
92.
9.
Apa.
*!
lou.
;
riddhi,
93."
'
increase,'
58.
73.
AMg., JM.,
loga,
loc.
risi=rsi,
60.
AMg. ,plur.
risao,
logamsi,
loadi, Mg., 'shines,'
129.
ruai, ' weeps,' 125. 125. ruia, bright,' ruccai, ruccadi, ' is made bright,' 125, 129. rujjhai, ' is obstructed,' 135. ruttha, angered,' 125.
' ij '
loua,
H.
'
salt,"
75.
Sindhi lunu.
lun.
loluva, 'greedy,' p. 108 (rf), (=/nlupa). lohara, blacksmith,' 82. ro/i,' p. 166, n. 4. lohida, Mg.
' , '
rundhedi,
'
obstructs,' pp., ruddha, 125; passive, rubbha. supports,' p. 120, v. rumbhai,

'
82.
va = ira,
"
;
p. 108, n. 4.
'
ruvai, weeps.' Also rovai sive ruvvai, 125. rusai, is vexed,' S 125. rudhira, ' red,' ^ 13.
'
pas-
vaassa, companion," vayasi, AMg., 'spoke,'
49.
ruva,
'
form,'
'
17.
(M.
rila,
Ji
9).
p. 145, n. 8. ' story,' p. 123, n. 7. vaiyara, , vaira, .M. 'hostile,' 61. vae. AMg., herd," p. 150, n. 5.
JM
'
'
reha, M.
rehai, M.
lines,' 94.
'
shines,' p. 103. v. 4.
vakkala,
bark,'
37.
roadi,
weeps,' S 125, p. 99, 7rodadi, rovai, ruai, ruvai: fut. rodissam, roccham, S 134; pass., rottum, inf. rodladi, 135;
'
vakkha,
vaggana, vaggura,
n.
".. '
breast," p. 101, n. 6. jumping,' p. 158, n. 5. crowd.' p. 152. AMg.,
136.
vaccha
(l)
'
ciiild,'
"
39 (ratsa).
(2) (3)
'
'
go,' see vaccha'i. tree {vrksa).

'
creeper,' 12. Laccia=Lakami, p. Ill (c). latthi, 'stick,' p. 110(a): p.
laa
(6.
lada),
'
breast, = vakkha. vacchai, 'goes," p. 123, n. 4.

(4)
'
121.
v.
14.
vaccha, girl,' p. 95, n. 4. vajja, adamant,' p. 101, n. vajjadi, wanders," 129.

' ' '
6.
vajjanti, is sounded,' p. 130. n. vajjia, excepting,' p. 84, n. 9. vajjha, * of execution,' p. KH), n.
' '
211
7.
vialia,
M.,
'
vanished,' p. 119, v. 79.

G.
'
vialida, S., p. 97, n.

3.
viinna,
n.'5.
AMg.,
'
bestowed,'
9.
p.
144,
vanfiami, Mg., 'I wander,' p.

n. 8.
17"),
viuha,
'
learned,'
vattadi, twins,' 45. vatti, box,' p. 157, n. 2. vatte, opt. of vattadi, 117. vatthida, engaged in,' 74.
'
viesa,
'
abroad,' p.
separation,'
' '
10(), v.
7G.
vioa,
'
9.
vikkaa,
sale,' p. 166, n. 5.
vada,
vadha,
-vadaa,
'
'fig-tree,'
15.
AMg.,
viggha,
obstacle,'
'
!?
.36.
19.
flag,' p. 130, n. 3.
'
vighattha, eaten up,' p. 129, n. 10. vicchadda, liberality,' p. 130, n. 8.

'
vaddhida,
increased,' pp. 83,
6.
vijju,
'
lightning,' p. 136, n. 10.

'
vatta,
leaf,' p. !y,n. 10; pp. 108. 3; p. 115, V. 6. vattia, 'paint brush,' p. 82, n. G. wick.' cf. H. batti, vattum, to speak,' 130. vattehami, I will perform,' 134. vaddhavanaarp, AMg., birth cere'
'
' '
vijjulia,
vijjhai,
'
lightning,'
p.
23.
wounds,'
35.
112
(a)-
Virnjha,
vidahara
vinajjai,
V. 82.
(?), p. 140, n. 2.
'is
'
perceived,'
p.
120,
'
vinadida.
puzzled,'
'
p. 96, n. G.
mony,' p. 128, Vappairaa, 34.
n. 5.
vinodemi,
vinnatta.
n.'
1 divert,' p. 99, n. 3.
'
reported,'
'
125, p. 93,
vammaha,
p. 172, V. 21.
' '
10.
is
M.,
'love,'
25,
vinnaviadi,
p."
reported,'
125,
95, n.
3.
varittha, choicest,' 111 (6). varisa, rain,' 57. valia, 'turned round,' 111 (/). vavadesi, pretending,' p. 91, n.
' '
vinnada, 'understood,'
125.
'
vinnavei
5.
(S.
vinnavedi),
inf.
re-
ports,'
p. 94 n. n. 2.
1
;
125;
vavasissam, I will decide,' p. 89, 5. vasantusava, spring-festival,' 81. vasaha, bull,' 60. vasahi, dwelling.' 19=vasai.
'
'
vinnavedutn, p.p. vinnavida, p. 93.
vittharena,
I
vidduma,
'
vasa, by force of,' 92. -vaha, 'path,' p. 115, v. vahai, 'carries,' 125.
'
14.
'
vidhappai, vipphodao, 'pimple,' vibbhala, 'agitated,'

'
in full,' p. 93, n. 6. coral.' p. 115, v. 6. has arranged,' 135.

'
vahu,
91vaai,
vai,
'
'bride,'
13; declension,
S.
9.
vimukka, vimuha,
'
p. 87, n. 11. 54. ' unloosed,' p. 114, v. 3. indifferent,' p. 106, v. 76.
'
vaasa,
'
blows,' p. 112 (a). crow,' p. 102, n.

'
vaadi.
vimhaa,
vimhanijja,
p. 158, n.
astonishment,' 47. AMg., 'nourishing,'

7.
M.=vaai,
;
'
127.
vimharia=vlsaria,
90. p.
p. 109 (d).
vau, wind'
vadaana,
n. 5.
declension,
'
vivajjai,
158,
window,'
p. 102, n. 6.
vamaddana,
massage,'
'
valaga, AMg., snake," p. 160, n. G. vavadiadi, "is destroyed,' p. 169;
perishes,' p. 123, n. 3. vivara, aury,' p. 121 v. 85. vivujjhadi, ' awakes,' p. 97, n. 7. visaraghadanta, 'dispersing,' p. 100,
'
' ,
vavadedurp, p. 167. n. 3. vaharanta, calling,' p. 101, n. 4. vaharesu, summon,' p. 140, n. 9.

inf.,
'
V. 115. visalla, 'pointless,' p. 176, n. vissa, ' musty,' p. 166, n. 6. vissama, rest,' p. 88, n. 7.
'
2.
vahi, illness,' p. 129, n. 10. vahiria, outside,' p. 124, n.

' '
1.
vi=api,
via,
'
3, 74.
').
like,' p. 81, n.
'
viana,
pain,' 72. viambhidam, ' exploit, p. 94, n. viala, ' lame,' p. 88, n. 7.
7.
vihatthimitta, AMg., 'measure of a span ,' 69. vihalia, trembling,' p. 124. n. 7. vihana, "manner,' p. 123, n. 3. vihadi, 'shines,' 127. vihi, performance,' p. 93, n. 9. vihu, moon,' p. 136, v. 19. viana, fanning,' p. 144, n. 5.
'
'
'
'
212
visaip,
'
INTEODtrOTION TO PRAKRIT.
twenty,'
112.
khala,
sakbal.
sihkhala,
ij
35.
Mar
pearl,'
' takest visameisi, rest,' 105, p. V. 49. visasadi, ' trusts,' p. 91, n. 4. visaria, ' forgotten,' p. 109 (d).
H.
sikar.
'
Bg. jikal.
of
p.
samkhasutti,
p. 103, V. 4.
mother
samkhaa,
V. 63.
'coagulated,'
'
116,
vis5=visani, 112. vihattha, loathsome,"

'
p. 117, v. 75.
samkhoa,
shock,' p.
14. v. 3.
vuccai,
'
is
'
vuddha.
said,' 135. grown,' S 55.

11.
'
samghia, 'applied,'
p. ll(i, v. 01.
vutta, 'iinished,' p. 87, n. vuttanta, news,' (iO.

'
vuttham, 'dawned,' p. 119, vubbhai, is carried,' 135. vudha, carried,' 125.

'
v. 80.
true,' S 44. verified," p. 109 (e). sacchaha, of the same hue,' p. 102 n. 2.
'
sacca,
saccavia,
'
'
sajja,
'
ready," p. 128,
'
1.
vGlia,
'
veyana, AMg.,
n. 6.
order of battle,' p. 129, n. 4. 'wages.' p. 150,

'
sajjha,
satthaa,
practicable,'
'
63.
veccham.
pain,' p. 96, n. 1. ' I shall know,' 134. vejja, 'learned,' 61. vedha, 'enclosure,' p. 115, v. 14. vedhia, 'enclosed,' p. 115, v. 14. vedia, 'raised seat,' etc., p. 101,
n. 5.
veana,
twilight,' 44. troop,' p. 112 (a), satthia, ' weapon,' p. 140, n. 7. sanha, ' smooth.' p. 160, n. 5. sannia, ' made of sign,' p. 124, n. 8. sannihie, in vicinity,' p. 122, n. 5.
'
samjha,
'
satta
(1)
(2)
'
seven.'
etc." (sattra).
'nature,
'
vedissarn= veccham,
verulia,
V. 78.
'
134. cat's eye,' 58.
sada,
112.
p.
S.,
hundred.'
S
M. saa,
34.
5t
12
vehavvam, 'widowhood,'
118,
sadda,
n. 12.
'
sound,"
'
Pb. sadd
p.
H. sad.
saddavia,
sutnrnoned,'
vo, 'you, of you,' 106, 107. vocchani, 'I will speak,' S 134. vojjha, to be carried,' 137.
'
124
p. 146
saddavetta, AMg., gerund.,

n. 4.
vodhum,
to carry.' 136. vottum, ' to speak.' 136. voliya, JM., 'passed,' p. 129, n. 8. M. bolina. M. bolo, cf. cry.' volo, JM., ' speech.'
'
'
saddhasa,
[Saddhike,
n. 3.
'
panic,' p. 84, n. 5.
Mg..
'feast,'
p.
168
samtappadi,
li.
'is in distress,' p. 98
3.
samtava, 'anguisli,' p. S3, 3. samdattha,' bitten through.' p. 116

v. 63.'
sa
(1
'
with.'
(sfl).
(2)
own'
(sva), p. 95, n.
(>.
saa,
(f^.
sada.
AMg., saya.
SS
Mg.,
112,
saphala, fruitful,' 5. sapphala. of good results," p. 122

'
!} '
n. 14
Sada),
'hundred,'
'2,
p. 144, n. 4.
sabbhava, 'good
p. 89, n. 7.
nature,'
34
10
saada,
'
cart,' (Mg., âala),

'
S 16.
saadia, toy cart,' p. 98. n. 8. saasa, presence,' p. 82, n. 7. samlehana, AMg., "final mortifica'
samaa,
'contract,
p.
8!t,
2.
n.
'doctrine.' p. 150, n.
samagga
n. 3.
coniplett>,'
p.
129.
tion,' p. 147, n. 6.
samsaida, 'questioned,'
saki<ai,
n. 5
p. 89, n. 6. p.
samannagaya,
.AMg.,
'
provided
sakkei,
'
is
able,'
123,
with,' p. 147, n. 4.
samappida,
'Sanskrit.
S
1.3.3.
ii.
!j
Hakkada,
."akkft,
'
II.
n. 3;
'consigned." p. "^4, iuiperat. sainappehi, p. 9S.

,
able,'
'
n
3.
.">.
sakkara,
favour,' p. 125, sakkunomi, I can,' S 131.

'
'
samadhatta, 'begun,'
p. 147, n. 3.
p. 127, n. 4.
'
saniane. .\Mg., pass. part.
being,
sahkala,
chain,'
19.
Also san-
INTRODUCTION TO PRAKUIT.
[damalovide,
p. 107, n. 7.
213
(M. sariccha),
Mg.,
'
mounted,'
I
sarikkha,
40, C(^
'like"
samasattha,
n.
1.
'
'consoled,'
samikkha, AMg.,' discovers,'
125. p. 131,
Salavahana,
23.
sahai,
samuggaa,
saraudaara,
box,' p. 82, n.
' '
6.
125; imporat. sahasu, p. 118, v. 76; gerund. AMg. sahetta, p. 141, n. 10.
'tells,'
'
samucchida,
elevated,' 45. address,' p. 89, n.

S
,
sahania, praiseworthy,'
7.
I
49.
sahavo,
si,
'
'.saints,' 93.
samudda,
p. 145, n.
'
ocean,'
45.
'
'
art,' 132.
samuppajjittha, AMg.
2.
occurred,'
siya,
AMg.,
'
may
'
be,' S 133.
samupehiyanara,
AMg.. 'perceivp.
siala,
jackal,' 60.
H.
sial.
ing,' p. 131. n. 1. samullasanta, 'brilliant,'

n. 5.
simba, simgha,
sikkhavaiya.
p. 145, n. 4.
101,
lion,' 65. AJNIg. . 'precept,'
sampai, JM., 'now,' p. 127, n. I. sampadatta, 'bestowed,' p. 125,

n.
1.
sikkhida, learnt,'
sijjhai,
40.
'is
,
fulfilled.'
125; fut.
sainpehei,
n. 3
:
AMg..
'
reflects,' p. 152,
p. 147, n. 9. sificai. 'pours,' 125.

sifija,
'
AMg
gerund, sampehetta, p. 146,

'stores,' p. 141.
'
sitlha,
'
n. 3.
jingle,' p. Ill (d). told,' 125, p. 127, n. 6.

'
sambalayam, JM.,
n. 7.
_
siniddha, sticky,' etc., sineha, affection,' 47.

'
47.
cf.
neha.
100,
sambhariuna,
p. 120, v! 84.
remembering,'
1.
'
sitta,
n.
4.
'sprinkled,'
08.
'
'
125,
p.
samma, AMg.,
'
'
'
right,' p. 145, n.
4.
siri=sVi,
'
sammajjia, swept,' p. 156, n. saraa, autumn,' p. 141, n. 5.

Sarassadi,
11.
sivia, AMg., [îvila, Mg.

,
sisa,
!
palki,' p. 140, n. 8. p. 174, n. 1 head,' p. 101, n. 1.
camp,'
sarisa,
[6ala,
like,' 24.
,
Mg.
accent," p. 109, n.
2.
I ;
Siha, M., 'lion.' Apa. slhu, 73

sihu,
cf.
simha.
(c).
05.
salalia, 'praise,'
57.
(/).
' ,
rum,' p. 110
hard.'
S
savana,
'
ear,' p. ill
sua,
H. saut.
suai,
(I)
'
125.
savatti, co-wife,' Mar. savat. sa vara =,a6or a, 18.

'
36.
(2)
'
-parrot' (suka).
132.
'
sleeps,'
suandhi.
'
savva,
'
all," 50.
'
H. sab.
fragrant,' p. 100, n. 5. suia, cleaned,' p. 156, n. 4. suidavva, ' to be slept,' p. 87, n.
7.
savvannu,
savvanaru,
omniscient,' 09. 'of all," 111.

(g).
AMg.
SUkkha,
sujjhai,
'
dry,'
savvesiin.
H. sukha.
is
Pb. sukkha. Bg. Suka.
38.
sasahara, moon," p. 112 sasimuhi, 'moon.' p. Ill
purified,"
125.
(d).
sassiriada.
'
'
loveliness,' p. 101, n. 8.
S
sutthu, -well,' SUuai, 'hears,'

I
38.
131. S.
siuiadi,
;
sahattha, own hand," s&hava =,<-aphara, S 13.
49.
sahassa,
'
'
thousand,'
'
49.
i
132 gerundive sunidavva, 137 passive, suniadi 135, n. -grog-shop,' [Sundikagala, Mg.
; ,
p'.
'l08, n. 3.
p. 90, n. 6.
sahl, friend," 13. saamsamae, in the evening,' p. 93,

n. 3.
sunua, 'empty.'
sunna.
Pb.
H.
sijna.
saadam, S. welcome,' âadam, II. ocean," p. [6aala, Mg.

,
' , '
49.
Mg.
6.
175, n.
'hears,' 125, 12S, 131. sunai. sunha, ' daughter in-law,' p 100,
cf.
SUnedi,
V. 107.
saunia, fowler,' p. 87, n. 8 Sauntala, p. 88, n. 2. sao, ' from his own,' p. 152, u.
'
sutta
7.
(I) 'asleep,'
34, 125.
(2)
=sutra.
214
suttaa,
AMg.,
6.
'
'belt,' p. 159, n. 10.

ij
sodavva=soavva.
sodhania,
n. 4.
'
'
137.
hoard.' 126. cf. sua. suddha, 'purified, 125. siindaraara, more beautiful," p. 109 (a).
'
suda,
to
be purified,'
p.
89,
sumaraua, memory,' p. remembers." sumaradi,

'
10 (a).
S
57.
sir,' 48, 61. sleeps,' 132. sovana, stairs,' p. 102, n. 5. sohagga, 'auspicious,' p. 101, n. 4.
.somma, good
' '
sovai, sovadi,
Also sumaredi, 128. (M. bharai. p. 120, V. 84) ; caus. part, sumaravida, p. i'O, n. 3.
summai,
'
is
heard,'
haa, hada (1)

(2)
'
135
(</).
'
struck,' taken,'
hia.
125. 125.
cf.
suvai, 'sleeps.'
125.
suvahum.
n. 12.'
'
very
much,'
p.
5.
123.
hage, AMg.,
hafi, 107.
S.,' 11, 107.
Apa.
8.
1.
suvina, 'dream," p. 128, n. SUVO, to-morrow," 57. suvvai, is heard,' 135. I shall wait sussuissam,
'
hattha,
hanai,
'
'
delighted,' p. 145, n.
hadakka, Mg., 'heart,'

kills.' 125.
'
p. 170, n.
upon,'
134.
' '
hattha,
haddhi,
'
hand.'
!;
38.
'
suhaa,
fortunate," p. 110 (a). suaa, spy," p. 165, n. 6. suida, JM., suiya, 'shown.' p. 128,
n. 5.
hammai,
alas," p. 81, n. 1. ' is killed,' 135 (d).

4.
'
harida, green,' p. 100, n. haridurn, to take,' 13(>.
se,
(1)
AMg.,
'he.'
Mg.,
6e,
j;
109.
'him,' AMg. (3) 'his.' M., AMg.,S., 109. (4) 'her,' AMg. (Mg. ie gen.). they, them,' AMg. (Mg. 6e), (5)
(2)
'
harisa, joy,' 57. will be," havissadi, haviâdi

'
4.
Mg.
hasedi.
'
laughs.'
'
128.
12. cf.
hia, hida,
'
taken,'
haa.
109.
sea,
(1)
'
sweat'
{.iveda).
'
heart,' hiaa, H. hia.

'
9, (50:
abl. 92.
(2)
(3)
'
AMg.
.AMg.
seya,
white,' p. 144,
'
n. 5 {sveta).
seyam, better,' 14G, n. 2 (sveyas). sela, rock,' p. 109 (6). aohaUa, vitex,' p. 94, n. 10.
'
p.
hio, yesterday,' 58. hihgulaa, 'cinnabar,' p. 157, n. 7. hutta, 'facing,' p. 108 (c), p 121.
>?
V. 85.
SO, 'he,'
soa, (1)
(2)
'
108.
p. 123,
huvai, M.=hoi. huvissam (Mg. huviîam). be.' 134.
'
shall
grief {oka).
'
hua,
137.
13(),
'
become,'
125.
cf.
bhua.
"-'f-
JM. soya, washing,'

n. 2
H. hua.
hoi,
'
(muea).
!i
soavva=sunidavva, SOUqi, to hear.'

'
becomes.'
6. bhodi.
*
109
I--'-
'i""
vai.
p.
103,
houin, 'to be." p.

ii
(<;)
gerund.
V. 2.
SOkkha, happinoss,' 43. socca, .\.Mg., having heard," p. 146,

122. houna, miglit liojja, AMg.,
be,' 133.
n. 8.
sonlia=sunha,
p. KXi,
\'.
107.
8.
being,' p. 119, v. 80. hotthS, AMg., ' was,' p. 144, n. 1. thou 1 am.' S 129, hosi, homi,
hottani,
'
'
80ttia,=iirotriija , p. 102, n. Lottie, p. I(>6, n. 3. sottum, to sleep,' 130.

'
.Mg.
art.'
hossani=havis3ain,
hohii. 'it will be."
134.
134.
STUDENTS' BIBLIOaKAPHY.
[This Hat
is
Prakrit,
intended to assist the student to extending his knowledge of and to serve as a guide to ('oUege Libraries.
Prakrit.
(1).
A.
Grammars,
(Dr.
etc.
Pischel
Richard)
Grammatik der
of
Prakrit-
Sprachen.
["Grammar
the Prakrit Languages'']
Forms one volume (Band 1, Heft 8) of the Grundriss der Indo-Arisehen Philologie und Altertumskunde. Strassburg, 1900. 500 pages. Price l-ls.-6d.
[Deals with Jain Prakrits, Dramatic Prakrits, Paiâci and Apabhraniâ. A monument of industry and sound scholarship. A student who was worked through this "Introduction," should be able to make use of this work of reference, without any knowledge of German, by studying the examples given. The book contains an index of more unusual and special
forms. ]
(2).
A complete Index
lished
to Pischel's
Grammar
by Don. M. deSilva Wickremasinghe Indian Antiquary. [Is sold separately,]
has been pubin the
(3).
Jacobi
(Dr. Hermann). Ausgewahlte Erzahlungen in Maharashtri, zur Einfiihrung in das Studium des Prakrit. ["Selected Narratives in Maharastrl as an introduction to the study of Prakrit."] Leipzig. 1886.
[As regards the classification of Prakrits, and in some details of derivation this book is no longer up to date. For .Jain Maharastrl it gives a concise account (in German) of Phonetics and Grammar, 86 pages of Selections, and a Vocabulary (PrakritSanskrit-Grman). Nos. V. and IX of the Selected Narratives have been annotated and translated in this " Introduction" also portions of No. Ill to illustrate Ardha-Magadhl.]
;
(4).
Cowell (Professor E.
B.). The Prakrta-Prakas'a, or the Prakrt Grammar of Vararuci with the commentary (Manorama) of Bhamaha with notes, an English Translation and index of Prakrt words to which is prefixed a short introduction to Prakrt Grammar. Second Issue. London, 1868.
;
tion,
[Unfortunately Bhamaha's commentary on the Xllth Secwhich deals with Sauraseni has been lost, and many of The corresponding the sutras are " obscure and corrupt." rules in Hemacandra's work are given in an Appendix, " but Bhamaha even these leave many difficulties unexplained." has sometimes misunderstood Vararuci.]
216
(5).
Hemacandra
(n)
{vide
page
79).
Siddha-hema-candra (Adhyaya VIII deals with Prakrit), edited by Pischel, Parts I and II. Halle, 1877, 1880, with translation and notes. {Oerman).
Des'inamamala, edited by Pischel.
(G).
(ft)
Bombay,
1880.
(7).
Hcernle.
of the
I
The Prakrta-Lakanam
as Hoernle
or Canda's
Grammar
Ancient (Arsha) Prakrt.
Calcutta, 1880.
Ar3a=AMg., not
.stated=AMg. +M.]
(8).
Biihler.
Edition of Prakrta-laksmih.
"The
Paiyalachchhi Namamala, a Prakrit Kosha
by Dhanapala. Edited with critical notes, an introGottinduction and a glossary bv George Biihler "
gen, 1878.
B.
Texts.
(9).
Mdharasiri.
Hala.
(a)
Saptasatakam.
[Vocabulary
in
(Ftrfep. 73).
Edited by Weber.
Leipzig, 1881.
German,]
(10).
(6)
Kavyamala Series No. 21. Edited by Durgaprasad and Parab. Bombay, 1889.
[With Sanskrit commentary.]
(11).
Setubandha or Ravanavaha. (Firfep. 72), Edited by (a) Kavyamala Series No. 47. and Parab. Bombay, 1895.
[With Sanskrit version and commentary.]
(h)
S'ivadatta
(10).
Edited by Siegfried Goldschmidt-Strassburg, 1880. [With German tran.^lation and vocabulary.]
(11).
Gaiidavaho, ed. Sh. P. Pandit. Bombay, 1887. Bombay Sanskrit Series XXXIV. Out of print, revised
I
edition expected.]
Dramatic Prakrits.
[It is unnecessary to enumerate editions of Sanskrit Plays. Many will be familiar to the student, others he will find in
Schuyler's bibliography. Very few editions givo a correct or consistent Prakrit text. This is mainlv due to corruptions in the iMSS.]
(12).
Karpuramaiijari
of Rajaiêkhara.
Critical edition with
Vocabulary by Dr. Sten Konow.
Translation and Introduction by Prof. C.
B Lanmau.
INTEODUOTION TO PRAKRIT.
217
[Harvard Oriental Series, Vol. 4. This play is also in the K. M. Series No. 4, edited Durga Prasad and Parab. Bombay,
1887.]
(13).
S'akuntala, ed. Pischel.
Kiel, 1877.
[Follows the Bengal version, edited with a sounder knowledge of Prakrit than Monier Williams' edition of 1867.]
(14).
Mrcchakatikam, ed. Godabole. (Bombay Sanskrit Series).

[Other
Bombay,
1896.
Maya Sariiia. 1847. editions Stenzler, 1829. Hiranand and Parab., 1902. The last has been quoted in the extracts, as it is much used by students. Translation. Dr. A. W. Ryder, Harvard Oriental Series,
Calcutta,
Vol.
(15).
9.]
Rama
Ratnavall.
A second text of this, with a PrakritSanskrit glossary by Capeller, is given in Bohllingks Chrestomathic, p. 290 ff. St. Petersburg, 1877.
Ardha-Mdgadht.
(16).
Kalpasutra (Kappasutta),
[Translated
n. 3.]
ed. Jacobi, Leipzig, 1879. by Jacobi, S.B.E., XXII, vide p. 71, and p. 161.
(17).
Ayarangasutta,
[The
first
ed. Jacobi.
London, 1882,
1936).
(Calcutta edn.,
Samvat
aAga and the most archaic.

ed.
Important
for prose.]
(18).
Suyagadangasutta,
[Second ahga.
Bombay.
for verse.
]
Samvat
1936.
Important
(19).
Uvasagadasao,
ed. Hcernle.
Calcutta, 1890.
(Bibliotheca Indica).
[Eleventh anga, contains narratives.
Both text and com-
mentary are edited
critically.]
Jain Mahdrdstri.
(20).
Avasyaka, Erzahlungen,
Leipzig, 1897.
ed. Ernst
Leumann.
Heft
1.
See also No. 3 above, Jacobi.

(21).
Kalakacarya-caritam, ed. Jacobi {vide Z. D. M. G. Vol. 34 (1880). p. 262.
p. 139).
(22).
Kakkuka
Inscription.
(Extract No. 17, p. 134).
218
INTRODDCTION TO PRAKRIT.
Jain Sauraseni,
(23).
Pavayanasara by Kundakundacarya.
(24).
Kattigeyanupekkha by Karttikeyasvamin,
darkar.
ed.
Bhan-
PaUaci.
Pali.
[It is
{Vide p. 68-69).
student
who does not make

etc.
only necessary to mention a few books useful to the a special study of this language.]
Grammars,
(25).
Miiller, E. A simplified grammar of the Pali language. London, 1884. (Triibner).

[There
is
and vocabulary.
(26).
a short grammar by Frankfiirter with selections A better grammar is that of M. Duroiselle.] Pali
Childers, R. C. Dictionary of the Fourth Impression. London, 1909.
Language.
Texts and Translations.

(27)
Jatakas,
edited by Fausboll. London, 1877.

translated
Triibner.
7 vols.
(-8).
,,
Cowell and Rouse.

teacher.]
by various hands, Cambridge.. 1895.
edited
by
[With these the student can make a good start without a
(29).
Andersen
(Dines).
edited
Pali Reader.
Copenhagen.
(30).
(31).
Mahavamsa,
Turnour, translated Geigêr.
Publications of the Pali
Text Society.
Old Prakrit.
The material is scattered. the student may consult

(32).
For Asoka's Edicts
Senart
.Les inscriptions de Piyadasi.

first
The
carum.
difficult
volume of the Corpus Inscriptionum IndiAsoka's Edicts edited by Cunningham is to obtain and needs revision.
(33)
Franke
(Professor 0.)
IGerman.
" Pali and Sanskrit," 1902.

p. 74, n. 2.]
Vide
INTRODUCTION TO PRAKRIT,
(34).
219
Liiders.
" Fragments
[German.
of
two buddhistic dramas."
Vide p. 72, p. 78.]
Late Prakrit. Apahhram&a. Hemacandra. Vide No. 5 above, and

(35).
p. 6.
Pingala-chandahsutra or Prakrta-Pingala-siitra. vj'amala series No. 41, ed. Sivadatta and Parab.
[A
critical edition is needed.]
Ka-
^ Y
Hf
RETURN
TO#^
CIRCULATION DEPARTMENT 202 Main Library

1
LOAN PERIOD HOME USE
^^^^^'B.y..c.
,,,,,
^00U30S7

Introductiontopr 00 Woolrich

Caricato da

Informazioni sul documento

Descrizione originale:

Titolo originale

Copyright

Formati disponibili

Condividi questo documento

Condividi o incorpora il documento

Opzioni di condivisione

Hai trovato utile questo documento?

Questo contenuto è inappropriato?

Copyright:

Formati disponibili

Introductiontopr 00 Woolrich

Caricato da

Copyright:

Formati disponibili

INTRODUCTION TO PKAKRIT

UNIVERSITY OF THE PAN JAB, LAHORE.

which a considerable portion

whatever Examiners may imagine, the student reads

At any rate he begins that way

Prakrit afterwards, noticing certain similarities, and some of

the differences, so that he

be able to recognize a passage,

Sanskrit form, and

perhaps in an English translation.

Even the more advanced

reads the Prakrit as

comes, at the slightest

check looks down at the

Consequently few students

cannot blame them.

Tlie editions they use are often incorrect

in the Prakrit portions, and there

reference on which they can

find definite rules.

this Introduction to Prakrit is to provide students

more attentive and more scholarly study

and Maharastri passages

in their Sanskrit Plays.

The main object however

to assist the student of the

History of the great Indo- Aryan

Language from Vedic

The Indian student

starts with an inti-

he studies Sanskrit in the University, he will discover that

the Vedic language represents a

more ancient stage

there are accurate

The middle stage has been comparatively

the mediaeval Prakrits are in a more real sense

dead languages, than

Outside India scholars

convenient representative of this stage.

student of Indo- Aryan Philology needs a clear view of

characteristics of the diflFerent Prakrits.

work may prove

useful for this purpose.

Perhaps the best plan

the thorough study of one dialect, afterwards comparing others

with this as a standard.

This was the method of the Indian

grammarians who took Maharastri as their standard.

only fyroae extant in Maharastri was written by Jains, and that

not in the same dialect as the songs in the dramas.

a separate subject in our

Moreover the Sanskrit student does

into contact with Prakrit in the plays,

been thought desirable to present a general view

The student making

use of this book

advised to read the

general sections, and to study the chapters on Phonetics and

with special reference to the two main

A. Macdonell, Clarendon Press.

The more important examples

are printed in bold